Schedule B - Attachment 04

REQUISITION NO.
3000599034
SCHEDULE B
ATTACHMENT IV
WORK SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS FOR RELEASE PURCHASE ORDERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. SCOPE OF WORK OF WORK UNIT RATES
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 GENERAL
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3 SURVEY
1.4 MATERIAL TESTING
1.5 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES
1.6 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1.7 TEMPORARY FENCING, STORAGE AND TOILET
1.8 TEMPORARY PROPERTY PROTECTION
1.9 SCAFFOLDING (6 Meters and Below) STEEL FIXED LADDER WITH
CAGE
1.10 PREPARATION OF AS BUILT PLANS AND DRAWINGS
1.11 SITE CLEARING
2.0 SITE WORK
2.1 DEMOLITION
2.2 SITE CLEARING/GRADING
2.3 EXCAVATION
2.4 FILL/BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
2.5 SOIL STABILIZATION OR REINFORCEMENT
2.6 TERMITE ERADICATION
2.7 MANHOLE/VALVE BOX/CATCH BASIN
2.8 ASPHALT PAVING
2.9 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
2.10 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS/WALKWAYS
2.11 PRE-CAST CONCRETE PAVING
2.12 WOODEN FENCES AND GATES
2.13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
2.14 RIP-RAP STONEWALL
2.15 BUMPER RAILS
2.16 PARKING BLOCKS
2.17 STRUCTURE MOVING (Relocation of Portable Buildings)
2.18 SCAFFOLDING
2.19 AGGREGATES
2.20 PLASTIC WOOD FENCE AND GATE
Page 1 of 221
REQUISITION NO. 3000599034
3.0 CONCRETE
3.1 FORMWORK
3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
3.3 CONCRETE
3.4 CONCRETE TOPPING
3.5 CONSTRUCTION GROUT
3.6 DRILL HOLES
3.7 CONCRETE RESTORATION/CLEANING
4.0 MASONRY
4.1 DECORATIVE BLOCK WALLS

4.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (CMU)/BRICK WALLS
4.3 GLASS BLOCKS
4.4 STONE MASONRY
4.5 MASONRY RESTORATION
5.0 METALS
5.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL

5.2 STEEL/METAL/PLASTIC DECK
5.3 METAL STUD FRAMING
5.4 METAL FURRING TO DRYWALLS AND MASONRY
5.5 STEEL HANDRAIL
5.6 GRATING
5.7 WELDING
6.0 WOOD AND PLASTICS
6.1 COUNTER/WORK TOP

6.2 CEILING FRAMING
6.3 FLOOR FRAMING
6.4 ROOF FRAMING
6.5 SOFFIT FRAMING
6.6 SOFFIT AND SOFFIT VENT
6.7 FASCIA OR VERGE BOARDS
6.8 STUD WALL FRAMING
6.9 BATTENS/FURRING TO DRYWALLS AND MASONRY WALLS
6.10 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR WALL SHEATHING AND DECKING/SUB
FLOORING
6.11 BASEBOARDS
6.12 MOLDINGS
6.13 KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CABINETS
6.14 SUNSCREENS, SUNSHADES AND SUNDECKS
6.15 PLASTIC WOOD
6.16 GRATING
6.17 MISCELLANEOUS
Page 2 of 221
7.0 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
7.1 WALL/CEILING/FLOOR/ROOF INSULATIONS

7.2 FIRE BARRIER
7.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING
7.4 FIBER CEMENT CORRUGATED ROOFING TILES
7.5 ALUMINUM LIGHT STEEL SHEETING
7.6 BUILT-UP MODIFIED BITUMEN FELT ROOFING SYSTEM
7.7 EPDM ROOFING SYSTEM

7.8 LIQUID APPLIED ROOFING MEMBRANES
7.9 SIDING INSTALLATION
7.10 FLASHINGS, TRIM CLOSURES, ROOF DRAINS, SCUPPERS AND
GUTTERS
8.0 DOOR AND WINDOWS
8.1 WOOD AND METAL DOOR FRAMES

8.2 WOOD AND METAL DOORS
8.3 ALUMINUM DOORS
8.4 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
8.5 ALUMINUM DOOR/WINDOW SCREEN
8.6 DOOR AND WINDOW GLASS/GLAZING
8.7 DOOR HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
8.8 MISCELLANEOUS
9.0 FINISHES
9.1 PLASTER FINISHES ON CONCRETE/CMU, TIMBER/METAL STUD WALLS

AND CEILING
9.2 REPAIR OF SAND/CEMENT PLASTER AND GYPSUM PLASTER
9.3 GYPSUM BOARD
9.4 TILE WORK
9.5 ACOUSTIC CEILING SYSTEM
9.6 RESILIENT FLOORING
9.7 CARPET
9.8 CARPET TILE
9.9 CARPET CLEANING
9.10 WALL COVERING
9.11 PLAIN BOARD (Interior Wall and Ceiling)
9.12 PAINTING
9.13 VITRITURF AND PROFILE PAINT
9.14 EIFS WALL CLADDING
10.0 SPECIALTIES
10.1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS AND URINAL SCREEN

10.2 LOUVERED VENTS
10.3 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
Page 3 of 221
10.4 FIRE HOSE CABINETS AND REELS
Page 4 of 221
10.5 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10.6 PROPRIETARY METAL PARTITIONS
10.7 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
11.0 EQUIPMENT
NOT USED
12.0 FURNISHING
NOT USED
13.0 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13.1 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

13.2 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
14.0 CONVEYING SYSTEM
NOT USED
15.0 MECHANICAL
15.1 PLUMBING
15.2 H.V.A.C.
16.0 ELECTRICAL
16.1 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE

16.2 PREPARE AND INSTALL CONDUITS
16.3 PREPARE AND INSTALL CONDUIT FITTING
16.4 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
16.5 INSTALL CONDUCTORS AND WEATHER PROOF JUNCTION BOX
16.6 WEATHER HEADS
16.7 INSTALL MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL BOARDS, PANEL BOARDS AND
LOAD CENTERS
16.8 SAFETY SWITCH
16.9 LIGHTING CONTACTORS, MAGNETIC CONTACTORS AND
COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTERS
16.10 CIRCUIT BREAKERS (Molded Case)
16.11 INSTALL SWITCHES (General Purpose or Dimmer), RECEPTACLES
(General Purpose or GFCI), DATA/TELEPHONE/INTERCOME AND
TELEVISION OUTLET
16.12 INSTALL LIGHTING FIXTURES (Interior or Exterior)
16.13 ELECTRIC MOTORS
16.14 TRANSFORMERS AND CONCRETE DUCT BANK
16.15 INSTALL WIRE WAY DUCT
16.16 INSTALL WIRE MOLD RACEWAY
16.17 INSTALL CHANNEL STRUT RACEWAY
16.18 INSTALL CHANNEL STRUT SUSPENDED ON ROD HANGERS
Page 5 of 221
16.19 CABLE TRAY SUPPORT SYSTEM ALUMINUM LADDER TYPE

16.20 WATER HEATERS
16.21 LAYING UNDERGROUND POWER CABLES
16.22 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING AND GROUNDING SYSTEM
16.23 INSPECTION AND COMMISSIONING
16.24 MISCELLANEOUS
B. SCOPE OF WORK OF TIME UNIT RATES
1.0 CONTRACTOR MANPOWER, VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENTS FOR

RELEASE P. O. WORK
WORK SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS OF RELEASE PURCHASE ORDER
A. SCOPE OF WORK OF WORK UNIT RATES
CONTRACTOR shall provide all supervision, manpower, tools and equipment to perform the
following services:
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 All items or WORK activity described in this Section 1.0 General
Requirements are deemed part of all Work Unit Rate items described in the
succeeding Sections 2.0 through 17.0 of this Attachment IV.
1.1.2 All CONTRACTOR-supplied consumable/expendable materials whether

specified in this Attachment IV or not shall be inclusive in the rates for Rate A
(Labor) and Rate B (Labor and Materials) as shown in Schedule C,
Attachment I.
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
1.2.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform all WORK in accordance with all latest editions
of the Codes and Standards specified in Attachment X of this Schedule B.
1.2.2 In an event of conflict between those specified Codes and Standards, SAUDI
ARAMCO Codes and Standards will control.
1.3 SURVEY
CONTRACTOR shall provide a qualified surveyor to provide all surveying WORK

required to complete the WORK, including layout of WORK Site, layout of batter
boards for structures, building foundations, column grids, levels and utility slopes.
1.4 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMPLETION
1.4.1 When tests are specified in the Released Purchase Order (Scope of Work) or
in any material standard or as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Page 6 of 221
Engineer, the CONTRACTOR shall perform the specified test at no additional

cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
1.4.2 SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer shall witness equipment testing,

alignment, checking, calibration, run-in, adjustment, energizing and all others
testing required in the Release Purchase Order, performed by the
CONTRACTOR.
1.4.3 CONTRACTOR shall provide supervision and labor to assist SAUDI

ARAMCO inspectors during inspection and acceptance of the WORK.
1.4.4 Provide the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer with records of field
inspection, testing and etc performed by the CONTRACTOR as required by
the contract.
1.5 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES
CONTRACTOR shall submit for SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineers review and
approval material specifications and samples of all materials to be used prior to
procurement.
1.6 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary utilities as required
by WORK.
1.7 TEMPORARY FENCING, STORAGE AND TOILET.
1.7.1 As and when required by SAUDI ARAMCO, CONTRACTOR shall provide

and erect temporary fence with pedestrian gate to construction sites,
constructed from 50 mm x 100 mm support timbers or similar and clad with
exterior grade, white painted plywood. Fencing shall display the following
information:
a. Proponent Name and Organization
b. CONTRACTOR Name and Contact Telephone Number (day and night)
c. SAUDI ARAMCO Engineer In-Charge, Name and Telephone Number
d. Project Name
1.7.2 Fencing shall be supplied with vision panel as requested by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Engineer. CONTRACTOR shall supply all materials. Fencing shall
remain in place and in good condition for the duration of the project, upon
completion, fencing shall be removed and the area reinstated to its original
condition.
1.7.3 CONTRACTOR shall provide and erect temporary fenced and enclosed
storage yard at the WORK SITE to store all materials and equipment. It is the
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to secure the storage yards and provide
the following:
Page 7 of 221
a. Location shall be approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
b. CONTRACTOR shall provide fire extinguishers and water barrels that

meet Loss Prevention Department requirement.
1.7.4 CONTRACTOR shall provide portable (chemical) toilets as deemed

necessary for CONTRACTOR use. Clean, service, maintain and periodically
empty all toilets. Locations shall be approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer.
1.8 TEMPORARY PROPERTY PROTECTION.
1.8.1 CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions and install all protective
covering to existing utilities, site improvements and those plants in and
around the WORK Site.
1.8.2 Should CONTRACTOR damage any SAUDI ARAMCO property while

performing the WORK; CONTRACTOR shall repair such damages to SAUDI
ARAMCO satisfaction at CONTRACTORs own cost. In case CONTRACTOR
fails to repair the damages, SAUDI ARAMCO shall have the right to have the
damages repaired by any means SAUDI ARAMCO decides and shall back
charge THE CONTRACTOR.
1.9 SCAFFOLDING (6 meters and below) STEEL FIXED LADDER WITH CAGE
1.9.1 CONTRACTOR shall provide and erect tubular metal scaffolding as required
to satisfactory complete the WORK. Scaffolding can be fixed (stationary) or
mobile whichever is appropriate for the WORK to be performed. The
scaffolding shall be properly braced, with close boarded wooden planks to
form working platforms provided with guardrail system, toe boards and
installed with proper type ladder complete with locking casters,
horizontal/diagonal braces, cross bracing, locking pins as required.
Scaffolding shall be plumb, level and tied into the walls for complete stability.
1.9.2 Erection and dismantling of scaffolding must conform to the requirements

called for in SAUDI ARAMCO General Instruction G. I. 0008.001 and the
SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Manual.
1.9.3 STEEL FIXED LADDER WITH CAGE:
1.9.3.1 Contractor shall provide, fabricate and erect standard

Steel Fixed Ladder, with cage design to be used in
process industry facilities.
1.9.3.2 All structural material shall be ASTM A36 steel unless
otherwise noted.
1.9.3.3 The entire ladder shall be welded construction except
as shown. All welds shall be smooth, continuous, and
sealed.
Page 8 of 221
1.9.3.4 All ladder bolts shall be 5/8-inch (16-mm) ASTM A307

bolts unless otherwise noted.
1.9.3.5 Ladder rung design is based on a 200-pound (890-N)
concentrated live load.
1.9.3.6 Ladder connections are designed for a maximum total
load (dead plus live) of 1000 pounds (4.4 kN) on one
side rail.
1.9.3.7 Cages shall be provided on ladders of more than 20
feet to a maximum unbroken length of 30 feet, where
the length of ladder refers to the vertical distance
between landings. Cages are also required on ladders
less than 20 feet in length where the ladder is located
at an elevated platform that does not provide adequate
fall protection. Consideration of cage protection for
these applications should be made in the design
process for each particular case. Ladder safety devices
may be used in lieu of the required cage protection.
1.9.3.8 Ladder assemblies shall be coated after fabrication in
accordance with the design drawings and
specifications governing the project
1.10 PREPARATION OF AS BUILT PLANS AND DRAWINGS
1.10.1 No WORK shall be accepted until it has the approval of SAUDI ARAMCO as
being in accordance with the specifications and the drawings.
1.10.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide "As Built" drawings prior to final acceptance of
the project. CONTRACTOR shall hold (1) one set of the Project Drawings,
which shall be marked up utilizing red ink as WORK is completed to identify
and show the actual installations, if and when it deviates from the drawings.
No project shall be considered complete until acceptable "As-Built" drawings
are turned over to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
1.10.3 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain one complete set of drawings at the site
on which, as the WORK progresses, CONTRACTOR shall record all changes
and deviations from the contract drawings, which shall include the exact
locations and elevations of all underground or concealed utilities.
1.10.4 Any subcontractor performing WORK under these specifications and project
drawings shall provide two sets of "As-Built" marked-up print-outs to the
prime CONTRACTOR periodically as required by the prime CONTRACTOR.
1.10.5 CONTRACTOR shall likewise submit the following together with the As-Built
drawings:
1.10.5.1 An accurate compiled List of Materials with appropriate stock

numbers or manufacturers catalog number and vendors name of
all materials received and used by CONTRACTOR.
Page 9 of 221

all materials furnished by CONTRACTOR.

all materials furnished by CONTRACTOR as per Work Unit Rate
shown in Schedule "C", Attachment I.
1.11 SITE CLEANING
1.11.1 Remove from the WORK Site and dispose of properly all waste materials at
SAUDI ARAMCO designated dump site, as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Project Engineer.
1.11.2 During progress of WORK, keep premises free from accumulation of waste
materials, rubbish or debris caused by WORK or workman.
1.11.3 Upon completion of WORK and at such time as directed, remove surplus and
waste materials, debris, rubbish, equipment and implements from the jobsite
and leave WORK in clean, neat and acceptable condition, as approved by the
SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
2.0 SITE WORK
2.1 DEMOLITION
WORK covers the demolition and removal of all building materials required to
complete a Release Purchase Order or Release Purchase Order or as indicated on
individual project drawings, including repair works to adjacent areas, general
cleaning & dumping of debris.
2.1.1 General
2.1.1.1 Construct necessary shoring as required to protect all existing

construction or installations which are to remain.
2.1.1.2 Provide protective measures to all items, materials, finishes,

grounds and landscaping with suitable covering. All items
accidentally damaged by the CONTRACTOR shall be restored to its
original condition.
2.1.1.3 Construct temporary dust and noise control or partition to separate

areas where noisy or dusty operations are performed.
2.1.1.4 Maintain or provide necessary protection to all existing utilities

identified to remain.
2.1.2 Concrete/Foundation Demolition
2.1.2.1 Demolish concrete foundation.
Page 10 of 221
2.1.2.2 Break-out and remove non reinforced concrete structures.
2.1.2.3 Break-out and remove reinforced concrete structure, including

cutting of reinforcing bars/mesh.
2.1.2.4 Saw, cut concrete pavement/slab.
2.1.2.5 Scabble or scrape concrete toping/screed.
2.1.2.6 Saw, cut, and chase out concrete walls for conduit/pipe
installation.
2.1.3 Site Demolition
2.1.3.1 Cut asphalt paving using asphalt cutter.
2.1.3.2 Brake-out and demolish asphalt pavement.
2.1.3.3 Break-out and remove concrete pavers, including removal of sand

bedding or adhesive/mortar.
2.1.3.4 Remove wheel bumpers.
2.1.3.5 Remove chain link fence.
2.1.3.6 Remove chain link gate.
2.1.3.7 Carefully dismantle and remove privacy fences including all gates
and wall mounted timber supports (redwood or plastic wood). All
removed timbers shall be carefully de-nailed. Mark and identify all
removed timbers, gates and hardware in the position from which
they where removed.
2.1.3.8 Remove hedges, wire fence and steel pipe post, including concrete
foundation. Dispose to designated dumping area.
2.1.3.9 Remove basketball board including fixing accessories and dispose

to the designated dumping area.
2.1.3.10 Remove metal valve box cover.
2.1.3.11 Removal shall include foundations as required.
2.1.4 Sunshade/Sunscreen, Sundeck Demolition
2.1.4.1 Carefully dismantle timber window sunscreens with lattice type in fill
inclusive of all wall hangers and fixings. Sunscreens are situated at
ground and first floor levels. Retain and store for future re-
installation.
Page 11 of 221
Upon completion of other associated works, re-assemble and re-fix

sunscreens. Damaged members shall be brought to the attention of
the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer and upon his approval and
instructions shall be replaced.
2.1.4.2 Dismantle and remove timber sunshade above sliding doors

including all machine bolts, screens or nails. Notify SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer of any defective timbers or wall support.
Check joints where timber has been connected to main wall framing.
Sunshades shall be removed for repairs and/or painting.
2.1.4.3 Dismantle and remove Patio Sunshade or Entrance Sunscreen

including all machine bolts, coach screws nails, etc. Mark and
identify all parts. Set aside and store for future re-installation. As
and when instructed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer,
check sunshades for defective timbers and provide the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer with a condition report and material
requirement. Replace all defective timbers and re-install sunshade
in original position. Prepare sunshade and paint.
2.1.4.4 Carefully dismantle and remove upper sundeck. The WORK shall
include all framing, joists, supports and accessories such as floor
drain and metal flashings. Sundeck located approximately 3 m
above grade level. Mark all removed parts, set aside and a store
ready for re-fixing.
2.1.4.5 Remove sections of timber sundeck only, for access to siding on

upper part. Re-fix timbers when associated WORK is completed by
others.
2.1.4.6 Remove playhouse or wooden trellis and dispose to designated

dumping area.
2.1.4.7 Car sun shade
2.1.4.7.1 Contractor shall provide and install new car

sunshade with reinforced concrete
foundation.
2.1.4.7.1.1 Galvanized steel column: 150mm x

150mm x 6mm galvanized inside
/outside with powder coating ASTM
A500 GR50.
2.1.4.7.1.2 Rectangular tube: 100mmx 50mm x
4mm galvanized inside and outside
with powder coating ASTM
A500GR50.
2.1.4.7.1.3 Square tube: 80mm x80mm x 4mm
galvanized ASTM A500 GR-50.
2.1.4.7.1.4 All pipe 57mm x 3mm thick
galvanized ASTM GR-50.
Page 12 of 221
2.1.4.7.1.5 Swivel cross standard (galvanized 1-

1mm x 4mm)
2.1.4.7.1.6 Cap DS (galvanized 1-mm x 4mm)
2.1.4.7.1.7 Adaptor standard (galvanized 1-
mm x 4mm)
2.1.4.7.1.8 SBFC DS (galvanized 100mm x50mm
x 4mm)
2.1.4.7.1.9 Combo 1 DS(galvanized 150mm x
150mm 6mm)
2.1.4.7.1.10 Combo 2 DS (galvanized 150mm x
150mm x 6mm)
2.1.4.7.1.11 Combo 1 SS (galvanized 150mm x
150mm x 6mm)
2.1.4.7.1.12 Combo 2 SS (galvanized 150mm x
150mm x 6mm)
2.1.4.7.1.13 Foundation: 1700mm x 1700mm
500mm (concrete cement with comp.
strength of 4000 psi & Epoxy steel
12mm @ 200mm c/c
2.1.4.7.1.14 Sunshade: Cloth with Polyethelene
with different colors of your choice (UV
stabilized) made in Australia.. Gale
Commercial 95 TM HDPE
2.1.4.7.1.15 All bolts are 14mm ASTM A325 unless
otherwise specified on the drawing.
2.1.4.8 Refer to Aramco Standard Engineering Drawing # DA-950182-001,

DA-950183-001, DA-950184-001 & DA-950185-001.
2.1.4.8.1 Contractor shall provide and install car

sunshade spare parts:
2.1.4.8.1.1 Fiber Cloth Polyethelene

2.1.4.8.1.2 Steel Column
2.1.4.8.1.3 Steel Supports
2.1.4.8.2 Recommended Vendor:

2.1.4.8.2.1 AMWAJ AL-SEEF SHADEPORTS
FACTORY
2.1.5 Ceiling Demolition
2.1.5.1 Remove acoustic ceiling tiles from ceiling grid.
2.1.5.2 Remove suspended ceiling grid system, including wall angles, tees,
cross tees, hangers and fixing.
2.1.5.3 Remove ceiling lining (any type).
2.1.5.4 Remove ceiling framing system (any type).
Page 13 of 221
2.1.6 Door Demolition
2.1.6.1 Remove door (any type).
2.1.6.2 Remove door frames (any type).
2.1.6.3 Remove garage door.
2.1.6.4 Remove existing additional security lock / barrel bolt at entrance

door and dispose to designated dumping area.
2.1.6.5 Remove old, damaged and non working accordion door complete
with fittings and dispose to designated dumping area.
2.1.6.6 Remove existing security lock installed at patio gate and dispose to
designated dumping area.
2.1.6.7 Disconnect and remove automatic garage door opener, including all
associated fittings and accessories.
2.1.6.8 Remove door hardware (any type).
2.1.7 Flooring Demolition
2.1.7.1 As and when called for, remove various types of floor covering such
as vinyl, linoleum, rubber, cork, carpet, carpet tile, ceramic, marble,
granite, softwood, slate, hardwood block or plywood. Work shall
include removal of adhesive, under padding and tack strip.
Base flooring shall be left clean and free of any other deleterious
material ready to receive other floor finishes. All waste material shall
be disposed of to designated dumping area as instructed by the
The WORK shall include relocation or removal of furniture or office

equipment and the subsequent re-installation on occupied facilities
or residence/house.
2.1.7.2 Remove plywood or wood sub flooring.
2.1.7.3 Remove floor joists (any type and size).
2.1.7.4 Strip out wood parquet including its accessories: stair nosing an
2.1.8 Masonry Demolition
2.1.8.1 Break-out and remove Concrete Mason Units (CMU) walls and or
decorative block walls, including cutting of reinforcing bars and
ladder type reinforcement (any type).
Page 14 of 221
2.1.8.2 Breakout and remove glass block walls and stone walls (veneer),
inclusive of removal of grouts and anchors.
2.1.8.3 Saw, cut, and chase

2.1.8.4 Out CMU/brick walls for conduit/pipe installation.
2.1.8.5 Saw, cut and demolish portion of masonry/concrete walls to form

required opening.
2.1.9 Siding and Roofing Demolition
2.1.9.1 Disconnect and remove louvered roof space air vent, either wooden,
metal, aluminum or plastic. Set aside and store for future re-
installation. Size varies.
2.1.9.2 Siding/Roofing Removal
The WORK shall include but not be limited to the removal of wall
siding and roofing consisting of various types of building
construction materials fixed on all types of accommodation, support
facilities and buildings as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer.
Remove existing building paper and insulation.
CONTRACTOR shall exercise extreme care and caution at all times

when removing wall siding and roofing; any damage incurred due to
CONTRACTOR negligence shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR at
no additional cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
Material and/or fixtures identified by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project

Engineer to be re-used or retained shall be stored or transported to
a designated storage area.
Wall siding shall be completely removed to leave timber or steel or

metal studs and other finished surfaces free of all nails, screws and
other associated fixings and ready to receive new wall siding
material. Partial removal of wall siding may be required to carry out
repairs or partial replacement and is deemed to be included herein.
Install new sheet vapor barrier to cover all stripped areas to protect
against rain and dust infiltration etc.
CONTRACTOR shall carry out a full survey of the WORK and

location, remove all obstacles and other foreign matter and
coordinate with the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer to gain clear
access to WORK areas.
After removal of any wall sidings and roofing, check all exposed
items for soundness or defects:
Electrical wiring installation.
Page 15 of 221
Plumbing installation.
Check all studs, battens, timber framing for general condition
(termite, attack, rot, etc).
The SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer shall be immediately notified
upon discovering any defects.
2.1.10 Wall Demolition
2.1.10.1 Remove baseboard (any type).
2.1.10.2 Remove various type of wall covering such as vinyl wall covering or
ceramic tiles or granite or marble tiles, etc. Wash down surfaces and
leave free from all glue and/or fixing materials.
2.1.10.3 Remove wall lining (any type).
2.1.10.4 Saw, cut and remove drywall on metal studs and form framed
opening.
2.1.10.5 Remove paint with paint stripper.
2.1.10.6 Saw, cut and remove drywall on wood studs and form framed
opening.
2.1.10.7 Remove wall framing (any type).
2.1.10.8 Remove toilet compartment, inclusive of all hardware, accessories,

fixings and supports.
2.1.10.9 Remove proprietary metal partitions (Hauserman Panel and the

like).
Remove panel strip (for Type P61) or rubber strip (for Type P82).
Remove connection keys holding the panels together.
With lifting hooks, slowly push the channels out of the channels.
Remove the leveling plates and base channels out of the floor by 1
lifting with a crow bar.
Remove ceiling clips from the runners, and then take down.
Dismantled panels are often re-used on the same WORK Site.
Removed panels, strip, channels and other accessories shall be

taken out on the job site by panel dollies into the freight elevator,
down the building and into the loading dock. Transport excess
panels and other accessories into the panel store. Segregate by
type and size, and store at the right location inside the storage.
2.1.11 Window Demolition
Page 16 of 221
2.1.11.1 Remove existing curtain rods and window shades including brackets
and dispose to designated dumping area.
2.1.11.2 Remove windows (any type).
2.1.11.3 Miscellaneous Demolition
2.1.11.4 Remove non-standard mirror inside bedrooms, repair wall to receive

new paintworks.
2.1.11.5 Remove fire resistant intumescent sealer.
2.1.11.6 Remove wool fire barrier inclusive of angular frames/supports and

fixing.
2.1.11.7 Remove roof, ceiling, wall and floor insulations (any type and
thickness).
2.1.11.8 Remove counter top (any type)
2.1.11.9 Remove cabinet.
2.1.11.10 Remove glass pane from existing doors and windows.
2.1.11.11 Remove different sizes and types of timber framings.
2.1.11.12 Remove large posts and beams.
2.2 SITE CLEARING/GRADING
2.2.1 Site Clearing
2.2.1.1 Clearing shall consist of satisfactory removal and disposal of all

types of vegetations, boulders or large stones, rubbish materials
and debris, including grass, bush and rubbish occurring within the
limit of construction site.
2.2.1.2 WORK includes grubbing, including satisfactory removal and

disposal of stumps and root to a depth of 0.5 meters below ground
within the limit of construction site; including filling of voids due to
this WORK.
2.2.1.3 WORK shall include removal of loose topsoil and subsoil.
2.2.2 Site Grading
WORK shall include removal of loose topsoil and subsoil, including cutting,
filling (with sand or marl) or grading and rough contouring for building pads,
parking areas, access road and etc.
Page 17 of 221
2.3 EXCAVATION
2.3.1 CONTRACTOR shall carry out excavation of trenches and pits for Services,
Utilities and Foundations, etc. CONTRACTOR shall carry out cutting and
filling in layers as necessary and associated activities of building construction,
foundation, and preventing beach sand erosion.
2.3.2 CONTRACTOR shall be totally responsible for the stability of excavations.

Submit Excavation Plan including Shoring Plan to SAUDI ARAMCO Loss
Prevention, prior to any excavation WORK.
2.3.3 Shoring
2.3.3.1 All excavations less than 1.2 m deep shall be sloped in accordance
with SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual as follow:-
A. Type C Soil: sandy and lose; width versus height angled at 1.5
to 1 slope or 34 degrees.
B. Type B Soil: mix of sand, rocks and clay; angled at a 1 to 1

slope, or 45 degrees.
C. Type A Soil: clay, rocks and cohesive; angled at a to 1 slope

or 53 degrees.
D. Stable rock: 90 degree or vertical.
2.3.3.2 All excavations deeper than 1.2 m shall include shoring in

compliance with Chapter II, Section 2 (Shoring Protective System)
of SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual.
2.3.3.3 All shoring and/or shoring design/plan and materials shall be

approved by SAUDI ARAMCO Loss Prevention and Consulting
Services Department.
2.3.4 Rock Excavation
2.3.4.1 Rock Excavation is the removal of bedrock formation and other fully
indurate materials including concrete, masonry and boulders larger
than 0.4 cu m (0.5 cu yd) which require breaking by use of a wedge,
sledge, bar, power-operated tool, or drilling and blasting.
Excavation with the aid of ripping shall not be classified as rock
excavation (Define as soils and rock falling outside the CAT D9N
rippable range of seismic velocities as shown in the Caterpillar
Handbook of Ripping, latest edition).
2.3.5 De-Watering
CONTRACTOR shall provide a de-watering system for all excavations below

the water table. At beach/shoreline locations where the water table is very
high, excavations shall be de-watered using specialized well-pointing
Page 18 of 221
equipment. Where minor water ingress is experienced the excavation can be

kept dry using standard pumping techniques utilizing drainage channels to
sump pumps. The de-watering system shall be furnished with all the
necessary pumps, sand bags, accessories etc. required for the satisfactory
operation of the system. The de-watering system shall only be removed after
all construction is complete and excavation is ready for backfilling.
Page 19 of 221
2.3.6 Equipment
2.3.6.1 CONTRACTOR shall furnish and use only equipment and tools,
which are specifically designated and designed for excavation,
grading, cutting, filling and de-watering.
2.3.6.2 All equipment to be used shall meet SAUDI ARAMCO Loss

Prevention requirements and be approved for use by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer. Any equipment found to be
unacceptable by SAUDI ARAMCO should be immediately removed
from the WORK Site.
2.3.7 Completion of Work
2.3.7.1 At the time requested by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer, the
entire site shall be cleaned and smoothed to the finish grades as
required. Any excess materials shall be removed from the WORK
Site as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
2.3.7.2 CONTRACTOR shall adhere to SAUDI ARAMCO procedures,

specifications and standards applicable to excavation, grading,
cutting and filling, which include but are not limited to the following:
SAES-M-100
Uniform Building Code (UBC)
SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual
2.4 FILL/BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
2.4.1 Fill/Backfilling
Carry out fill/backfilling in lifts for all the activities involved in the upgrade or
construction of buildings, foundations, piping, electrical services and related
works. WORK shall include but not be limited to laying and spreading of
9.375mm (3/8) gravel mulch.
2.4.2 Materials
2.4.2.1 Clean Sand
a. Clean Sand containing only windblown material meeting the

gradation below; and/or
b. Soil material meeting the following gradation and containing

less than 3 percent weight of organic material, marl or clay:
Sieve Size Percent Passing

1/4 in (6.25 mm) 100
No. 10 (2.00 90 - 100
mm)
No. 200 (0.075 10 or less
Page 20 of 221
mm)
2.4.2.2 Dune Sand is wind-deposited sand consisting of relatively single-

sized particles generally passing the No. 16 sieve (1.18 mm) and
usually containing less than 10% soil particles passing the No. 200
sieve (0.075 mm).
2.4.2.3 Marl is a wide variety of calcareous soil materials found in Saudi

Arabia, which may vary from clay to gravel sizes and often include
cobble, and boulder sized pieces.
2.4.2.4 Dune Sand and Marl shall be in accordance with SAES-M-100,

Section 3308.
2.4.2.5 Sabkhah is a saline coastal deposit generally consisting of

saturated, loose silt sand and possibly clay.
2.4.2.6 Select Fill Material Select fill shall be composed only of inorganic
material and shall have 100% passing the 5 cm (2 in) sieve and
from 0 to 20% passing the No. 200 sieve. That portion of the
material passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit
of 35 and maximum plasticity index of 12. Atterberg's limits are not
required for select fill material with less than 15 percent fines
passing the No. 200 sieve. 'Fill Material' shall be used for all fills
except where 'Select Fill Material' is specified. In general, 'Select
Fill Material' shall be used within 0.6 m (2 ft) of the bottom elevation
of foundations, spread footings, or slabs on grade.
2.4.3 Equipment and Tools
CONTRACTOR shall use only equipment and tools that are specifically
designated for use on back filling and compacting. All equipment to be used
shall meet the SAUDI ARAMCO Loss Prevention requirements and shall be
approved for use by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
2.4.4 Sequence
Sequence of back filling shall be as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project

Engineer and shall be performed in a manner acceptable to the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer.
2.4.5 Protection
All necessary precautions and safety requirements shall remain in place

during back-filling operations. Care shall be taken to protect all existing
utilities.
2.4.5.1 Do not backfill excavations/trenches until the completion of the

following:
A. Acceptances of construction below finish grade.
Page 21 of 221
B. Inspecting, testing, the approval and recording of locations of

underground utilities.
C. Do not backfill behind a basement wall until the floor slab has
been poured and cured for 14 days or the wood or steel floor
framing and sheathing has been installed.
D. All backfill material shall be supplied by CONTRACTOR and

shall meet the specific requirements described above.
2.4.6 Compaction
2.4.6.1 Compaction shall be done in lifts if required, with depth of layers

determined by the SAUDI ARAMCO.
2.4.6.2 CONTRACTOR shall adhere to SAES-M-100 SAUDI ARAMCO

Building Code page 29 under the heading Compaction.
2.4.6.3 For foundation static loading less than 320 KPa (3 ton/sq. ft) and
backfill around structures, all fills shall be compacted to 70% relative
density as defined by ASTM D4254 (for cohesion less materials) or
95% of the maximum density determined by ASTM D698 (for
cohesive materials). For foundation static loads over 320 KPa (3
tons/sq. ft) and foundations for vibrating equipment, fill shall be
compacted to 85% relative density for cohesion less soils or 95% of
the maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557 for cohesive
materials.
2.4.6.4 When the backfill material cannot clearly be classified as cohesive

or cohesion less both relative and proctor density tests must be
performed per the above paragraph. The backfill shall then be
compacted to the greater density.
2.4.6.5 Prior to compaction of backfill a field test section using the intended
compaction equipment shall be performed to determine the proper
lift thickness to achieve the necessary density requirement.
2.4.6.6 To verify that the specified degree of compaction has been

achieved, in-place density tests ASTM D1556 or D2922 shall be
taken after compaction of each lift of fill and performed at least one
lift thickness below the compacted surface. For projects less than
3820 cu m (5000 cu yards) fill, at least one in-place density test
should be made for every 382 cu m (500 cu yards) of compacted
soil.
2.4.6.7 For projects in excess of 3820 cu m (5000 cu yards) and where

consistent compaction results can be achieved, the frequency of
testing can be reduced to one (1) test for every 1530 cu m (2000 cu
yards) of compacted soil.
Page 22 of 221
2.4.7 Standards
CONTRACTOR shall adhere to all applicable specifications, standards and

SAUDI ARAMCO procedures listed on Attachment X to Schedule B for fill
and back filling.
2.5 SOIL STABILIZATION OR REINFORCEMENT
2.5.1 Materials
2.5.1.1 Non Woven Geogrid Fabric or Geotextile composing of multiple

layers of high strength polypropylene mesh. Each layer shall be
manufactured using and extrusion and biaxial orientation process
and are stitched together with out superimposing the mesh. It shall
have and aperture geometry and rib thickness that permits
significant mechanical interlock with the soil or aggregate being
reinforced. All mesh shall deliver and /or stored on site wrapped with
black HDPE for protection against ultra-violet rays.
2.5.2 Installation
2.5.2.1 Clear all sub grade from debris, sharp objects, large stones or
excess fill materials.
2.5.2.2 Sub grade shall be leveled and proof rolled.
2.5.2.3 Roll out the mesh, cut to size/length place at proper elevations.
2.5.2.4 Tension the mesh by hand until it is taut, free of wrinkles and lying
flat. Mesh shall be held in place mesh with staples, pins or sand
bags.
2.5.2.5 No overlaps are allowed across the strength direction of the mesh.
Adjacent roll widths shall be maintained at a minimum overlap of
150mm.
2.6 TERMITE ERADICATION
2.6.1 Work shall include drilling 12mm diameter x 450mm deep holes at 300mm on
centers for SAUDI ARAMCO to carry out termite eradication measures.
2.6.2 The grouting of holes after termite treatment shall be carried out using a site
mixed grout consisting of locally available materials that meet the
requirements such as sand, Type I Portland cement and water. The grout
shall be mixed to a pouring consistency.
2.7 MANHOLE/VALVE BOX/CATCH BASIN
2.7.1 Fabricate and install 300mm x 350mm x 250mm plywood valve box with
plywood hinge door/cover for residential separation control valve.
Page 23 of 221
2.7.2 Construct reinforced concrete manhole, valve box and catch basin. For
reinforced concrete description, refer to Section 3.0 of this Attachment IV to
this Schedule B.
2.7.3 Install 6mm thick checkered aluminum valve box/catch basin cover.
Aluminum shall be extruded 6063 T6 temper,
2.7.4 Install pre-fabricated 22mm thick checkered carbon steel manhole cover.
Paint cover with epoxy paint as described in Section 9.0 of Attachment IV to
this Schedule B.
2.7.5 Install pre-fabricated 6mm thick checkered carbon steel valve box/catch basin
cover. Paint cover with epoxy paint as described in Section 9.0 of Attachment
IV to this Schedule B.
2.7.6 Install pre-fabricated 6mm thick fiberglass (polyester resin system or glass
fiber reinforced system) valve box/catch basin cover.
2.8 ASPHALT PAVING
2.8.1 Prepare and lay asphalt to car parking areas, lay down areas, access roads,
paved areas, making good for trenches and other small areas, as required.
WORK shall be done in accordance to SAES Q 006.
2.8.1.1 Sub Grade Preparation and Maintenance
The CONTRACTOR shall, as part of the WORK, and prior to

application of sub base course, prepare the bed surface by
sprinkling and rolling using non vibrating roller of the order of 10-15
tons until the proper compaction and/or elevations is obtained.
When compacted and ready for sub base application, the area shall
be smooth, free of uniform, having been rolled smooth, free of
irregularities. Note that required compaction of bed surface prevail
over elevations indicated in the drawing.
Sub grade Compaction
Sub grade shall be compacted to 95% of AASHTO T-180, method D

or 85% of the relative density determined by ASTM D-4253 and D-
4254.
Maintenance of Sub grade
After the bed surface has been prepared, it shall be maintained true
to cross section and grade until the base course is completed. The
bed surface of the entire project shall be maintained by the
CONTRACTOR from the time the WORK has started until covered
with the sub base course.
Page 24 of 221
2.8.1.2 Sub-base Course Placement, Compaction and Finishing
Materials:
Uniform mixture of crushed rock or crushed stone.
Sieve Size:
1-1/2 inch 100
1 inch 60-100
inch * 55-85
No. 4 35-60
No. 10 25-50
No. 40 15-30
No.200 8-15
* If less than 30% of the sample is retained on a in sieve use

(ASTM D1557). If 30% of more of the sample is retained on a in
sieve use (AASHTO T180).
Requirements
Liquid Limit 25 max

Plasticity Index 25 max
Loss by abrasion 40 max
hin and elongated pieces,
by weight (larger than
25mm, thickness lesser
5 % max
than 1/5 length) per ASTM
D4791
Friable particles 0.25%max
Soundness test using Mg 23

SO4 Coarse aggregate
Fine aggregate 25
Construction
Prior to constructing the base course, the sub-base shall be cleaned
of all foreign substances. Ruts of soft, yielding spots having
inadequate compaction shall be corrected.
Placing Granular base material shall be placed in layers of uniform
thickness with approved spreaders. When the base or sub base
course is constructed in more than one layer, the previously
constructed layers shall be cleaned of loose and foreign matter.
The water content of the material shall be maintained during
compaction at the optimum percentage (+ 1-1/2%) as determined by
ASTM D1557 or AASHTO T180.
Page 25 of 221
Compaction While at optimum moisture (+ 1-1/2%) the sub base or

base materials shall be compacted with equipment capable of
obtaining the desired density to the full depth of the respective layer.
The rolling shall continue until the base and sub base are
compacted to not less than (100 percent for the base and 95
percent for the sub base) of the maximum laboratory density as
determined by ASTM D1557, or AASHTO T180. In-place density
shall be measured by ASTM D2922 or other approved methods.
CBR Value. The laboratory compacted California Bearing Ratio, per

ASTM D1883 or AASHTO T193 shall conform to the requirement of;
CBR value at min.50 min.100% compaction as per ASTM D1557.
Finishing the surface of the compacted material shall be finished by
balding or with automated equipment especially designed for this
purpose and rolled with a steel-wheeled roller. In no case shall thin
layers of fine materials be added to the top layer of the base course
in order to meet the required elevation. The surface of the
completed base shall not show any deviation in excess of 6 mm
when tested with a 3 meter straightedge. The completed thickness
of the base shall be within + 6 mm of the thickness indicated, and
the average thickness shall not be less than the design thickness.
2.8.1.3 Prime Coat Application
Prime coat shall be MC-70 conforming to SAUDI ARAMCO (Ras-

Tanura Refinery) Standard A-973 or MC-250 conforming to SAUDI
ARAMCO Standard A-974. Liquid asphalt obtained from some other
source for prime coats shall be of the medium curing type
conforming to ASTM Standard D-2027. Material shall be tested and
approved prior to use in the WORK or as otherwise directed by the
The SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer may accept plant

certification from approved source in lieu of project testing.
Clean Surface
Immediately before applying the primer bituminous material, the

surface shall be cleaned of all loose dirt and other objectionable
materials with a power broom, hand broom, or blower. If so ordered
by SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer, the surface shall be lightly
bladed or rolled immediately prior to the application of bituminous
material, in which case brooming or blowing will not be required.
The SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer may order a light application
of water, just before application of bituminous material, if required.
Priming shall be completed by spraying from 0.65 to 2.25 liters per

square meter (0.17 to 0.59 gallons per square meter) of low
viscosity liquid asphalt (MC-70 or MC-250) on the prepared non-
asphalted sub base course, as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Page 26 of 221
Project Engineer, and allowing the asphalt penetrate into the base
as far as possible. The distributor truck shall be equipped with a
pressure pump meeting all relevant specifications for pumping
flammables and with a device to accurately measure the rate of
application of the liquid asphalt.
The primer shall be within the temperature range as designated by

the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. At all times, CONTRACTOR
shall maintain the temperature at least 10o C (18o F) below the flash
point of the material.
MC-70(MC-1) 50o-80o
MC-250 (MC-2) 65o-105o
Drying Time:
The primed surface shall be kept free from all traffic and in clean
condition pending placement of the covering asphalted concrete
pavement. A minimum period of 24 hours shall be allowed for the
absorption and curing of the prime coat prior to placement of
covering pavement.
2.8.1.4 Bituminous Base (Leveling) Course
This WORK shall consist of construction an asphalt pavement with

central plant asphalted hot-mix courses, on a previous prepared
(and approved by SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer) foundation on
conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross-
sections shown on the Drawing or as otherwise established by the
SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. The hot mix asphalt concrete
shall be manufactured and laid in full conformance with Saudi
Aramco Specification AES-Q-006- Ministry of Communications
General Specification for Road and Bridge construction together
with all relevant ASTM and AASHTO standard.
When asphalt cement manufactured by SAUDI ARAMCO is

specified for use, the asphalt cement shall conform to SAUDI
ARAMCO Specification A-970. Asphalt cement obtained from
another source shall conform to the requirements in the following
tables. Material shall be tested and approved prior to its use in any
WORK as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. The
SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer may accept plant certification
from approved source in lieu of project testing.
Specification for Asphalted Cements
The asphalt shall be prepared by the refining of petroleum. It shall

be uniform in character and shall not foam when heated to 176.7
degrees C.
Page 27 of 221
Asphalt hot mix shall be delivered to the site at the required

temperature and not allowed to substantially cool before installation.
General Requirement AASHTO Test

Method
Penetration, 25o C, 100 grams 5 T-49 60-70

second
Viscosity at 135o C, Saybolt (ASTM)

furol, SSF kinematic, E102 100
centistokes T201 200
Flash point (Cleveland) open T48 232.2

cup, degrees C
Thin film oven test Penetration T 179 -

after test 25oC, 100grams, 5 T49 52
seconds percent of original
Ductility: at 25oC T51 100
Solubility in organic solvents, T44 99.5

percent
Table 1- Specifications for Asphalt Cements
General Requirement AASHTO Test

Method
Flash point (Cleveland open T48 232.2

cup, degrees C
Penetration, 100 grams, 5 secs., T49 60-70

25oC
1 25
Penetration ratio, percent min.
note
Furol Viscosity at 135oC, 5 secs. (ASTM)

102 100+
Thin film oven test:

Loss in weight % max. T179 0.80
Page 28 of 221
Retention in penetration,
percent minimum
T 49 52+
Ductility at 25 Degrees C T 51 100+
At 15.6oC - -
Spot test, Heptane Xylene

Solvent, Note 2 35% Xylene Negative for all
grades
Solubility Temperature for 135- 163
mixing, oC
Note 1
Penetration at 4oC, 200 grams
60 seconds
Penetration -------------------------------------- x 100
Ratio Penetration at 25oC, 100grams
5 seconds
Note 2
Test method AASHTO T-102, except that the test at twenty four (24) hours
and the test on the glass plate shall be eliminated from the method.
2.8.1.5 Tack Coat Application
Test Liquid Asphalt
When liquid asphalt manufactured by SAUDI ARAMCO is

specified for tack coat, the liquid asphalt shall be of the rapid-
curing type conforming to SAUDI ARAMCO Specifications A-971
or A-972. Liquid asphalts obtained from some other source for
tack coats shall be rapid-curing type conforming to ASTM
Standard D-2028. As directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer, materials shall be tested and approved prior to use in
WORK. The SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer may accept plant
certification from approved sources in lieu of project testing.
Application
CONTRACTOR shall construct a tack coat by spraying from 0.25

to 0.70 liters per square meter (0.25 to 0.15 gallons per square
meter) of liquid asphalt (RC-250, or RC-800) to the prepared
pavement surface. At all times, CONTRACTOR shall maintain the
temperature at least 10oC (18oF) below the flash point of the tack
coat material. CONTRACTOR shall equip the distributor truck with
a pressure pump meeting all relevant specification for pumping
flammables and with a device to accurately measure the rate of
application of the liquid asphalt.
Page 29 of 221
The temperature of the liquid asphalt at the time of application

shall range from 65oC to 95oC for RC 250 and 95oC to 120oC for
RC800.
Immediately before application of the tack coat, CONTRACTOR

shall sweep and clean the full width of the surface to be coated
until it is free from all loose dirt, clay, and all other foreign
materials. CONTRACTOR shall apply no more tack coat to the
prepared road surface than can be covered with the binder or
surface course to be applied during normal working hours of the
same working day in which the tack coat is applied. After the tack
coat is applied, CONTRACTOR shall allow it to cure until it is
tacky enough to receive the overlaying course, as approved by the
SAUDI ARAMCO project Engineer.
In places where the distributor bars cannot reach, CONTRACTOR

shall apply the tack coat with a hand spray attached to the
distributor by a hose. When hand spray methods are used,
CONTRACTOR shall give the surface a very light application of
the asphalt. If the CONTRACTOR is consistently unable to, or
does not obtain the proper application rate, or the application on a
particular section is not uniform, he shall discontinue operation
until CONTRACTOR can provide a more skillful operator and/or
better equipment. CONTRACTOR shall bear all the costs of
reworking the defective section to the specified standard.
2.8.1.6 Bituminous Wearing (Surface) Course
This is the finish course unit in a hot mixture of asphalt, fine

aggregates and filler material to a thickness of 25 mm. The course
should not vary more than 3mm in 3 meters when measured in
any direction. Use fine aggregate that pass a standard AASHTO
No. 4 sieve and retained on the AASHTO No. 8 sieve.
2.8.1.7 Laying
All hot asphalt mixture shall be distributed by Barber Green

asphalt paving machine with joint heaters except on areas where
the use of the machine is not possible. If joint heaters are not
available, joints can be pre-heated with items such as infrared
heating units.
2.8.1.8 Protection of Pavement
After final rolling of the pavement and until the pavement has been
cooled sufficiently to prevent indentation or marring of the surface,
CONTRACTOR shall not permit vehicular traffic of any kind. The
time required for proper cooling will normally range from 1 to 4
hours, depending on ambient temperature at the time of
construction and the thickness of the layer being placed.
Page 30 of 221
2.8.1.9 Site Clearance
Upon termination of WORK, CONTRACTOR shall remove all

excess and waste materials, equipment, barriers etc., and clean
jobsite to the satisfaction of the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer.
2.8.1.10 Compaction Sampling and Testing
The field (mold) density shall be determined in accordance with

AASHTO T-166 taken from samples of freshly mixed bituminous
mixture at the plant. Reheating of the mixture will not permit. The
density of the mixture as placed and compacted on the pavement
shall be determined from samples cut from the compacted
courses on the pavement locations specified by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer. Samples shall be obtained in sets of
two (2), cut from the same location on the pavement.
The total depth of base course, binder course and surface courses
shall be measured in 3 separate operations for each type of
material. Thickness determination shall be made per layer and a
minimum of 2 locations, at locations designated by the SAUDI
Cores extracted for thickness measurements shall not be used for

density determination and density samples shall not be used for
thickness measurement.
CONTRACTOR shall, when necessary rinse and apply cold water,

or other cooling substance to the surface of the pavement to
prevent the samples from shattering or disintegrating. The
CONTRACTOR shall cut all samples and fill, compact all test
holes at his own expense.
2.8.2 Slurry Seal
2.8.2.1 WORK shall consist of removal or scrapping of wearing course to

existing pavement as required, supplying of materials such as
asphalt emulsion, aggregate, cement and water, mixing and
spreading on asphalt pavement surfaces. The completed slurry
seal shall have a homogeneous appearance, adhere firmly to
surface, and have a skid resistance textured surface.
2.8.2.2 Materials
A. Asphalt Emulsion
Asphalt Emulsion shall be a Cationic Slow Setting Type (CSSI

or CSSIh to AASHTO M208 or ASTM D 2397) composed of a
bituminous base of paving asphalt grade 60/70 uniformly
Page 31 of 221
emulsified with water and an emulsifying or stabilizing agent.

When tested in accordance with AASHTO T-59, the emulsion
shall conform to the following:
Viscosity at 25 degree C, Sec. 20to 100
Modified miscibility with water 4.5 maximum

difference of asphalt residue %
Cement mixing test, % 3.0 maximum
Residue at 73 degree C, % 57.0 maximum
No separation with in 7 days
B. Aggregate
Aggregate shall consist of rock dust and/or sands, except that

any aggregate or combination of aggregates used in the
mixture shall contain no less than 50% of the product obtained
by crushing rock. The material shall be free from vegetable
matter and other deleterious substances
CONTRACTOR shall screen the aggregates at the stockpile

prior to delivery to slurry seal machine, if oversize materials
are observed in the mix. Mineral filler when used shall conform
to ASTM D 242. Ordinary Portland cement shall be the
approved filler unless otherwise ordered by the SAUDI
The percentage composition by weight of the aggregate shall

conform to the grading requirements for each type as shown
below:-
PERCENT PASSING
TYPE OF SLURRY TYPE I TYPE II TYPE II

GENERAL USAGE CRACK FILLING GENERAL SEAL 1ST AND 2ND SURFACE
AND FINE SEAL MEDIUM APPLICATION, TWO
TEXTURED COURSES SLURRY
HIGHLY TEXTURED
SURFACES.
SIEVE SIZE
3/8 (9.5mm) 100 100 100

#4 (4.75mm) 100 90-100 70-90
#8 (2.36mm) 90-100 65-90 45-70
#16 (1.18mm) 65-90 45-70 28-50
#30 (0.6mm) 40-65 30-50 19-34
#50 (0.3mm) 25-42 18-30 12-25
Page 32 of 221
#100 (0.15mm) 15-30 10-21 7-18

#200 (0.075mm) 10-20 5-15 5-15
The aggregate shall also conform to the following

requirements:
Sand equivalent value AASHTO 55 minimum

T176 (ASTM D2419) %
Los Angeles abrasion AASHTO T96 35 maximum

(ASTM C131) Grading C or D, %
Soundness Test AASHTO T104 20% maximum

(ASTM C88) magnesium sulfate, %
2.8.2.3 Laboratory Evaluations
A. General
CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit slurry seal mix

design thirty (30) days before WORK commences for
approved. The design shall be prepared in the
CONTRACTORs laboratory or by a qualified laboratory
approved by SAUDI ARAMCO. Once the materials are
approved, no substitution will be permitted, unless first tested
by the laboratory which had prepared the mix design and
approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
B. Mix Design
The International Slurry Seal Association mix design method

as outlined in ISSA TB-111 shall be used to design the slurry
seal mix. Compatibility of the aggregate, emulsion and mineral
filler shall be verified by the mix design. The mix design shall
be prepared for all slurry seal gradation types specified in
Paragraph 2.8.1.2.A of Attachment IV to this Schedule B
satisfying the following asphalt percentage:-
TYPE I TYPE II TYPE II
RESIDUAL
ASPHALT 10-16 7.5-13.5 6.5-12
CONTENT BY
WEIGHT OF DRY
AGGREGFATE
In addition, the design mix shall meet the following

requirements of slurry seal type:-
Property Test Type Requirement
Page 33 of 221
Slurry Seal Consistency, ISSA T106 2-3

cm
Excess Asphalt, gm/m ISSA T109 753
Wet Stripping Test ISSA T114 Pass
Compatibility ISSA T115 *Pass
Quick Set Emulsion ISSA T102 **Pass
Wet Track Abrasion, gm/m ASTM D3910 807 maximum
* Mixing test must pass at the maximum expected air

temperature.
** Using job mix aggregate.
The laboratory shall also report the quantitative effects of

moisture content on the unit weight of the aggregate (bulking
effect). The report must clearly show the proportions of
aggregate, mineral filler (min. and max.), water (min. and
max.) and asphalt emulsion based on the dry weight of the
aggregate.
2.8.2.4 Surveying and Surface Preparation
Prior to executing any activity at any WORK Site, CONTRACTOR

shall visit each WORK Site the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer
to inspect and survey the area to determine necessary cleaning
and surface repair requirement of this WORK unit rate.
CONTRACTOR shall prepare the surface upon which the slurry

seal mix be placed.
2.8.2.5 Traffic Control
CONTRACTOR shall provide traffic control at the WORK Site.
2.8.2.6 Site Clearance, Protection and Clean up
CONTRACTOR shall perform site clearance of WORK area and

protection of objects adjacent to the WORK area.
2.8.2.7 Application By Machine
A. Equipment
Page 34 of 221
CONTRACTOR shall maintain all equipment for the

performance of this WORK in a satisfactory working
condition. The slurry mixing machine shall be continuous
flow mixing unit capable of accurately delivering a
predetermined proportion of aggregate, mineral filler, water
and asphalt emulsion to the mixing chamber and to
discharge the thoroughly mixed product on a continuous
basis.
The spreader shall be capable of spreading and adjustable

thickness of the slurry seal mix to a full traffic lane width
and shall be equipped with flexible seal in contact with the
surface of the pavement to prevent loss of slurry mix from
the distributor. CONTRACTOR shall install baffles or other
suitable means to ensure uniform application on super-
elevated sections and shoulder slopes. CONTRACTOR
shall provide spreader box with arrangements to reduce
the width as required or provide independent spreader
boxes of 1.5m to 1.8m width or provide slurry seal machine
capable of spreading the shorter widths as specified above
such as MINIMAC or equivalent.
2.8.2.8 Machine Calibration and Verification
A. Calibration
Prior to construction, CONTRACTOR shall calibrate

through an approved agency each slurry mixing unit to be
used in performance of the WORK, in accordance with
ISSA Inspectors Manual. CONTRACTOR shall not use
any machine on the project until the calibration has been
completed and accepted by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer. Calibration shall be done at an interval of six
months or whenever required by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Project Engineer.
B. Verification
CONTRACTOR shall make test strips, at its own

expenses, by each machine after calibration and prior to
construction. Test strips shall not be a portion of the project
rather it shall be any other area as directed by SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer. Samples of the slurry seal
shall be taken to verify the mix consistency, gradation,
application rates and residual asphalt percentage. Upon
failure of any of the tests, CONTRATOR is required to
make additional test strips, at no cost to SAUDI ARAMCO,
until each unit passes the tests and authorized to WORK.
Any unit failing to pass the tests after the third trial will not
be permitted to WORK on the project.
Page 35 of 221
2.8.2.9 Composition, Rate of Application and Tolerances
A. Composition
The percentage of each individual material shall be as

required by the mix design. Adjustments may be required
during construction, based on field conditions. The SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer will give final approval for all
such adjustments.
B. Rate of Application
The slurry seal mixture shall be of proper consistency at all

times so as to provide the amount of mixture required by
the surface condition. The application rates as measured
by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer shall be as
shown below:
Property Type I Type II Type III
Application Rate Based on Weight of

Dry Aggregate, kg/m2 3-5.5 5.4-8.2 8.2 min
Cured Slurry Seal Thickness, mm 3.2 6.4-8 9.5-11
C. Tolerances
Tolerances from the job mix design values for individual

materials and the slurry seal mixture shall be as follows:
a) Residual asphalt content percentage 1%
b) Aggregate gradation 4.0%
c) The percent passing of the aggregate

gradation shall not go from the coarser
limit to the finer limit of the specified
range of any two successive sieves.
d) Slurry seal mixture consistency 0.5 cm
e) The rate of application shall be the 1%

average of application
2.8.2.10 Limitations
A. Weather
CONTRACTOR shall not apply the slurry seal if either the

pavement or air temperature is below 13oC and failing, but
Page 36 of 221
CONTRACTOR may apply slurry seal when both

pavement and air temperature are above 7oC and rising or
during weather which, in the opinion of the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer, is suitable. CONTRACTOR
shall not apply the mixture when weather conditions
prolong opening to traffic beyond a reasonable time and
shall cease the slurry seal operation until such time as, in
the opinion of the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer, such
condition may be achieved. Compensation for any such
delay shall be included within each applicable unit rate as
per Schedule C.
CONTRACTOR shall apply the slurry seal without

interfering with traffic and shall cease the operation at such
time it is cured before sunset or as directed by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer to apply slurry seal outside the
above time limits.
2.8.2.11 Application
A. Mixing
CONTRACTOR shall mix the proportioned materials for a

sufficient length of time so as to produce thoroughly
coated, homogenous and stable slurry. Any slurry which
shows evidence of breaking or segregation during the
mixing and /or spreading period will be rejected by the
SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. CONTRACTOR shall
remove and replace all such material at no cost to SAUDI
ARAMCO.
B. Spreading
CONTRACTOR shall not apply slurry seal during weather

which, in the opinion of the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer, is unsuitable and shall follow the weather
condition requirements stated in paragraph 2.8.1.11A
above. CONTRACTOR shall feed the slurry mixture into
spreader box at a sufficient rate to maintain an ample
supply of mixture across the full width of the spreader to
ensure complete coverage of the slurry sealed area.
Immediately preceding the placing of slurry seal, when

required by local conditions, CONTRACTOR shall pre-wet
the surface by water fogging ahead of the spreader box.
The rate of application of the fog spray shall be adjusted
during the day to suit temperatures, surface texture,
humidity, and dryness of the pavement.
Page 37 of 221
Normally, tack coat is not required unless the surface to be

covered is extremely dry and raveled or is concrete.
The slurry seal shall be of the required consistency upon

leaving the mixer. A sufficient amount of material shall be
carried in all parts of the spreader at all times so that a
complete coverage is obtained. Overloading of the
spreader shall be avoided. No. lumping, balling, or
unmixed aggregate shall be permitted.
No streaks such as those caused by oversized aggregates

shall be left in the finished surface. If excess streaks
develop, the WORK will be stopped until the situation is
corrected. If directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer, CONTRACTOR shall screen the material just
prior to loading it into the units going from the stockpile
area to the lay-down operation.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure to produce slurry seal surface

in straight lines along curbs and shoulders with no runoff
on these areas. Lines at intersections shall be kept straight
to provide a good appearance. Tar paper or any other
sheeting shall be used to mask off the start and end of the
streets and other WORK areas to provide straight lines.
CONTRACTOR shall take adequate steps to protect the

slurry seal from damaged by all types of traffic until such
time as the mixture has cured sufficiently to accept such
traffic
C. Rolling
CONTRACTOR shall carry out rolling after the mix has

broken as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer using a five (5) ton pneumatic rubber-tired roller.
2.8.2.12 Application by Hand
A. Application
CONTRACTOR shall carry out hand WORK in all areas

where the slurry machine cannot be operated or as
otherwise determined by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer and shall mix and lay the slurry on prepared
surface all as described in Paragraph 2.8.2.11 of this
attachment IV to Schedule B.
Where appropriate, CONTRACTOR shall complete hand

WORK ahead of the machine WORK. CONTRACTOR
shall distribute the slurry by shovels and spreads and finish
it by approved hand squeegees. CONTRACTOR may use
Page 38 of 221
a hand drag of burlap or similar approved material to

achieve same type of finish as applied by the spreader
box.
2.8.2.13 Construction Control
CONTRACTOR shall submit test data in a form acceptable to the

SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer on a daily basis for all testing
conducted for each days production.
CONTRACTOR shall collect slurry seal samples from the

spreader box and conduct test for wet-track abrasion, cure time,
set time, A/C content, consistency and other applicable tests.
CONTRACTOR shall submit a daily report showing consumption
of individual material indicating application rate based on weight of
dry aggregate conforming to job mix limits.
CONTRACTOR shall submit daily report showing consumption of

individual material indicating application rate based on weight of
dry aggregate conforming to job mix limits.
CONTRACTOR shall supply samples of slurry seal to SAUDI

ARAMCO as and when directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer.
CONTRACTOR shall correct areas deficient in thickness or

uneven surface finish, rough and unsatisfactory joints, non-
uniform textured and color due to inconsistent emulsion
percentage or inadequate application rate by resurfacing the
defective area with a slurry mix to the full or half lane width to the
satisfaction of the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer at the
CONTRACTORs expense. Remedial WORK with patches of
slurry seal mix will not be accepted.
In case SAUDI ARAMCO test reports show deviations in the

residual asphalt content percent, gradation of aggregate and
application rates as specified in Paragraph 2.8.2.9 of this
Attachment IV to Schedule B.
2.8.3 Acrylic Crack and Leveling Compound
2.8.3.1 Apply Acrylic Crack and Leveling Compound to required asphalt

surfaces.
2.8.3.2 Material:
A three component system, LATEX-ITE Acrylic Crack and Leveling

Compound.
2.8.3.3 Mix Design:
Page 39 of 221
LATEX-ITE Acrylic
Crack and Leveling
Compound 1 Gallon
80-100 mesh, clean

dry Silica Sand 2 Gallons
Portland 1A Cement gallon
Blend the silica sand with the cement in a clear mortar mixer or by
use of a hand drill. Add LATEX-ITE Acrylic Crack and Leveling
Compound while mixing. Mix until there is uniform consistency. If
the mix appears too dry, add additional LATEX-ITE Acrylic Crack
and Leveling Compound until a creamy consistency is obtained.
Upon completion of mixing, apply to cracks or low areas
immediately. Clean equipment and tools immediately after
completion.
Never add Water
2.8.3.4 Coverage
One (1) gallon of mixed emulsion. Approximately 8-10 (2438-

3048mm) linear feet of crack measuring (6mm) wide by
(19mm) to 1 (25mm) deep.
PATCH : Quantities will vary with size and depth of birdbath.
2.8.3.5 Drying Time
Mixed material dries rapidly. Actual drying time will vary according
to width and depth of crack or patch. Humidity, surface
temperature and ambient temperature will affect drying process.
2.8.3.6 Limitations and Precautions
LATEX-ITE Acrylic Crack and Leveling Compound should not be

applied when the ambient temperature is below 500 F or when
surface temperature is above 1400 F. Do not store in direct
sunlight. Keep from freezing. Do not apply when rain is imminent.
2.9 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
2.9.1 Curb and gutter construction may consist of the following types: poured in
place, slip forming, curb forming machine, pre-cast concrete sections or other
types meeting the requirements of this specification and having approval of
the SAUDI ARAMCO Standard Drawing AB-036260.
2.9.2 All materials to be used under this section shall be referred to Section 3.0 of
Attachment IV to this Schedule B.
Page 40 of 221
2.9.3 Where hard surfacing (asphalt or concrete) is to be placed: around or

adjacent to drop inlets, catch basins and gutters, local depression or driveway
areas. Such structures or areas shall not be constructed to final grade until
after the curb, or curb and gutter, has been constructed for a reasonable
distance on each side of the structure or area. This will allow the true grade of
the surfacing to be maintained around structures, gutters, and/or other areas.
2.9.4 The forms shall be filled to the top, with the concrete handled so as to prevent
rock pockets. Concrete shall be consolidated by means of mechanical
vibration or as otherwise approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
2.9.5 Immediately after moving the front curb forms, the face of the curb shall be
troweled smooth to a depth of not less than 50 mm below the flow line or to
the flow line of an integral curb and gutter and then finished with a steel
trowel. After the face of the curb has been toweled smooth, it shall be given a
final fine brush finish with brush strokes parallel to the line of the curb.
2.9.6 The top and face of the finished curb shall be true and straight, with the top
surface of the curb or curb and gutter being uniform in width, free from all
humps, sags, or irregularities. When a straight edge 3 m long is laid on the
top or surface of the curb or on the surface of the gutters, the surface shall
not vary more than 3 mm from the edge of the straight edge, except at grade
changes or curves.
2.9.7 Expansion joints and control joints shall be constructed at right angles to the
line of the curb and gutter.
2.9.8 Expansion joints 12 mm wide shall be constructed in curbs and gutters at 9 m

intervals, and in curbs at the ends of all returns and on each side of
driveways. Expansion joints shall be filled with joint filler strips 12 mm thick.
Expansion joint filler shall be shaped to the cross section of the curb and
gutter.
2.9.9 Control joints shall be installed at 3 m intervals. Control joints shall be

constructed to a minimum depth of 25 mm by scoring with a tool, which will
leave the corners rounded and ensure a free movement of the concrete at the
joint.
2.10 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS/WALKWAYS
2.10.1 CONTRACTOR shall prepare and compact base courses, fabricate and set
formwork/shuttering, install vapor barrier, steel wire mesh, 12 mm preformed
expansion joint and joint sealant, concrete/plastic spacers and place concrete
to form sidewalk/walkway, complete with edge/ground beam. Concrete shall
be troweled to a smooth and even finish to lines and falls as indicated on the
specific project scope of WORK. Concrete sidewalks and paths shall be
traversed in one direction only with a medium bristle broom to give a uniform
finish.
2.10.2 Provide control and expansion joints where required.
Page 41 of 221
2.10.3 All materials to be used under this section shall be referred to Section 3.0 of
this Attachment IV to Schedule B.
2.11 PRE-CAST CONCRETE PAVING
2.11.1 Set out pre-cast concrete paving tiles.
2.11.2 Set and lay 50mm x 100mm x 200mm interlocking tiles (any color). Tiles shall
be in accordance with ASTM C90. Installation shall provide slope towards the
existing gutter in connection with installation of pre-cast tiles.
2.12 WOODEN FENCES AND GATES
2.12.1 Fabricate and install wooden Arab gates complete with hardware, fixing,
fittings and all associated works.
2.12.2 Fencing timbers found to be defective, damaged, termite infested or rotted

shall be removed and replaced with new timbers. New timbers are to be
prime coated prior to installation and prepared to receive additional coats of
paint by others. New timbers shall be treated with double strength fungicide.
2.12.3 Materials to be used for wooden fence and gates shall be S4S Redwood
lumber, clear grade, kiln dried and construction type or Plastic Wood (for
description refer to Section 6.15 of Attachment IV to this Schedule B.
2.12.4 Replace/install wooden gate T hinge, gate stopper and thumb latch.
2.13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
2.13.1 Prepare and install SAUDI ARAMCO standard security chain link fence and
gates including but not limited to erection of post, supports, foundation
excavation and concrete WORK, fixings, hardware and other associated
works.
2.13.2 Install or replace/repair chain link mesh, line corner and gate post, barbed
wire, single or double extension arm on fence gate inclusive of fixings,
support, concrete footing, brace, stiffener and other necessary activities.
2.13.3 Fence and gates shall be erected as a complete unit including necessary
erection accessories, fittings and fastenings in alignment and type indicated
on the Drawings and shall meet the minimum requirements established in
SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standard, all applicable SAUDI ARAMCO
Standard Drawings and SAUDI ARAMCO Material System Specifications.
SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standards (SAES)
SAES-M-006: SAUDI ARAMCO Security and General Purpose Fencing.
SAUDI ARAMCO Material System Specification
Page 42 of 221
12-SAMSS-021: SAUDI ARAMCO Security and General Purpose Fencing

(Galvanized).
12-SAMSS-022: SAUDI ARAMCO Security and General Purpose Fencing

(Vinyl -Clad Galvanized)
SAUDI ARAMCO Standard Drawings (SAUDI ARAMCO Security and

General Purpose Fencing).
AB-036677, Sheet 001, Revision 02: An Overview.
AB-036678, Sheet 001, Revision 01: Post and Fabric Details.
AB-036679, Sheet 001, Revision 01: Gate Details.
AC-036680, Sheet 001, Revision 02: Footing Details.
AE-036881, Sheet 001 to 009, Revision 4: List of Material for SAUDI

ARAMCO Security Fencing, Type I.
AE-036882, Sheet 001 to 009, Revision 4: List of Materials for SAUDI

ARAMCO Security Fencing, Type II.

ARAMCO Security Fencing Type III.

ARAMCO Security Fencing Type IV.

ARAMCO Security Fencing Type V.
2.13.4 Materials:
2.13.4.1 Chain Link Fence Fabric
A. Galvanized
Fabric shall be chain link with a 50 mm diamond mesh and a

height of 2400 mm (12 mm). Fabric shall have the top and
bottom selvages machine twisted with the wire cut on a bias
to form a barbed finish. The standard length of roll shall be
15 m and shall be woven continuously without splices. The
wire type shall be as specified below.
Coating Type : Galvanized
Size Outside Overall : 3.75 mm
Minimum Breaking Strength : 5740 N (1290 lbs)
Page 43 of 221
Galvanizing (hot dipping) shall be either after weaving,

according to ASTM A392, Class I, or before weaving
according to ASTM A392, Class II, as specified in the
Purchase Order. Roll dipping is not acceptable.
B. Vinyl Clad Galvanized
Fabric shall be chain link with a 50 mm diamond mesh and a

height of 2400 mm (12 mm). Fabric shall have the top and
bottom selvages machine twisted with the wire cut on a bias
to form a barbed finish. The standard length of roll shall be
15 m and shall be woven continuously without splices. The
wire type shall be as shown below:-
Table 1 - Wire Type
Coating Type Size Outside Minimum Breaking

Overall Strength
PVC Fusion 3.75 mm 5340 N (1200 lbs)
bonded
Extruded Vinyl 4.88 mm 5340 N (1200 lbs)
Vinyl-coated chain link fabric shall be either PVC fusion

bonded or extruded type; both are equally acceptable.
PVC fusion-bonded fabric per ASTM F668, Class 2b shall

consist of core wires uniformly galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A641, Class I, and coated with 0.20 mm (8 mil) of
PVC applied by the fusion method over a thermoset plastic
bonding agent.
Extruded type fabric per ASTM F668, Class I shall consist of

core wires uniformly galvanized with zinc metal in
accordance with ASTM A641, Class I, and encased in a vinyl
jacket approximately 0.50 mm (20 mil) thick. The jacket shall
be tightly applied to prevent slippage or creeping through
thermal expansion and contraction.
2.13.4.2 Barbed Wire
A. Galvanized
Three or six rows of barbed wire shall be furnished as
required by the particular fence type. Each row shall consist
of two twisted strands of not lighter than 2.5 mm nominal
diameter wire, with four barbs (points) of not lighter than 2
mm nominal diameter wire, spaced 125 mm 20 mm apart.
The barbs shall be wrapped so as to interlock with both main
Page 44 of 221
strands of wire. The barbed wire shall conform to ASTM

A121.
Three or six rows of barbed wire shall be furnished as
required by the particular fence type. Each row shall consist
of two twisted vinyl-clad strands of not lighter than 2.5 mm
nominal diameter wire, with four vinyl-clad barbs (points) of
not lighter than 2 mm nominal diameter wire, spaced 125
mm 20 mm apart. The barbs shall be wrapped so as to
interlock with both main strands of wire. Core wire shall be
uniformly galvanized in accordance with ASTM A641, Class
I.
2.13.4.3 Lock Wire
A. Galvanized
Barbed wire shall be secured to the extension arm by lock
wire.
Lock wire shall be ASTM A641, 360 mm long by 3.75 mm
nominal diameter wire, minimum, annealed and galvanized
with a 25 mm diameter hook on one end.
Page 45 of 221

Barbed wire shall be secured to the extension arm by lock
wire. Lock wire shall be ASTM A641, 360 mm long by 3.75
mm nominal diameter wire, minimum, annealed and
galvanized with a 25 mm diameter hook on one end.
2.13.4.4 Tension Wire
A. Galvanized
Tension wire shall be galvanized per ASTM A641, Class III
with a coating of not less than 244 g/m (0.80 oz/ft) of
surface area. Wire shall be a minimum of 4.5 mm nominal
diameter and possess a minimum breaking strength of 6230
N (1400 lb).
Tension wire shall be vinyl-coated and have the same type of
coating (PVC Fusion-bonded or Extruded) as specified for
the fence fabric. The core wire shall be a minimum of 3.55
mm nominal diameter and possess a minimum breaking
strength of 5740 N (1290 lb). The core wire shall be
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A641, Class I.
2.13.4.5 Tie Wire
A. Galvanized
Tie wire shall be used to secure the fabric and tension wire
to the line post and fabric to the top rail and tension wire. Tie
wire shall be galvanized per ASTM A641 with a coating of
not less than 244 g/m (0.80 oz/ft) of surface area and shall
match the fence fabric. Tie wire shall be 3.0 mm nominal
diameter minimum and 250 mm 10 mm long.
Tie wire shall be used to secure the fabric and tension wire
to the line post and fabric to the top rail and tension wire. Tie
wire shall be vinyl-coated and shall have the same type of
coating (PVC fusion-bonded or extruded) as specified for the
fence fabric. The core wire shall be 2.65 mm nominal
diameter minimum and 250 mm 10 mm long. The core
wire shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A641,
Class I.
2.13.4.6 Post
A. Galvanized/Vinyl Clad Galvanized
All tubular steel posts shall be Schedule 40 and galvanized

in accordance with ASTM A53. Posts diameters shall be as
follows:-
Page 46 of 221
Posts Diameters
Classification Nominal Post

Size (in) Actual O.D. (mm)
Brace (and brace rails) 1- 41
Line 2 60
Corner/End 2- 73
Gates as follows:
Single gate 1.2 m wide 2- 74
Double gage 4.0 and 8.0 m wide 3-
102
Total post length for all posts up to 102 mm O.D. shall be as

specified below (12 mm). These lengths include 975 mm
extension in the footing.
Total Post Length
Fence Type
Post Type I (mm) II (mm)III (mm) IV (mm) V (mm)
Walk Gate 3400 3400 3400 3400 3400
Drive Gate 3900 3900 3900 3900 3400
Line 3400 3400 3400 3400 3400
Corner/End 3400 3400 3400 3400 3400
Brace 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900
2.13.4.7 Fittings
All fittings shall be galvanized pressed steel or wrought iron,

or malleable iron and in accordance with ASTM F626.
Attachment bolts shall be carriage bolts with nuts, except for

post extension arms where machine bolts will be used. All
bolts and nuts shall be galvanized.
All gate fittings shall be compatible with the gates supplied.
2.13.4.8 Gates

All gates shall be of the swing type, complete with the
following components:-
Page 47 of 221
a) 48 mm O.D. steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A53 as the

framing material.
b) Welded or bolted construction.
c) 10 mm diameter adjustable diagonal tension rods.
d) 50 mm mesh, 3.75 mm diameter diamond link
galvanized as specified on the Purchase Order and/or
Drawings.
e) Gate hinges: Gate shall be able to swing 90 degrees
either way from closed position.
f) Fittings for 35 mm diameter plunger rod.
g) Lock keeper and guide: All gates shall be equipped with
attachments for padlocking, the padlock to be accessible
from both sides of the gate.
h) 35 mm diameter plunger rod for each gate leaf; as an
alternative to a single plunger rod.
i) Plunger rod receiver and open-gate holders.
j) Where required, gate frame extensions shall extend 300
mm above the gate frame.
k) Where gate widths exceed 1200 mm in width, additional
vertical framing members shall be added connecting the
top and bottom horizontal framing members. The panels
shall be of equal size and not be less than 900 mm or
greater than 1550 mm in width.
2.14 RIP-RAP STONEWALL
2.14.1 Form drainage channels and/or embankments using stone rip-rap. Place
reinforced concrete sub-base up to 200 mm thick on prepared ground. Lay
stone rip-rap using sand/cement grout to fill voids. Trowel smooth all exposed
joints.
2.14.2 Stone for embankments, drainage channels etc. shall be boulder rocks up to
300mm in any dimension.
2.15 BUMPER RAILS
2.15.1 Install rubber or wooden dock bumper.
2.15.2 Resilient rubber material of bumpers shall be rubberized-fabric truck tires cut to
uniform size pads, and punched to receive supporting rods.
2.15.2.1 Bumpers shall be 150mm (6) thick (projection from dock), and closed
with two 75mm x 63mm x 6mm (3 x 2- x ) thick structural angles
under approximate 681 kg (1500 pounds) of pressure. The angles are
welded to rods at one end and closed with threaded rod and nut at
the other end.
The anchor leg of angle shall extend a minimum of 63mm (2)

beyond the rubber surface either end and contains two 20mm (13/16)
diameter anchor bolt holes as required.
Page 48 of 221
2.15.2.2 The finish for exposed metal parts shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
2.15.2.3 Anchorage devices shall be for anchorage to lower dock face.
2.15.2.4 Wooden bumper shall be Douglas Fir-Larch; S4S; Grade No. 1

Structural Light Framing and BTR Grade; kiln dried; grade stamped;
300mm wide X 50mm thick.
2.16 PARKING BLOCKS
2.16.1 Install pre-cast concrete parking blocks, 230mm wide X 150mm high X
900mm long complete with two (2) each hold down pins.
2.16.2 Concrete blocks shall be fabricated in accordance with concrete

specifications specified in Section 3.0 of this Attachment IV to Schedule B.
Concrete mix shall be 21MPa (3 000psi).
2.16.3 Paint concrete blocks as specified in Section 9.12 of this Attachment IV to

Schedule B
2.17 STRUCTURE MOVING (Relocation of Portable Buildings)
2.17.1 Prior to dismantling of any type of portable unit it shall be suitably marked and
referenced to facilitate re-assembly and all fittings and equipment securely
fixed. All utilities serving the existing building shall be disconnected and
sealed off. Remove equipment, electrical fixtures, conduits, wires, fittings, A/C
equipment and other accessories and set aside for re-use. Dismantle
portables including but not limited to disconnecting units from existing
footings and dismantling floor, wall, ceiling and roofing connection pieces and
plates between units and trims. The units shall be suitably braced and
supported to prevent distortion or any movement of structures. Ensure all
portable building units, fittings and equipment are properly loaded and
secured, prior to transportation.
2.17.2 Transport portables between locations, including provision of transport and

driver per truck load, equipment and operator.
2.17.3 Unload portable units onto prepared pedestals/piers (foundation) in identical

sequence as previously connected, weld steel supports to base plates. All
temporary supports and bracing shall be removed and all re-usable floor,
wall, ceiling and roofing connection pieces, plates and trims between portable
units re-fitted. All fittings and equipment shall be placed in storage for future
use.
OR
2.17.4 Unload portable units on to CMU blocks for temporary storage and all
temporary supports, bracing and protection shall remain in place. All
openings to be covered with CONTRACTOR supplied polyethylene sheeting
Page 49 of 221
as weather protection... All re-usable roofing connection pieces, plates, trims,

fitting and equipment shall be placed in storage for future use.
2.18 SCAFFOLDING
2.18.1 Design, erect and dismantle fixed (stationary) and movable or suspended
(Sky-Climbers) scaffolds and other associated works, all in accordance with
the requirements called for in SAUDI ARAMCO General Instruction G. I.
8.001 and the SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Manual, Chapter II, Section 9.
2.18.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide and install tubular metal scaffolding as required
to satisfactory complete the WORK. The scaffolding shall be properly
braced, with close boarded wooden planks to form working platforms
provided with handrails, toe boards and installed with proper type ladder
complete with locking casters, horizontal/diagonal braces, cross bracing,
locking pins as required. Scaffolding shall be plumb, level and tied into the
walls for complete stability.
2.18.3 Submit scaffolds plan for review and approval.
All submittal and approval shall be as detailed in General Instruction G.I.

8.001.
2.19 AGGREGATES
Supply the following aggregates in required quantity necessary to complete the

WORK.
2.19.1 Mason Sand: conform to ASTM C-33, 09-SAMSS-088 and SAES-M-100

Section 3308; shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains, free from
deleterious substances.
The limits of deleterious substances in fine aggregates shall conform to Table

A of 09-SAMSS-088.
Fine aggregate shall not contain any materials that are deleteriously reactive
with the alkalies in the cement in an amount sufficient to cause excessive
expansion of mortar or concrete.
2.19.2 Coarse: conform to ASTM C-33, 09-SAMSS-088 and SAES-M-100 Section
3308ASTM C-33; shall be crush stone or other approved inert material having
clean, hard, durable and uncoated particle.
The limits of deleterious substances in coarse aggregates shall conform to
the requirements shown in Table A of 09-SAMSS-088.
2.19.3 Rock: conform to ASTM D-448.
2.19.4 Grit Blasting Material: Garnet; 30-60 mesh grit natural mineral; used to
produced an anchor pattern of 1.5-2.5 mils at a nozzle pressure of 690 KPa
(100 psi), hardness more than 7.5 mohs scale, specific gravity more than 4.0
semi angular grain shape, free silica nil, chlorides and sulfates less 250 ppm
each.
Page 50 of 221
2.19.5 Wall siding shall be completely removed to leave timber or steel or metal
studs and other finished surfaces free of all nails, screws and other
associated fixings and ready to receive new wall siding material. Partial
removal of wall siding may be required to carry out repairs or partial
replacement and is deemed to be included herein. Install new sheet vapor
barrier to cover all stripped areas to protect against rain and dust infiltration
etc. (included here)
2.20 PLASTIC WOOD FENCE AND GATE
WORK shall include erection of new plastic wood fence and gate. Work shall likewise
include damaged members of existing fence and gate.
2.20.1 ERECTION OF FENCE
2.20.1.1 Erect Plastic Wood fences including but not limited to erection of
15.24 cm x 15.24 cm (6 inch x 6 inch) (nominal) posts spaced at
1830 mm centers set into concrete footings, 5.08cm x 10.16 cm (2
inch x 4 inch) (nominal) vertical framing at ends of each bay
screwed to posts, 5.08cm x 10.16 cm (2 inch x 4 inch) (nominal)
horizontal framing and 5.08cm x 10.16 cm (2 inch x 4 inch)
(nominal) diagonal bracing with 2.54 cm x 15.24 cm (1 inch x 6 inch)
(nominal) vertical overlapping slats nailed to framing and bracing,
complete with all associated works. Fix 6mm dia x 76mm long
galvanized lag screw to each face of post set into concrete footing.
Type 1 - top of fence shall be 1880 mm high from ground level;

bottom of fence shall be 50 mm above ground level.
Type 2 - top of fence shall be 2184 mm high from ground level;

bottom of fence shall be 50 mm above ground level.
2.20.1.2 Excavation, concrete footings and backfilling are included in other

sections of the contract documents.
2.20.1.3 Top of concrete foundation shall be 100 mm below ground level.

Each concrete post foundation shall be formed in one continuous
pour.
2.20.2 ERECTION OF GATE FRAMES
2.20.2.1 Erect Plastic Wood frames for gates approximately 1215 mm wide x
3000 mm high overall, comprising two (2) 15.24cm (6 inch x 6 inch)
(nominal) posts set into concrete footings, with one (1) 15.24cm x
15.24cm (6 inch x 6 inch) (nominal) head jointed and screwed to
posts, complete with all associated works. Fix 6mm diameter x
76mm long lag screw to each face of post set into concrete footing.

sections of the contract documents. Top of concrete foundation shall
Page 51 of 221
be 100 mm below ground level. Each concrete post foundation shall

be formed in one continuous pour.
2.20.3 ERECTION OF GATES
2.20.3.1 Fabricate and install Plastic Wood gates, approximately 925 mm

wide x 1680 mm high comprising 5.08 cm x 10.16 cm (2 inch x
4inch) (nominal) frame all round, three (3) 5.08 cm x 10.16 cm (2
inch x 4 inch) (nominal) horizontal and two (2) 5.08 cm x 10.16 cm
(2 inch x 4 inch) (nominal) diagonal braces lined on one side with six
(6) 2.54 cm x 15.24 cm (1 inch x 6 inch) (nominal) vertical slats
screwed to framing; complete with two (2) 5.08 cm x 5.08 cm (2 inch
x 2 inch) (nominal) vertical stops, four(4) heavy duty galvanized
Tee hinges and one (1) gate latch, complete with all associated
works.


pour.
2.20.4 FIXINGS AND ACCESSORIES
2.20.4.1 GENERALLY: All fixings and fittings used in construction of the

fences and gates shall be corrosion resistant. Fixings and fittings
shall be as required by the design and shall include but not be
limited to the following:
NAILS: 45 mm long coated ring shank nails where nails are

specified.
SCREWS: types and sizes as required by design.
HINGES: heavy duty galvanized finish Tee hinges as

manufactured by Stanley Hardware or approved equal.
LATCH: dead black finish 86 mm wide x 273 mm long steel thumb

latch lockable from one side as manufactured by Stanley Hardware
or approved equal.
2.20.5 MATERIALS
Materials to be used shall be as described in Section 6.15 of this Attachment

IV to this Schedule B.
3.0 CONCRETE
Page 52 of 221
All concrete WORK shall be carried out in full accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO Standard
SAEA-Q-001. This Standard covers the minimum mandatory requirements governing the
design, specification, and construction of concrete structures.
The Scope of Work covers the construction and repair of, but not limited to, concrete
sidewalks, block/brick/stone wall foundations, curbs and gutters, structural columns,
beams, stairs/steps, slabs suspended and on-grade, retaining walls and foundations,
inclusive of all required formworks, steel reinforcements, joint accessories,
coatings/protection and curing.
3.1 FORMWORK
3.1.1 All formwork shall be fabricated and erected in accordance to the

requirements of ACI 347R and SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual.
3.1.2 Forms for exposed surfaces shall be 20mm thick, high density overlay ply
form, Class I or Class II Exterior, APA grade trademarked, edge sealed,
complying with USPS-PS1.
3.1.3 Forms for concealed surfaces shall be 20mm thick, BB plywood, Class 1
Exterior, APA grade trademark, complying with USPS PS1 sealed edges and
well oiled.
3.1.4 Construct form WORK to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions as
required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb in
finished structures, complete with required supports or shoring.
3.1.5 Provide for opening, offsets, shrinkages, recesses, moldings, chamfers,

blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts and other features
required. Use only selected materials to obtain required finishes.
3.1.6 Forms for openings, and construction which accommodates installations by

other trades whose materials must be fabricated before the opportunity exists
to verify measurements which affects such installations shall be accurately
sized and located as dimensioned on drawings. In the event that deviation
from the drawings results in problems in the field, CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for the resolution at no cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
3.1.7 Forms shall be fabricated for easy removal without hammering or prying
against concrete surfaces. Provide all means necessary to avoid stripping
damage to cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclines where the
slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Take all means
necessary to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal.
3.1.8 Drill forms to suit ties used and prevent leakage of concrete around tie holes.
Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes.
3.1.9 Provide sharp, clean corners at intersections, without visible edges or offsets.
Back joints to maintain true, square intersections.
Page 53 of 221
3.1.10 Use extra studs, nailers and bracing to prevent bowing of forms between
studs and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete.
3.1.11 Locate control joints where called for or requested by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Project Engineer.
3.1.12 Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate other trades WORK.

Verify size and location of openings, recesses and chases with the trade
requiring such items.
3.1.13 Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove
all deleterious material prior to pouring concrete. Re-tighten forms
immediately after pouring concrete as required to eliminate mortar leaks.
Coat form contact surfaces with a suitable form coating liquid or compound
before reinforcement is placed. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions. Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed
strips for slabs surface. Provide and secure units to support types of screeds
required. Remove formwork after the requisite curing period or as instructed
by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. Thoroughly clean all surfaces of
formwork to be re-used. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged
form facing material will not be acceptable. Re-tighten all joints in formwork,
which is to be re-used.
3.1.14 All formwork shall be in accordance with U.B.C Codes, SEC 2606 (a) and (b).
3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
3.2.1 All reinforcing bars shall conform to SASO SSA 2, hot-rolled, high tensile,
deformed steel. These bars shall be acceptable under the ACI 318M
specified limitation of 422 MPa (60.0 Ksi).
3.2.2 Welded wire fabric shall conform to SASO SSA 224, (cold drawn) wire with
minimum yield strength of 240 MPa (34.8 Ksi).
3.2.3 Coated reinforcements shall be Fusion Bonded Epoxy in accordance with 09-
SAMSS-106.
3.2.4 Galvanized welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A767 and shall be
acceptable reinforcement in lieu of epoxy coated welded wire fabric coated in
accordance to ASTM A884.
3.2.5 Manufacture, fabrication, handling, placement and storage of reinforcement

shall be in accordance with chapter 7 of ACI 318. Handling and fabrication of
the Epoxy coated reinforcement shall be in accordance with ASTM A775
Appendix, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI).Care should be
taken to avoid any damage to the coated rebar during shipment, handling,
fabrication and placement of the coated rebar. The extent of the damage and
repair of the coating shall be in accordance with 09-SAMSS-106.
3.3 CONCRETE
Page 54 of 221
3.3.1 Concrete shall be in accordance with SAES Q 001 and either structural or
nonstructural as follows:-
Concrete shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR from SAUDI ARAMCO

approved plant. Such plants shall conform to the provisions of 09-SAMSS-
097 using Type V sulfate resistant Portland cement ( or Type I as specified in
the project Scope of Work) in accordance with ASTM C150. The minimum 28
day design compressive strength per ASTM C39 shall be as follows:-
A. Structural Concrete: All reinforced concrete including concrete with

minimum reinforcement for temperature and shrinkage control. The 28
day design compressive strength (ASTM C39) shall be 28 MPa (4000
psi).
B. Non-Structural Concrete: non reinforced concrete of no significant

structural value such as lean concrete for sub-slabs, concrete for duct
banks etc. The minimum 28 day design compressive strength (ASTM
C39) shall be 14 MPa (2000 psi).
3.3.2 Place concrete in accordance with SAES Q 001, ACI 301 and ACI 304.
3.3.3 Place concrete continuously between pre determined expansion, control and
expansion joints.
3.3.4 Concrete Curing
3.3.4.1 Curing and protection of fresh concrete shall start immediately after
final finishing operation. Curing methods shall be in accordance with
ACI-308-92. Concrete shall be protected from premature drying,
temperature extremes and mechanical injury, for a period of at least
7 days (14 days if Type II cement is specified) to allow proper
hydration of the Portland cement and hardening of the concrete.
A. Moisture loss from surfaces adjacent to forms (shutters) shall be

minimized by keeping the forms wet until they can be safely
removed. Concrete shall be kept moist for a minimum of 7 days
(14 days if Type II cement is specified) or until 70% of the
specified strength has been achieved, whichever is longer.
B. All materials and facilities for curing concrete shall be on hand

and ready for use before the concrete is placed.
3.3.4.2 Approved methods of curing include the following; refer to Section

2.3.3 of ACI 308:
A. Liquid curing agents must conform to ASTM-C309, Type 1 - Sika

Saudi Co. Ltd., Riyadh or approved equal.
B. Sheet Materials shall conform to ASTM C 171.
Page 55 of 221
C. Burlap Cloth (or Hessian Sack) made from jute or kenaf and
weighing approximately 305 grams per sq m (9 oz per sq. yd) for
moist curing shall conform to AASHTO M182 and shall use two
layers.
D. Water: Shall be sweet water, or acceptable raw water with less

than that 1000 PPM dissolved solids, as per SAUDI ARAMCO
Engineering Standard, SAES-Q-001, Para. 2.2 Ref: ACI 308-92.
E. Sand: Wet, clean sand (ACI 308-92 section 2.2.5)
Note: Thirty (30) percent of the strength or more can be lost by

premature drying out of the concrete. Therefore, maintain
curing for at least the minimum time specified.
3.3.5 Concrete Coating and Protection

3.3.5.1 A plasticized sheet vapor barrier, minimum 0.15 mm (6 mils) in
thickness, shall be placed beneath slabs on grade.
3.3.5.2 A plasticized sheet vapor barrier, minimum 0.15 mm (6 mils) in

thickness or a 50 mm sub-slab (lean concrete) shall be placed
beneath concrete foundations.
3.3.5.3 A plasticized sheet vapor barrier shall be placed below and around
the sides of concrete that is placed directly into excavation without
the use of formwork, where coal tar or bitumen coating cannot be
applied.
3.3.5.4 All concrete surfaces in direct contact with earth shall be coated with
two coats of coal tar or bitumen coating that conforms to APCS-3 or
APCS-10 of SAES-H-101. APCS-10 shall not be used where soil is
contaminated with hydrocarbons.
3.3.5.5 Where concrete surface protection is required it shall be in

accordance with ACI 515.1R.
3.3.6 Joints
3.3.6.1 Unless otherwise shown on individual project drawings, expansion

joints shall be spaced 10meters and control joints shall be spaced
3.0meters in any direction.
3.3.6.2 Construction joints shall be located in the field at locations approved

by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
3.3.6.3 Pre-formed joint filler materials shall be bituminous fiber type

conforming to ASTM D-1751.
3.3.6.4 Joint sealant compound shall be Nitoseal 625 by FOSR0C or

approved equal.
Page 56 of 221
3.3.7 Hot Weather Concreting
3.3.7.1 Unless otherwise approved, all concreting shall be considered hot

weather concreting, as defined by ACI 305R, and shall be in
accordance with recommended practice of ACI 305R. Ample water
supply and foggers shall be available at all concrete placement.
3.3.8 Cold Weather Concreting
3.3.8.1 Concreting shall be in accordance with recommended practice of

ACI 306R.
3.3.9 CMU/Block/Brick Wall Foundations
3.3.9.1 Place form WORK, vapor barrier, reinforcing steel and ties as
required forming foundation for block or brick walls. Pour concrete,
ready mix or site mix as required or directed by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Engineer. Apply bitumen concrete coating to all surfaces
in contact with soil.
3.3.10 Reinforced Concrete Slab On-Grade
3.3.10.1 Place form WORK, vapor barrier, reinforcing steel and ties
as required forming reinforced concrete slabs on grade. Pour
concrete, ready mix or site mix as required or approved by the
SAUDI ARAMCO Engineer.
3.3.10.2 All v-notch type contraction joints shall be spaced no more

than 3 meters apart horizontally and vertically. Expansion type joints
shall be spaced no more than 10 m apart horizontally.
3.3.10.3 As soon as form WORK is removed, tie wire, form ties and
any other embedded item shall be cut back 2.54 cm (1 inch) and
holes neatly and smoothly patched. Honey combing and places with
loose aggregate shall be thoroughly cleaned and patched only after
the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer's approval.
3.3.10.4 All exterior slabs and outdoor areas subject to foot traffic
only shall have a light broom finish. All interior floor slabs, unless
otherwise noted, shall have a steel trowel finish only.
3.3.11 Reinforced Concrete Columns, Beams and Suspended Slabs
3.3.11.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which

shall include but not be limited to preparing and performing all
applicable activities necessary during the construction of columns,
beams and suspended slabs. Placing and removal of shoring, form
WORK, vapor barrier, cut bend and fix reinforcing bars, spacers and
ties (any size) as required to form columns, beams and slabs.
Provide lean concrete where required or as directed by the SAUDI
Page 57 of 221
ARAMCO Project Engineer. The WORK shall be plumbed, true and

accurate to dimensions. Pour concrete, ready mix or site mix as
required or approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
Curing and protection shall start immediately after final finishing
operation.
3.3.11.2 As soon as form WORK is removed, tie wire, form

ties and any other embedded item shall be cut back 2.54 cm (1
inch) and holes neatly and smoothly patched. Honey combing and
places with loose aggregate shall be thoroughly cleaned and
patched only after the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer's
approval.
3.3.12 Reinforced Concrete Foundations & Cast In-Situ Retaining Walls
3.3.12.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which shall include but not
be limited to preparing and performing all applicable activities
necessary during the construction of general foundations and
retaining/cast in-situ walls.
Placing and removal of shoring, form WORK, vapor barrier, cut bend
and fix reinforcing bars, spacers and ties (any size) as required to
form foundations and retaining walls. Provide lean concrete where
required or as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
The WORK shall be plumbed, true and accurate to dimensions.
Pour concrete, ready mix or site mix as required or approved by the
SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. Provide weep holes at locations
indicated on the project drawings along with appropriate backfill to
maintain free drainage behind retaining walls. Apply bitumen
concrete coating to all surfaces in contact with soil.
3.3.13 Reinforced Concrete Stairs/Steps
3.3.13.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which shall

include but not be limited to preparing and performing all applicable
activities necessary during the construction of reinforced concrete
stairs/steps. Construct reinforced CMU walls on reinforced concrete
footings to support steps. Provide and install all necessary
temporary formwork and reinforcing bars. Construct cast in-situ
reinforced concrete steps on prepared backfill with polyethylene
membrane.
3.3.13.2 Provide all joints including separation strips as required.

Finish surfaces of steps smooth and provide chamfer to top edge of
steps to the satisfaction of the SAUDI ARAMCO Engineer or as
specified on Scope of Work or drawings.
3.3.14 Pre Cast Concrete Planter Boxes
3.3.14.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform WORK, which shall include

but not be limited to preparing and performing all applicable
Page 58 of 221
activities necessary during the construction of pre-cast concrete

planter boxes. Placing and removal of shoring, formwork, cut, bend
and fix reinforcing bars, spacers, ties (any size) and lifting hook
(eye) as required to form pre-cast concrete planter boxes, complete
with PVC weep holes.
3.3.14.2 WORK shall be plumb, true and accurate to dimensions.

Pour concrete, ready mix or site mix as required or directed by the
SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineering. Curing and protection shall
start immediately after final finishing operation. Provide drainage
holes at locations indicated on the project drawings. Apply
bituminous waterproof tanking system to internal area of planter box
as directed.
3.3.15 Concrete Up Stand
3.3.15.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which shall include but not
be limited to preparing and performing all applicable activities
necessary during the construction of up stand over existing concrete
slab. Placing and removal of form WORK, cut and fix (10mm or
12mm diameter) dowel bars (400 or 800 mm centers) and epoxy
grouted to existing slab. The WORK shall be plumbed, true and
accurate to dimensions. Pour concrete, ready mix or site mix as
required or approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
Curing and protection shall start immediately after final finishing
operation.
3.3.16 Dowel Bars
3.3.16.1 Drill dowel bars to existing concrete. Install dowel bars

complete with HILTI HIT HY150 anchor system by Hilti or
SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
3.4 CONCRETE TOPPING
3.4.1 To prepared concrete slab overlay sand cement screed or self leveling
compound.
3.4.2 In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope
surfaces uniformly to drains.
3.4.3 Exposed concrete surfaces of slabs shall be uniform in appearance, without

defects, and finished to a smooth finish, unless otherwise specified.
3.4.4 Leveling compound shall be Nitflor Leveltop by Fosroc or SAUDI ARAMCO

approved equal.
3.5 CONSTRUCTION GROUT
3.5.1 The WORK shall include preparation and application of grout under base
plates, around pipe sleeves and drains.
Page 59 of 221
3.5.2 Class I - Pre-packaged, high fluidity, non shrink, epoxy grout & shall only
require the addition of water at the mixer. Master Builders MASTER FLOW
or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal. Class I grout shall attain at 28 days a
minimum compressive strength of 34.5 MPa (5000 psi). Class I grout shall
conform to SAES-Q-010.
3.5.3 Class II - Site mixed grouts, using locally available materials. Class II grout
shall consist of Portland cement Type V conforming to ASTM C150 and clean
well graded fine aggregate conforming to ASTM C33 and potable water. The
material shall be no wetter than necessary for satisfactory placement.
Minimum compressive strength shall not be less than 13.8 MPa (2000 psi).
3.5.4 Class I Grout shall be used for precision, non-shrink grouting in the following
applications:
A. All grouting of structural base plates and pre-cast members.
B. Base plates for equipment.
3.5.5 Class II Grout shall be used for all non-precision grouting such as pipe
sleeves and drains and other applications (pre-cast) where non shrink
characteristics are not mandatory.
3.5.6 Class II grout will be packed in place to ensure the complete filling of the area
to be grouted.
3.5.7 Class I grout to be cured at manufacturers instructions. Class II grout to be

kept damp until it has cured but for not less than 72 hours, subject to
modification of SAES-Q-010.
3.5.8 Portland cement shall be Type V conforming to ASTM C150.
3.6 DRILL HOLES
3.6.1 The WORK shall include but not be limited to the drilling of various size holes
in concrete slabs, paths and foundations for the installation of foundation
bolts, holding down bolts.
3.6.1.1 Drill holes of various sizes as required by individual project

requirements, clean out the hole so that it is free of any dust, the
foundation hole shall be soaked with potable water for a period of 24
hours prior to grouting. Water shall be removed from core hole by
the use of clean rags or oil free compressed air.
3.6.1.2 Grout shall be mixed according to the manufacturer's instructions to

provide a fluid mixture at a mixed grout temperature of 80 o F or less.
If crushed ice is used, care must be taken to ensure the ice is
completely melted, prior to pouring the grout into the foundation
hole. Weight or measure all mixing water and/or ice accurately and
once established for flow and temperature encountered, maintain
Page 60 of 221
this amount for fluidity, unless temperatures change. Water used in

mixing shall be potable water only.
3.6.1.3 Water shall be placed in mixer first (potable water only), then slowly
add grout. The grout shall be mixed for a minimum of two (2)
minutes after the addition of the last bag per batch, do not mix over
five (5) minutes.
3.6.1.4 No water shall be added to the mix after it begins to harden. Grout
batch shall be placed within 10 minutes after mixing. Provide long
term curing by application of high grade curing compound applied
by brush or roller.
3.6.1.5 Grout used for foundation/holding down bolts must conform to the
requirements of SAES Q-010 and Q-011.
3.6.2 Walls
3.6.2.1 Drill holes to concrete/CMU of various sizes as required by individual

project requirements, clean out the hole so that it is free of any dust.
3.6.2.2 Install pipe sleeve and seal with intumescent sealant.
3.7 CONCRETE RESTORATION/CLEANING
3.7.1 REPAIR OF DETERIORATED CONCRETE
3.7.1.1 Concrete Removal
Locate all hollow-sounding areas using a hammer.
Saw-cut approximately 10 mm. deep around the perimeter of the

defective areas.
Remove all delaminated or deteriorated concrete cover, taking care

not to crack or otherwise damage remaining concrete.
Where corrosion of the re-bar is visible, remove concrete behind the

reinforcement to a minimum depth of 25 mm.
Remove concrete cover along and behind the reinforcement until a

continuous length of 50 mm. of clean non-corroded re-bar has been
exposed from sound concrete.
Note: Some judgment is required regarding the orientation of cracks

in reinforced concrete. If the cracks are aligned with the main
reinforcement, this is a serious condition. The entire length of the
reinforcement is exposed to oxygen and potential corrosion
Page 61 of 221
When the cracks are perpendicular to the reinforcing steel, the width
of the cracks exposes the steel re-bar to corrosion and severe
pitting locally especially if chloride ions are present.
3.7.1.2 Steel Reinforcement
Grit blast all exposed reinforcing steel to SSPC-SP10 standard

(near white blast cleaning), SA2 or approved equal.
Wash the entire surface with sweet water to remove all dust, salts
etc.
Attached Galvanized XP or approved equal, sacrificial anode units,

to the exposed reinforcement at a minimum of 750mm centers
along/around the repair boundary using the supplied wires. Test the
electrical continuity between Galvanized XP unit wire ties and the
cleaned rebar using an appropriate meter.
Within 30 minutes of blast cleaning, apply epoxy primer to the

reinforcing steel (Ref: NITOPRIME ZINCRICH or approved equal).
The primer shall be compatible with the repair materials used and
special care shall be taken to ensure that the entire surface area of
the exposed reinforcement is treated.
Remove corroded steel reinforcement, which has lost 20% or more

of its cross-sectional area and replace it with FBE coated re-bars.
Reinforcement splicing shall be in full accordance with ACI-318:
1989, Code Section No. 12.15, 12.16 & 12.17. It is essential that all
precautions are taken to ensure that the coated re-bar is not
damaged in any way, even very small damaged areas can lead to
accelerated localized corrosion.
3.7.1.3 New Concrete and/or Cementations Repair Systems
The original concrete profile shall be restored in one of three ways

depending on the size of repair and surface finish required:
A. Small volumes, less than 1.0 cu m, use RENDEROC - TG

Cementations Dry pack Repair System or approved equal, or
B. RENDEROC - LA High Flow Repair Micro-concrete or approved
equal,
C. Larger volumes i.e. greater than 1.0 cu m. use Ready-Mix
Concrete. Ready-Mix Concrete should only be used when
forming the full horizontal cross section of the element to be
repaired.
Cementations Repair Systems shall be prepared and applied in

strict accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and
specifications.
Page 62 of 221
Ready-Mix Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of

4,000 psi (28 n/sq. mm) @ 28 days. A 10 mm aggregate shall be
used in the concrete mix along with a bonding agent additive (ref:
NITOBOND-SBR or approved equal). In addition, Ready-Mix
Concrete shall meet all the requirements of 09-SAMSS-097 and
SAES-Q-001. The aggregates used shall conform to 09-SAMSS-88.
The prepared area of concrete to be repaired shall be treated as

follows:
Prime the repair area with NITOBOND E.P. or approved equal in full
accordance with Manufacturer's instructions prior to the application
of the new concrete repair. The new concrete repair must be applied
while the adhesive is still tacky (up to 8 Hours max. depending on
ambient temperature) otherwise a second coat must be applied.
If formwork is required, it shall be tight and dimensionally accurate

prior to pouring concrete or flow grade repair mortar. Special care
shall be taken to ensure that all joints in the formwork are fully
sealed to prevent grout leakage.
In some cases it may be more efficient to fill the sealed form WORK
with sweet water and leave to stand for a few hours/overnight rather
than using a bonding adhesive which may set too quickly when
applied during very hot temperatures. The sweet water should then
be drained off and the formwork filled with the new concrete repair.
The repaired area shall be properly cured using sweet water or an

approved membrane curing compound; ref. CONCURE 90 or
approved equal. Timber formwork may be stripped after 24 hours
but may remain in place for 7 to 14 days in order to assist in the
curing process. All sections shall be thoroughly wetted with large
volumes of sweet water immediately after the form WORK is
stripped and then sprayed with an unbroken coating of CONCURE
90 or approved equal. All sections shall be wrapped in plastic sheets
and frequently wetted with large volumes of sweet water.
If structural shoring is used to support concrete elements during

repair, samples of the repair material shall be taken for compressive
testing in order to determine the safe minimum period before the
shoring can be removed. No shoring shall be removed until the
concrete repair has reached a minimum compressive strength of 20
N/sq. mm (minimum 3 - 4 days depending on repair material).
3.7.1.4 Epoxy Resin Crack Injection System
When a crack is stable and not attributable to re-bar corrosion a

crack injection system (ref: Nitokit or approved equal) can be used
to effect a repair. The cracks must be thoroughly clean and free from
dust. Their surface should be prepared by sandblasting or power
brushing. Before the crack can be injected, the surface of the crack
Page 63 of 221
must be sealed and the injection nipples bonded in the correct

locations, 200-500 mm apart. When the surface sealant has cured
the injection process can begin. All WORK must be carried out in
strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
3.7.1.5 Sand/Cement Render
If a sand/cement render is required over the repaired concrete or

elsewhere for aesthetic reasons or otherwise, then it shall be
applied using NITOBOND-SBR or approved equal as a
waterproofing /bonding agent admixture. The surface area to be
rendered shall firstly be cleaned by sandblasting or high-pressure
water jet and then washed down with sweet water and left to dry.
The render area shall then be bonded with a provisional render-key
applied by mechanically spattering the surface with a sand /
cement / Nitobond SBR or approved equal mix, and allowed to dry
prior to applying the plaster. The total plastering application shall be
local to the unaligned surfaces. An appropriate mix design follows:
50 kg Cement
150 kg sharp well graded sand
10 litre Nitobond-SBR or approved equal
Clean water added to adjust consistency ensuring a semi-dry state
for rendering
The rendering shall be mixed using a mechanical mixer. No mixing

by hand will be allowed.
3.7.1.6 Penetrate Sealer
The application of a Silane/Siloxane penetrate sealer (20% solids)

to all exposed repaired areas of concrete or sand/cement render
may continue not less than 14 days after the repairs have been
carried out; ref: NITOCOTE SN 502 or approved equal. The entire
area of the repair, together with all adjacent areas of concrete or
sand/cement render, shall first be grit or sand blasted in order to
remove all latent, traces of mould release agent, curing compound
and any other surface contaminants.
If the DEKGUARD ELASTIC or DEKGUARD-S systems are being

specified for the final paint finish then the NITOPRIME DG primer
should be used as the penetrate sealer.
3.7.1.7 For finish painting, refer to Section 9.12 of this Attachment IV to

Schedule B.
3.7.2 MINOR CONCRETE REPAIR
3.7.2.3 Apply sealant to existing expansion joints of concrete slab.
Page 64 of 221
3.7.2.2 Repair cracks on concrete path/slab; Apply Brushcrete coating

(Masterseal 550 by Feb Masters Builders or approved equal).
3.7.2.3 Repair exposed portion concrete base of patio wooden sunscreen

posts.
4.0 MASONRY
The WORK shall include but not be limited to the repair and/or construction of concrete
block walls, decorative block walls, glass walls; brick walls, random rubble stone walls or
Riyadh Stone wall facing. Concrete block walls, decorative block walls, brick walls or
random rubble walls shall be of dimension and thickness as called for in the Release
Purchase Order.
4.1 DECORATIVE BLOCK WALLS
4.1.1 General: Decorative concrete block wall shall have reinforced concrete studs
running continuously from foundations to bond beams and horizontal
reinforcing every third course. Work shall be plumb, true and accurate to
dimensions. Horizontal joints shall be constructed straight and level by using
string line. A general level must maintained from where course heights can be
checked. Expansion joints shall be provided as required by individual project
drawings. Piers and buttresses shall be provided as required by individual
projects drawings.
4.1.2 Jointing: Vertical joints shall be generally 16" on center (o.c.) approximately
3/8" wide. Horizontal joints shall be generally 8 o.c. approximately 3/8" wide.
The starting course of block WORK shall be full bedded and all other joints
shall face shell bedded. All joints shall be pointed full and firmly compacted
with a pointing trowel or special tool after the mortar has become stiffened.
Joint pattern shall be V-tooled, weathered, struck or flush cut as selected by
the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
4.1.3 Bond Beams: In the joint at the bottom of the last course to be laid prior to the
bond beam. Lay strips of metal lath 5-1/2" wide. Interrupt the lath strips at
cells where studs occur. Fill all cell of the last course prior to the bond beam
with mortar and aggregate. Place bond beam reinforcing steel, connect to the
stud reinforcement, place bond beam mortar and aggregate. Tamp fully,
install anchor bolts of other items as required. Trowel finish top of bond beam
ready to receive capping or haunch to rounded weather top as required or
directed by SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. Block WORK shall be laid in
running bond unless otherwise indicated.
4.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (CMU)/BRICK WALLS
4.2.1 General
All masonry WORK shall be executed in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO

SAES-M-100 Chapter 21.
Page 65 of 221
Masonry Units shall comply with 09-SAMS-016 and shall be from a SAUDI
ARAMCO approved vendor.
Hollow and Solid load-bearing concrete masonry units shall be manufactured

and tested according to ASTM C90.
Concrete building brick shall be Grade N manufactured and tested according

to ASTM C55.
Non-load bearing concrete masonry units shall be manufactured and tested

according to ASTM C129.
Mortar shall be type S in accordance with SAES-M-100 1994 Uniform

Building Code with a compressive strength at 28 days of not less than 1800
psi (12.4 MPa) and consisting of the following proportions:-
Portland Cement One (1) part

Lime One (1) part
Sand shall comprise 2 and not more than 3 times the sum of the separate
volume of cementations materials.
Grout shall be in accordance with SAES-M-100: 1994 Uniform Building Code

with a compressive strength at 28 days of not less than 2000 psi (13.8 MPa)
and consisting of the following proportions:-
Fine Grout

Fine Aggregate One (1) part
Coarse Grout

Fine Aggregate Three (3) parts
Coarse Aggregate Two (2) parts
Jointing
Vertical joints shall be generally 400 mm on center (o/c.) approximately 8 mm

wide. Horizontal joints shall be generally 200 mm o/c approximately 8 mm
wide. The starting course of block WORK shall be full bedded and all other
joints shall be face shell bedded. All joints shall be pointed full and firmly
compacted with a pointing trowel or special tool after the mortar has become
stiffened. Joint pattern shall be V-tooled, weathered, struck or flush cut as
selected by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
Embedded Items
All bolts, ties or anchors set in masonry shall be carefully positioned and
thoroughly embedded. The mason shall coordinate fully with other crafts in
Page 66 of 221
setting door/window frames and other items and maintaining all WORK in
accurate positions.
4.2.2 Concrete Block Walls
Concrete block walls in general shall have reinforced grouted cells at

maximum center of 800 mm with horizontal ladder type reinforcement at
every third course. All cells shall be grout filled below grade.
A general level must be maintained from where course heights can be

checked. Expansion joints shall be provided as required by individual project
drawings. Piers and buttresses shall be provided as required by individual
project drawings.
4.2.3 Concrete Block Retaining Walls
The position of grouted cells is fixed by the location of steel reinforcing starter
bars projecting from the foundation. Cells are to be filled where reinforcing
bars occur. When cells are filled to the top of the reinforcing, install new
reinforcing bar. Length of reinforcing bar splice shall not be less than 40 x
reinforcing bar diameter.
In the case of concrete block retaining walls, all cells shall be fully grouted
from bottom to top regardless of whether a rebar is present in each cell or
not.
4.2.4 Concrete Block Column
Prepare and lay concrete block pilaster/column into prepared foundation

complete with reinforcements. All cells of concrete block shall be filled with
concrete grout.
4.2.5 Bond Beams
Where bond beams are required by design, all cells of the last course of
masonry below the bond beam shall be filled with grout. Grout shall be
retained by use of metal lath strips laid over cells in the joint below this
course and interrupted at cells containing vertical reinforcement. Bond beam
reinforcing steel shall be connected to vertical reinforcement and bond beam
grouted or concrete placed. Block WORK shall be laid in running bond unless
otherwise indicated.
4.2.6 Brick Capping
Prepare and lay new one brick wide capping to CMU/concrete wall including
but not limited to mortar of SAUDI ARAMCO approved mixing proportion and
all associated works.
4.3 GLASS BLOCKS
4.3.1 General
Page 67 of 221
Glass blocks may be used in non load-bearing exterior or interior walls and
openings which might otherwise be filled with windows, either isolated or in
continuous bands, provided the glass block panels have a minimum
thickness of 75 mm. Glass blocks may be solid or hollow and may contain
inserts.
4.3.2 Glass Block Unit
Glass blocks unit shall be 80mm thick solid glass with the following physical
properties- heat/thermal transmission (U value) of 0.51 Btu/Ft F, thermal
resistance (R value) of 1.96hr Ft F/Btu, thermal expansion coefficient of .
0000047 F, visible light transmission 75%, sound transmission (STC) of 37,
impact strength of 50-60 in-lbs and compressive strength .
4.3.3 Mortar Joints
Glass blocks shall be laid in Type S mortar as per ASTM C 270. Both vertical
and horizontal mortar joints shall be at least 6 mm and not more than 10 mm
thick and shall be completely filled. No furrowing shall be allowed. All mortar
contact surfaces shall be treated to ensure adhesion between mortar and
glass.
4.3.4 Lateral Support
Lateral support shall be provided by panel anchors spaced not more than 400
mm on center or by channels. The panel anchors shall consist of 20 Ga.
perforated galvanized steel strips 600 mm long by 45 mm wide galvanized
after perforating.
4.3.5 Reinforcement
Glass block panels shall have joint reinforcement consisting of two parallel 9
Ga. Wires, galvanized ladder type, spaced not more than 400 mm on center
and located in the mortar joint extending the full length of the panel. A
minimum lap length of 150 mm is required for reinforcement splices. Joint
reinforcement shall also be placed in the bed joint immediately below and
above openings in the panel.
4.3.6 Size of Panels
Glass block panels for exterior walls shall not exceed 13.4 m 2 of unsupported
wall surface or 4.572 m in any dimension. For interior walls, glass block
panels shall not exceed 23.2 m2 of unsupported area or 7.62 m in any
dimension.
4.3.7 Expansion joints
Glass block shall be provided with expansion joints along the sides and top,
and these joints shall have sufficient thickness to accommodate
displacements of the supporting structure, but not less than 20 mm.
Page 68 of 221
Expansion joints shall be entirely free of mortar and shall be filled with
resilient material.
4.3.8 Reuse of Glass Blocks
Glass block units shall not be reused after being removed from an existing
panel or wall.
4.4 STONE MASONRY
4.4.1 Stone masonry (i.e. rubble and Riyadh stone) shall be accurately cut to
required shape and sizes with all exposed surfaces true, out of wind and
edges in a continuous straight line with joining edges. Units shall be free of
cracks and seams which may impair its structural integrity or architectural
appearance.
4.4.2 Units shall be quarried from a single source. Inherent variations of

characteristic are not acceptable.
4.4.3 Wall Anchors and Anchoring: Stainless Steel Type 304.
4.4.4 Adhesive: Nitofix by Fozroc or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
4.4.5 Grout shall be in accordance with SAES-M-100: 1994 Uniform Building Code
with a compressive strength at 28 days of not less than 2000 psi (13.8 MPa)
and consisting of the following proportions:-
Fine Grout

Fine Aggregate Two (2) parts
Coarse Grout

Fine Aggregate Three (3) parts
Coarse Aggregate Two (2) parts
4.5 MASONRY RESTORATION

4.5.1 REPAIR OF CMU WALLS
4.5.1.1 Remove dilapidated or unsound or hollow sounding surfaces. Clean
surface with sweet water and detergent; remove dust, oil, grease, or
corrosion deposits.
4.5.1.2 Apply Nitobond EP by FOSROC or approved equal bonding agent

to affected areas.
4.5.1.3 Renderoc TG by FOSROC or approved equal repair mortar as per

manufacturer's instructions.
Page 69 of 221
4.5.2 REPAIR OF STONE MASONRY

4.5.2.1 Grit blast stone masonry, clean and re-point with site mixture of one
(1) part cement and two (2) parts sand.
5.0 METALS
All Steel structures shall be installed in compliance with SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering
Standards SAESM001.
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which shall include, but not be limited to, all
applicable procedures and activities necessary during the installation and fabrication of
structural steel, metal deck and steel handrails; inclusive of required welding works. All
WORK shall be in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO Codes, Standards and
Specifications.
5.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
5.1.1 Supply, fabricate and install any section or combined sections

(trusses/frames) of structural steel inclusive, but not limited to, cutting,
welding, drilling, bolt installation end and base plate fabrication, stiffener
plates and any other associated WORK. Steel shall be prepared, primed and
painted. Any primer paint removed (abrasions) from the metal surface during
handling, erection, welding or bolting, shall be touched up in the field using
approved primer touch-up paint after adequate surface preparation.
5.1.2 All Structural Shape including plates shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM specifications using A-36 structural steel.
5.1.3 Anchor Bolts shall comply with ASTM A-307 or A-325 (as per individual
Scope of Work) with hexagonal nuts and washer as required.
5.1.4 Fabrication and erection of structural steel shall conform to the requirements
of Manual of Steel Construction AISC 9th Edition and 12-SAMSS-007.
5.2 STEEL/METAL/PLASTIC DECK
5.2.1 Fabricate and install metal roof/floor decking any thickness, corrugated or by
type inclusive of cutting, puddle welding, metal screw fastening or any other
associated works.
5.2.2 Fabricate and install open grid galvanized steel industrial flooring, Ref:
Redman Fisher Flow forge or approved equal, load bearing bars at 41 mm
pitch. All flooring panels shall be fitted with binding bars. Include all
associated clips, fasteners etc. as per manufacturers specifications.
5.2.3 Fabricate and install aluminum or glass reinforced plastic (GRP) flooring
panels. Include all associated clips, fasteners etc. as per manufacturers
specifications.
5.3 METAL STUD FRAMING
Page 70 of 221
5.3.1 Install metal stud framing 16, 18, 20 or 22 Ga; 63mm or 92mm wide, inclusive
of floor track, headers, bracing and stiffening.
5.3.2 Install floor track anchor bolted to floor. Bolts may be either cast in or lag bolts
and shields or expansion anchors. Erect vertical steel studs plum and true to
line including normal openings and bridging. Install header at full height of
stud wall. Steel studs shall be fixed to floor track and header by drilling and
installing sheet metal screws.
5.3.3 Bridging or stiffening shall be installed at 1200 mm o.c. horizontally. Bridging

or stiffening shall be welded on each side of the stud it passes through.
5.3.4 Double headers shall be installed over openings. Single headers or bridging
shall be installed where pipe WORK passes the space between two studs.
Bridging shall be provided where outlet boxes are installed.
5.3.5 Floor track shall be anchored to concrete slab by Hilting Nail NK-27S12.
5.3.6 Metal studs shall be CEE shaped; ASTM C 645, hot dipped galvanized steel
per ASTM A-446M or in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO Material System.
5.4 METAL FURRING TO DRYWALLS AND MASONRY WALLS
5.4.1 Install furring to drywalls/masonry concrete walls to achieve a plumb and

aligned base for fixing sheet materials.
5.4.2 Furring shall be packed out level and fixed to walls using appropriate plugs
and screws.
5.4.3 Main runners shall be installed at floor level and ceiling level. Horizontal
bridging shall be provided/ installed as required.
5.4.4 Metal furring shall be CEE shaped; ASTM C 645, hot dipped galvanized steel
per ASTM A-446M or in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO Material System.
Or
Hot shaped furring channel, FC 50, 0.9 mm thick, zinc coated per ASTM A
525 and with lock forming quality as per ASTM A-527.
5.5 STEEL HANDRAIL
5.5.1 Supply, fabricate and install standard 900 mm horizontal or raking handrail
comprising vertical posts spaced at approximately 900 mm centers, handrail
and (2) horizontal/raking intermediate rails spaced at equal centers, complete
with fixing plates and anchors (mean length of balustrade measured.).
5.5.2 Supply, fabricate and install 900 mm single handrail, turned down at ends and
secured to base, complete with fixing plates and anchors and paint finish.
(Total length of handrail measured).
Page 71 of 221
5.5.3 Supply, fabricate and install standard 1100 mm high horizontal or raking
guardrail comprising vertical posts spaced at approximately 900 mm centers,
handrail and (7) horizontal/raking intermediate rails spaced at 100 mm
centers, complete with fixing plates and anchors (mean length of guardrail
measured).
5.5.4 The fabrication of galvanized steel pipe or stainless steel guardrails and
handrails up to 50 mm diameter will be inclusive but not limited to cutting,
drilling, bolt installation and other associated works. Galvanized steel pipe
shall be primed as per APCS 26T. Any primer paint removed (abrasions)
from the metal surface during handling, erection, welding or bolting shall be
touched up in the field using approved primer touch-up paint. Steel pipe shall
be galvanized type E, ASTM-A53, Schedule 40. Stainless steel tubing shall
be Type 304, ASTM A554, No 4 polished finish with a minimum 1.65 mm wall
thickness. Fabrication and installation shall comply with ASTM E985 for
related terms and structural computations and ASTM E894 and E935 for
structural performance.
5.6 GRATING
5.6.1 Install steel or aluminum grating to prepared concrete drainage system

plumb, taut and level. Spot weld steel grating to steel nosing.
5.6.2 Steel Grating: Carbon Steel per ASTM C36, hot dipped galvanized to ASTM
A385 or 386, 6mm () square twisted cross bar; as per requirements of
12-SAMSS-7. (Ref. SAMS #12-938-329).
5.7 WELDING
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which include, but not be limited to, all
applicable procedures and shall comply with the specifications and standards listed
in the following SAUDI ARAMCO Manuals:
References:
1. Basic Welding, AS W 001
2. Welding of Pressure Vessels, AS W 010
3. Welding of On-Plot Piping, AS W 011
4. Welding of Pipelines, AS W 012
The WORK shall include but not be limited to the following:
Carry out WORK by means of oral instructions, drawings or sketches.
Perform pipe welding and structural welding on a wide range of non-alloy metals
using electric arc and oxy-acetylene techniques.
Fabricate and install steel support for wooden sunscreen post complete with
hardware.
6.0 WOOD AND PLASTICS
Page 72 of 221
The WORK to be performed required by this section includes but is not limited to the
installation, repair or re-fixing of timber frame WORK, metal stud framework, sunshades,
sunscreens, sundecks, floor joists, ceiling joists, roof rafters, fascia boards, verge boards,
furring, plywood sheathing, baseboards, moldings, shelves, hanging rails, vanity units,
kitchen cabinets, ventilations, WORK tops, counter tops, and material associated with the
major repair upgrade and renovation of facilities, buildings and accommodation units.
6.1 COUNTER/WORK TOP
6.1.1 Fabricate, install and furnish 13mm (1/2) or 19mm (3/4) thick Formica
finished plywood counter/WORK top with hardwood edging. Formica shall be
bonded to plywood top and edges using a SAUDI ARAMCO approved
contact adhesive. Counter top shall be fixed to base units using suitable
fixing chipboard or bracket screws which shall penetrate securely in position.
When counter tops adjoin other surfaces, they shall be caulked using a
suitable sealant. All caulking shall be carried out where necessary.
6.1.2 Install preformed 100mm (4) or 150mm (6) high x 13mm (1/2) or 19mm
(3/4) thick round edge formica finished plywood back splash with hard wood
edging.
6.1.3 Install 13mm (1/2) or 19mm (3/4) thick Solid Surface (non porous
homogeneous blend of polyester/acrylic alloys and fillers formed to look like
stone but cuts like wood) counter top with 100mm (4)or 150mm (6) high
backsplash and 200mm (8)down lipped fascia (apron). Install kitchen pre-
molded counter top.
6.1.4 Install 13mm (1/2) or 19mm (3/4) thick Solid Surface counter top with
integral bowl, 100mm (4) or 150mm (6) high backsplash and 200mm (8)
down lipped fascia (apron).
6.1.5 Solid Surface counter top, apron and backsplash shall be provided as a
whole construction without any seam or joint. Recommended manufacturers
shall be Corian or Avonite or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equivalent.
6.1.6 Counter top shall be installed complete with required steel framing supports
and wooden shim. Steel supports shall be primed with epoxy paint prior to
installation.
6.1.7 Counter tops shall be installed by bedding the unit on an approved master
sealant and inserting screws from the base unit into the counter top. Screws
shall penetrate the counter top one half the thickness of the counter top.
When counter top adjoins other surfaces, it shall be caulked using a suitable
polysulfide or latex sealant.
6.1.8 All materials shall carry a 10-year warranty from the supplier/manufacturer
and this shall be submitted in writing to SAUDI ARAMCO on completion and
acceptance of the works. CONTRACTOR shall warrant by his acceptance of
the contract that all WORK installed shall be free from defects in
workmanship and erection. If during the period of ten years, or as otherwise
specified ,from the date of final acceptance and approval defects in
workmanship or performance appear, CONTRACTOR shall without cost to
SAUDI ARAMCO, remedy such defects within a reasonable time frame
Page 73 of 221
specified in writing by the SAUDI ARAMCO project Engineer. In default

SAUDI ARAMCO may have such WORK done at the cost of CONTRACTOR.
6.2 CEILING FRAMING
6.2.1 Structural timber used for ceiling joists shall be restricted to those species
and grades specified in the SAUDI ARAMCO Materials System catalog.
6.2.2 Cut and install timbers to form ceiling joists inclusive of bridging.
6.2.3 Support ends of each timber with not less than 37 mm bearing on wood,
metal or 75 mm on masonry. Attach to wood members by toe nailing or metal
connectors (joist-hangers).
6.2.4 Fire cut members built into masonry when ceiling joists and roof joists are
one and the same, the fire cut connection at masonry wall shall include a joist
anchor. Frame openings with headers or trimmers supported by metal joist
hangers. Do not notch joists. Do not bore holes larger than 12 mm the depth
of the joist or locate closer than 50 mm from the top or the bottom. Install
solid blocking 50 mm thick by the depth of joist, at ends of joist unless nailed
to a header or band member.
6.2.5 Install wood cross bridging not less than 50 mm x 75 mm nominal, metal
cross bridging of equal strength, or solid blocking between joists where the
span exceeds eight 1.3 meters. The distance between a line of bridging and a
bearing shall not exceed 1.3 meters.
6.2.6 Cross bridging may be omitted for ceiling joists 200 mm nominal depth,
unless otherwise indicated or permitted by U.B.C. Codes. Use no less than
two (2) joists spiked together to support partitions running parallel to the
joists.
6.3 FLOOR FRAMING
6.3.1 Structural timber used for floor joists shall be restricted to those species and
grades specified in the SAUDI ARAMCO Materials System catalog.
6.3.2 Cut and install floor joists inclusive of foundation plates or sills. Foundation
plates or sills shall be bolted down to the perimeter and sleeper wall. Floor
joists shall have not less than 37 mm bearing on wood or metal not less than
75 mm on masonry. Floor joists shall be supported laterally at the ends and at
each support by solid blocking, except where the ends of joists are fixed to a
header, or alternating band or rim joist to an adjoining stud. Solid blocking
shall not be less than 50 mm in thickness and the full depth of the joist.
6.3.3 Notches on the ends of joists shall not exceed one fourth of the joist depth.
Holes bored in joists shall not be within 50 mm of the top or the bottom of the
joist, and the diameter of any such hole shall not exceed one third of the
depth of the joist. Notches in the top of the joist shall not exceed one sixth of
joist size in depth and shall not be located in the middle third of the span.
Page 74 of 221
6.3.4 Joists framing from opposite sides of a beam girder or partition shall be
lapped at least 100 mm or the opposing joists shall be tied together. Joist
framing into the side of a wood girder shall be supported by framing anchors
or on ledger strips, min. 50 mm x 50 mm.
6.3.5 Bearing partitions perpendicular to joists shall be offset from supporting

girders, walls or partitions more than the joist depth. Joists under the parallel
to bearing partition shall be doubled.
6.3.6 When the nominal depth to thickness ratio exceeds six to one bridging shall
be installed at 1.3, meters intervals. Bridging shall not be less than 25 mm x
75 mm and shall be toe nailed with 2 x 10 diameter nails at each end.
6.3.7 Joist size will vary from a minimum of 50 mm x 100 mm to a maximum of 50

mm x 300 mm. Centers will vary form a minimum of 300 mm o.c. to a
maximum of 600 mm o.c. All joist nailing shall be in accordance with Table
No. 25- Q U.B.C.
6.4 ROOF FRAMING
6.4.1 Structural timber used for rafters shall be restricted to those species and
6.4.2 Set out and install rafters, ridge board, hip rafters, and valley ridge and valley
boards. Allowable spans shall be in accordance with Tables No. 25-U-R-1
through 25-U-R-14 U.B.C. where applicable.
6.4.3 Rafters shall be framed directly opposite each other at the ridge. The ridge
board shall be at least 25 mm nominal thickness at all ridges and not less in
depth than the cut end length of the rafter. At all valleys and hips there shall
be a single valley or hip rafter not less than 50 mm nominal thickness and not
less than the depth of the cut end of the rafter. Rafter shall be nailed to
adjacent ceiling joists to form a continuous tie between exterior walls when
such joists are all parallel to the rafters. Where not parallel, rafters shall be
tied to 25 mm x 100 mm (nominal) minimum size crosses ties. Rafter ties
shall be spaced not more than 100 mm o.c. Roof rafters shall be supported
laterally to prevent rotation and lateral displacement. All nailing shall be in
accordance with Table No. 25-Q U.B.C.
6.5 SOFFIT FRAMING
6.5.1 Cut, fit and install timbers to form soffit framing.
6.5.2 Take a horizontal line from rafter ends to wall siding to be used as a datum
line. Strike a level line along the perimeter wall. Fix timber to wall siding using
appropriate nails or anchor bolts, if fixed to masonry. Where fixing through
siding
into timber studs, soffit wall plate shall be fixed at no more than 400 mm o.c.
double nailed to each stud. Anchor bolts shall be spaced no more than 600
mm o.c.
Page 75 of 221
6.5.3 Install horizontal bridging between soffit wall plate and rafter ends. Rafter
ends shall be plumb cut or to the same slope line as the rafter ends. Bridging
shall be spike nailed to wall plate and rafter ends. Bridging shall be installed
at 400 mm o.c. Nails shall be in accordance with Table No. 25-Q U.B.C.
6.6 SOFFIT AND SOFFIT VENT
6.6.1 To the underside of roof rafters, jack rafters, eaves and soffit framing, cut,
scribe and fit 6 mm thick plywood sheathing or CAB board.
6.6.2 Plywood shall be cut neat and true to lines and fixed to rafters or soffit
framing with nails. Nails shall be non-corrosive deformed shank type, in
accordance with Table No. 25-Q U.B.C.
6.6.3 Frame out soffit, mark out and cut continuous slot line 100 mm wide, and fit
37 mm oversize stainless steel cloth wire mesh.
6.6.4 Frame out soffit and install 300mm x 600mm extruded aluminum soffit vent,
anodized finish or powder coated finish.
6.6.5 Install vents plumb and level.
6.6.6 Plywood shall be Grade C and D exterior type (CDX); veneer smooth sanded
surface finish; Hardwood; Group 1; Kiln Dried; Grade stamped.
Or
Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Exposure I, 19/32 thick.
Or
Plain Board: glass fiber cloth reinforced board; fire resistant and moisture
tolerant; ASK Speedwall or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
Or
6mm cement fiber board with natural stone finish, Cemstone or SAUDI
ARAMCO approved equal.
6.6.7 Vents shall be extruded aluminum alloy, 6063-T6, anodized finish or powder
coated or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
Or
Standard aluminum or stainless steel insect screen.
6.7 FASCIA OR VERGE BOARDS
6.7.1 To the ends of rafters or joists, cut and fit fascia/CAB or verge boards.
Ensure all joist ends are cut true to line, cut and adjust where required to
obtain vertical or slope-angle, cut as required. Check joist end alignment with
a string line; ensure line is parallel to building line.
6.7.2 Level fascia and fix to joist ends using appropriate nails, nail heads shall be
punched to below the face of the soffit board and filled with wood filler.
6.7.3 Fascia board shall be exterior type (CDX) plywood; veneer smooth
sanded surface finish; Hardwood; Group 1; Kiln Dried; Grade stamped or
CAB board.
Page 76 of 221
Or
Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Exposure I, 19/32 thick.
Or
Plain Board: glass fiber cloth reinforced board; fire resistant and moisture
tolerant; ASK Speedwall or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
6.8 STUD WALL FRAMING
6.8.1 Structural timber used for stud framing shall be restricted to those species
and grades specified in the SAUDI ARAMCO Materials System catalog.
6.8.2 Cut and install timber stud framing 50 mm x 100 mm through 50 mm x 200
mm inclusive of normal openings, sole plates, header plates, bracing and fire
stops.
6.8.3 Replace damage stud framing.
6.8.4 CONTRACTOR shall inspect the WORK and layout of wall studs and framing
noting all dimensions. Prior to the starting installation WORK, so as to reduce
and avoid material wastage, check that timber studs are not damaged and
free from termites and spaced at the correct centers to receive new siding
material, where discrepancies are found additional timber studs shall be
installed.. Check all timber studs for straightness and alignments adjust
where required.
6.8.5 Constructed floor anchors shall be 12 mm diameter at maximum of 1.3

meters o.c. Where nailed use 10 diameter. nails at maximum of 600 mm o.c.
shall be double toe nailed. Install vertical studs fixed to sole plate, toe nailed
with 8 diameter or 10 diameter nails according to timber size. A minimum of
three studs shall be used to form all corners. Double headers shall be used
over all normal openings. All top plates shall be double. Install temporary
bracing during construction to hold timber studs in alignment. Ensure all studs
are true to line and plumb.
6.8.6 Constructed concrete foundation floor anchor bolt any size, galvanized
coated compete with minimum of 1 maximum of 2 bolts per anchor bolt.
6.9 BATTENS/FURRING TO DRYWALLS AND MASONRY WALLS
6.9.1 Structural timber used for rafters shall be restricted to those species and
6.9.2 Install furring to drywalls/masonry concrete walls to achieve a plumb and

aligned base for fixing sheet materials.
6.9.3 Furring shall be packed out level and fixed to walls using appropriate plugs
and screws.
6.9.4 Main runners shall be installed at floor level and ceiling level. Horizontal
bridging shall be provided/ installed as required.
Page 77 of 221
6.10 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR WALL SHEATHING AND DECKING/SUB FLOORING
6.10.1 Install plywood sheathing to timber or metal studs or framing, interior or

exterior application.
6.10.2 Check studwork prior to installation of plywood for any defective members.
Report defects to SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer prior to starting
installation, ensure that all studs are aligned and plumb, adjust if required.
6.10.3 For exterior application install vapor barrier TYVEK type or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
6.10.4 Starting at an inside or outside corner establishes a datum point and set a
string line. Drive in nails as a guide along the base line. Cut and install
plywood sheets using appropriate fixings for the stud material existing; i.e.
nails for timber studs and self taping screws for metal studs application.
Plywood sheets shall be neatly cut around openings, sheets should abut
each other, unless a gap is required to be left.
6.10.5 Plywood will vary in thickness from a minimum of 6 mm to a maximum of 19

mm unless otherwise specified. Plywood shall be internal or external quality.
Fix plywood decking by 8d nail @ 6 O.C. or by screw @ 8 O.C.
6.10.6 Install plywood decking of any thickness to floor joist (metal or timber) or as
directed by SAUDI ARAMCO.
6.10.7 Plywood shall be exterior type (CDX); veneer smooth sanded surface finish;
Hardwood; Group 1; Kiln Dried; Grade stamped.
Or
Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Exposure I, 15mm (19/32) thick.
Or
Plain Fiber Cement Board, 8mm or 9mm thick by Cembrit or SAUDI
6.10.8 Check and repair bulging sub-flooring (replace with similar material).
6.11 BASEBOARDS
6.11.1 Install Timber or vinyl base board.
6.11.2 Scribe, cut and fit base board to drywalls and walls constructed from masonry
units.
6.11.3 Wooden base boards shall be fixed with suitable nails and driven into timber
grounds (plugs). Nail heads shall be punched and driven to below the surface
of the base board 3 mm and filled with suitable filler, sanded down and left
ready to receive paint finish.
6.11.4 Vinyl based board shall be fixed using a suitable contact adhesive. Care
should be taken to avoid the spread of adhesive onto the finished face of
Page 78 of 221
baseboard. Excess adhesive shall be removed with a suitable solvent

cleaner. Install baseboard complete with internal and external accessories.
Minimize joints or seams during installation. Vinyl baseboard shall be
installed complete with internal and external corner accessories.
6.11.5 Wooden baseboard shall be ponderosa pine, 13mm thick x 89mm or 100mm
or 150mm high.
6.11.6 Vinyl baseboard shall be as manufactured by IPC/INPRO; 100 (4) or 150mm

(6) high x 2mm (0.080) thick x 36M (120) roll.
6.12 MOLDINGS
6.12.1 Scribe, cut and fit various size and shape timber or PVC moldings around
windows, doors, ceiling coves, kitchen/bathroom units, exterior corners and
etc. to suit all types of building trades activities.
6.12.2 Moldings shall be scribe fitted to inside corners and mitered at outside
corners, fixed with the appropriate size finishing nail. Nail heads shall be
driven to below the finish face of molding. Nail holes shall be filled with
suitable filler, sanded down and left ready for painting.
6.13 KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CABINETS
The WORK shall include installation of kitchen and bathroom cabinets, including
replacement of damage door, drawer, shelves and hardware.
6.13.1 Install kitchen cabinet base units complete with filler pieces, etc. and wall
mounted cabinets. Ensure all WORK which will be affected by installation of
kitchen cabinets is completed. Liaise with other trades.
6.13.2 Carefully set out and erect the base and wall units. Lay out base units in
accordance with the drawings and bolt base units to bridging members of
stud walls. Bolt each base unit to each other for rigidity. Shim base units
where required to maintain level tops. Check all doors and drawers for easy
smooth operation, adjust where required.
6.13.3 Install wall hung kitchen cabinets in accordance with the individual project
drawings. Bolt wall units to bridging members in stud walls. Ensure the wall
units follow a level line. Adjust all doors for easy smooth operation.
Thoroughly clean all units and tops when installation is completed.
6.13.4 Install vanity units when other associated WORK is completed, liaise with
other trades. Vanity unit shall be set and leveled and bolted to bridging
members in stud walls or plugged and screwed into masonry walls. Sizes
may vary by plus or minus 25 mm. All measurements are to be site checked
prior to manufacturing base units. Base unit side adjoining walls shall be
caulked with a suitable sealant. Top shall be securely fastened down to vanity
top allowing no strain on plumbing pipe WORK.
Page 79 of 221
6.13.5 Install cabinet door complete with necessary hinges, door pull and barrel bolt
as required.
6.13.6 Kitchen Base/Wall Units and Vanity
6.13.6.1 Gables: 18 mm one (1) white melamine blockboard with Ash

veneer lipping on front edges.
6.13.6.2 Top & Bottom: 18 mm two (2) Face white melamine blockboard
with Ash veneer lipping on front edges.
6.13.6.3 Shelves: 18 mm two (2) Face white melamine blockboard with

white PVC lipping on front edge.
6.13.6.4 Backboard: 3.6 mm white melamine plywood.
6.13.6.5 Back Nailers: 18 x 88 mm section white melamine blockboard.
6.13.6.6 Rear Top Horizontal Rail: 18 x 88 mm section white melamine

blockboard with Ash veneer lipping on front edge.
6.13.6.7 Front Top Horizontal Rail: 18 x 88 mm section white melamine

blockboard with Ash veneer lipping on front edges.
6.13.6.8 Mid Horizontal Vertical Rail: 20 x 56 mm section solid Ash wood.
6.13.6.9 Doors; Raised Panel Type: 20 x 60 mm section stiles and rails

with 20 mm. thick raised panel in solid Ash wood.
6.13.6.10 Drawer Bottom/Drawer Rear: 18 mm one (1) Face white melamine

blockboard with white PVC lipping on exposed edge.
6.13.6.11 Drawer Face; 20 mm thick solid Ash wood top drawer face with
decorative groove on front face. Middle and bottom drawer face to
follow design of doors.
6.13.6.12 Accessories:
A. Legs: 100 mm high black plastic adjustable legs for

Kitchen Cabinets
B. Plinth: 100 mm high black PVC lipping plinth complete with

corner caps, end caps and joint caps attached to legs with
plastic clips for Kitchen Cabinets.
C. Hinges : 1800 Brass (European Type)
D. Shelf Support: 5 mm Metal type satin finish.
E. Drawer Slider/Sides; White epoxy coated metal slides with

built-in top mounted nylon rollers.
Page 80 of 221
6.13.6.13 Wooden cabinet or kitchen cabinet plain or with dcor
A. Including wooden drawers

B. Including all accessories like hinges, rollers, guides
and knobs.
C. Varnish or Enemel paint
6.14 SUNSCREENS, SUNSHADES AND SUNDECKS
6.14.1 Carry out repairs to window type sunshade and replace defective timber
members. New timbers shall be prime coated; remaining timbers shall be
prepared ready for painting. Window type sunshades are located at ground
and first floor levels and are constructed from various timber sections.
6.14.2 Construct sunshade or sunscreen as indicated by SAUDI ARAMCO. Timber
shall be fixed using appropriate nails, fixtures, bolts, plates, etc. Timber shall
be primed and painted.
6.14.3 Fabricate, cut and fix defective sunshade timbers as instructed by SAUDI
ARAMCO. Timbers shall be fixed using appropriate bolts, nails or screws.
New timbers shall be prime coated and painted.
6.14.4 Fabricate, cut and fix defective sunshade or patio sunscreen timbers as
instructed by SAUDI ARAMCO. Timber shall be fixed using appropriate nail,
fixtures, bolts, plates, etc. New timbers shall be primed and painted.
6.14.5 Prepare sundeck for re-fixing when other works are completed. Re-install
sundeck timber complete with all previously removed accessories. Caulk
where timbers abut walls. Joists shall be installed using suitable joist
hangers, no spike nailing will be allowed. Prepare sundeck timbers for
repainting.
6.14.6 Where upper sundecks are overlaid with plywood and tiled, these items may
be removed and are included in other sections of this Schedule "B". To be
included is the removal of the sundeck floor drain, set aside until decking is
being replaced, at a time requested by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer. Replace and re-level the floor drain outlet, as required to suit
decking level.
6.14.7 Where required and instructed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer,
renew and install all upper sundeck timbers. Install new wall plates, set out
new joist hangers and install new joists.
6.14.8 Replace/install wooden window sunscreen (lattice type).
6.14.9 All materials to be used shall be Redwood, S4S, clear grade, kiln dried, and
construction type.
6.15 PLASTIC WOOD
CONTRACTOR shall supply Plastic Wood and associated fixings in accordance with
the following specification:
6.15.1 PLASTIC WOOD PRODUCT
Page 81 of 221
6.15.1.1 COMPOSTION: High density polyethylene resin recycled from

consumer wastes. Decontaminated to remove all food residues,
adhesive and paper labels to produce a purity level of 99.98%
polyethylene resin. 100% Recycled Plastic in rigid lengths with
consistent solid section and coloring throughout.
COLOR: Shall be as selected by SAUDI ARAMCO.
6.15.1.2 TEMPERATURE: Shall perform as designed for temperatures

ranging from 25F to 125F with a melting point of approximately
267F. Must not expand or contract in excess of " in length on an 8
foot section using a 50% temperature change. Must have low heat
absorption properties.
6.15.1.3 FIRE RETARDATION: Shall burn when exposed to open flame but
will have tendency to self extinguish when the flame is removed.
Will not emit toxic fumes when burning and must show fire rating as
per ASTM 138.
6.15.1.4 DURABILITY: Shall not absorb any moisture. Must be impervious to

oil, solvents, and other chemicals, must be of sufficient density to be
immune to damage caused by insects, including termites and will
not rot, crack split or splinter. Color stability over a five-year period
with natural weathering to be 0.009 points of total reflectance (Scale
0-100). Life expectancy shall be greater than conventional materials
used in residential and commercial buildings. Shall be protected
against damage and color fading when exposed to ultra violet light.
UV protection shall be homogeneous throughout, not a surface
application.
6.15.1.5 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS/SUPPLIERS: Products meeting SAUDI

ARAMCO specification are listed for reference. Proposed
alternative products shall be submitted with all data required to
demonstrate compliance to specified requirements.
DURA TECH PRODUCTS - EARTHCARE MIDWEST, USA

Supplied By: Al-Nassar Trading & Contracting Establishment, Al-
Khobar
CYCLEWOOD, CYCLE MASTER INC., USA

Supplied By: Ahmad Al-Humoud & Sons Co., Al- Khobar.
6.15.1.6 SUBMITTALS: Submit copies of manufacturers specifications and

test results i.e., bending, compression, tension, mechanical
fasteners and pull-out tests of screws and nails for SAUDI ARAMCO
approval.
6.15.1.7 SAMPLES: Submit color and section samples for SAUDI ARAMCO
approval.
Page 82 of 221
6.15.1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Plastic Wood products shall be supplied

from a single source of manufacture.
6.15.2 ERECTION OF HANDRAILS
6.15.2.1 Erect Plastic Wood handrails including but not limited to erection of
10.16 cm x 10.16 cm (4 inch x 4 inch) posts, 10.16 cm x 5.08 cm (4
inch x 2 inch) (nominal) bottom rail with 10.16 cm 5.08 (4 inch x 2
inch) (nominal) wood blocks, 10.16 cm x 5.08 (4 inch x 2 inch)
(nominal) top rail and 10.16 cm x 5.08 (4 inch x 2 inch) (nominal)
open spaced balusters at 100mm centers, complete with handrail
comprising 10.16 cm x 2.54 cm (6 inch x 1 inch) (nominal) plate
and 5.08 cm (2 inch) (nominal) diameter hand grip with countersunk
screw fixings to plate and top rail plugged over with matching
material, complete with all associated works.
6.15.2.2 Secure posts to concrete with two (2) countersunk galvanized

machine bolt fixings, where required.
6.15.2.3 Secure fence posts to block WORK with two (2) countersunk
galvanized anchor lag screw fixings with expansion shields, where
required.
6.15.2.4 Horizontal handrails shall be 1067 mm high with 1517 mm long
posts spaced at 1500 mm (maximum) centers.
6.15.2.5 Raking handrails shall be 914 mm high with 1250 mm long posts
spaced at 1250 mm (maximum) centers and 1517 mm long bottom
post set into concrete footing. Fix 6 mm dia. x 76 mm long lag
screw to each face of post set into concrete footing.


pour.
6.15.3 Plastic Wood Sections:
6.15.3.1 Install new Plastic Wood sections or repair/replace existing sections

with Plastic Wood in various structures including but not limited to
fences, gates, handrails and sunshades etc. Secure sections with
corrosion resistant fixings.
6.16 FIBERGLASS GRATING
6.16.1 Install fiberglass grating to prepared concrete drainage system plumb, taut
and level.
6.16.2 Grating shall be polyester resin; yellow; solid compression molded; one
piece; fire retardant and chemical resistant; minimum section modulus 0.04
Page 83 of 221
cubic centimeter per meter width; allowable safe uniform load (factor of safety
12) 76.6 KPA at 25mm deflection.
6.17 MISCELLANEOUS
6.17.1 Replace/install kitchen/vanity cabinet door any size to match

existing kitchen / vanity cabinet finishing complete with necessary
hardware.
6.17.2 Replace/install drawer of kitchen cabinet.
6.17.3 Replace/install kitchen/vanity cabinet door hinges, drawer roller

and guide.
6.17.4 Replace closet/storage wooden hanger rod including brackets.
6.17.5 Install / replace pocket door steel hangers, tracks, rollers

complete with necessary fittings.
6.17.6 Install / replace canvass hypalon cover for houses with ATRIUM
complete with necessary adhesives and required sealants.
6.17.7 Install/ replace worn out house plate number using flexible plastic
maroon color plate with reflector number sticker in English and Arabic.
6.17.8 Replace damaged wooden kitchen and vanity cabinet bottom

section with the same material to match existing cabinets.
6.17.9 Replace damaged expansion joint filler in between exterior wall

and walkway around the house. Apply self- leveling joint sealant. (Refer to
Section 3.0 for Specifications of filler and sealant).
6.17.10 Replace damaged formica cover for closet and shelves.
6.17.11 Fabricate and install wooden stand for water heater.
6.17.12 Fabricate and install valve box complete with hinged door, barrel
bolt for separation control valve of RW and SW lines.
6.17.13 Repair / replace defective wooden privacy fence around the house
prior to painting.
6.17.14 Remove and replace rusty mirror clip / holder.
6.17.15 Prepare and install vanity top, any size.
6.17.16 Fabricate and install 25mm thick plywood enclosure for water
heater using on 50mm x 50mm wood framing inclusive of fixing
accessories.
Page 84 of 221
6.17.17 Fabricate and install Cemstone enclosure for water heater using
on 50mm x 50mm wood framing inclusive of fixing accessories.
6.17.18 Install fiberglass enclosure for water heater.
6.17.19 Install dryer vent fixture and flexible pipe for access to timber
studs. Install and connect pipe, caulk with approved sealant. Dryer vents
are installed in both internal and external walls.
6.17.20 Disconnect and remove louvered roof space air vent, either
wooden, metal, aluminum or plastic. Set aside and store for future re-
installation.
6.17.21 Re-install wooden louver air vent complete with new stainless steel insect
screen mesh. Sand down and make ready for painting. Caulk with
approved sealant where required. Size varies.
6.17.22 Install curtain tracks and accessories.
6.17.23 Replace utility box for bath tub.
6.17.24 Replace/install plywood shelves with hardwood edging, plain or formica

laminated, (any size).
6.17.25 Stair Nosing
a. Install/replace stair nosing with high quality rubber

b. Install/replace stair nosing with aluminum
c. Install/replace stair nosing with ceramic
6.17.26 Cork Board
a. Install/replace cork board with aluminum

frame
b. Install/replace cork board with wooden frame
6.17.27 Guard Rail
a. Install/replace guard rail with aluminum frame

b. Install/replace guard rail with wooden frame
6.17.28 Door Closer
a. Install/replace mechanical door closer.

b. Install/replace automatic mechanical door closer.
c. Install/replace automatic door closer.
6.17.29 Install/replace weather proof junction box (stainless, galvanized and powder
coated) complete with locks, frames and other supports needed.
Page 85 of 221
6.17.30 Laminate wood flooring (PARQUET), Item " Cosy 731 /"Loft 832"/"Laminart
832" , Cosy 731-size 1292x194 x 7 mm / Loft 832-Size 1292 x 331 x 8
mm /Laminart 832-1292x 194 x 8 mm/ Woodstock 832-1292x194x8mm
manufactured by Tarkett Commercial Sweden or approved equal
Specification: WOODEN PARQUET,CLIP 400 H09 ; Mfg Part Num:

LAMINART 832/WOODSTOCK 832/COSY 731/LOFT 832 ; Sup Part Num:
Color 8213297/ 8273357/ 8293344/ 8302345/ 8153214/ 8153216/ 8153215/
8153220/ 8342240/ 8328310 ; Saudi Aramco MM: 6000000553 or approved
equal
6.17.31 Supply of "Sound Blok form underlay, size 1.20 mx 16.7 , manufactred by
Tarkett Commercial Sweden
UNDERLAY, TYPE: POLYURETHANE ; Mfg Part Num: 7772 ; Sup Part

Num: 1016 ; Saudi A ramco MM: 6000000553 or approved equal
6.17.32 SKIRTING ; Mfg Part Num: 8015 ; Sup Part Num: 8015 ; Saudi Aramco
MM: 6000000553 or approved equal
6.17.33 STAIRNOSE PROFILES ; Mfg Part Num: SP113X55 ; Sup Part Num:
SP113X55 ; Saudi Aramco MM: 6000000553 or approved equal
6.17.34 T -profille, size 11.5 x 44 x 2000 mm; PROFILE ; Mfg Part Num: 8004 ; Sup
Part Num: 8004 ; Saudi Aramco MM: 6000000553
7.0 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
7.1 WALL/CEILING/FLOOR/ROOF INSULATION
7.1.1 Install new blanket type fiberglass insulation between stud walls or
ceilings/floors framing.
7.1.2 Replace damage blanket type fiberglass insulations.
7.1.3 Install ceiling insulations with wire mesh support as required.
7.1.4 Cut and install insulation between timber or metal as required. In outside wall
applications the foil backed face shall be installed facing the outside.
Between floor or ceiling joists the foil backed face shall be installed with the
foil backed face facing the upper level. Between ceiling joists, install 25 mm x
50 mm bridging to hold insulation in place prior to the installation of ceiling
lining.
7.1.5 Thermal Wall Insulations: Shall be fiberglass blanket insulation with integral
foil vapor barrier one side, as manufactured by Arabian Fiberglass Insulation
Co., or approved equal, comply with ASTM C665 and ASTM E84, R136.
Thermal Insulation shall have a minimum R-value of 11 hr-Ft-Deg. F/BTU
(Thermal resistant). Insulation material shall not contain asbestos fibers.
Page 86 of 221
7.1.6 Thermal and Sound Wall Insulation: Thermal Insulation shall be foil faced and
to comply with 7.1.5 above in addition to the sound absorption properties to
meet the STC (Sound Transmission Coefficient) rating between 50 and 54.
Insulation material shall not contain asbestos fibers.
7.1.7 Thermal Ceiling Insulation: Shall be fiberglass blanket insulation with integral
foil vapor barrier one side, as manufactured by Arabian Fiberglass Insulation
Co., or approved equal, comply with ASTM C665 and ASTM E84, R136.
Thermal Insulation shall have a minimum R-valve of 19 hr-Ft-Deg. F/BTU.
Insulation material shall not contain asbestos fibers.
7.1.8 Thermal and Sound Ceiling Insulation: Thermal Insulation shall be foil faced
and to comply with 7.1.7 above in addition to the sound absorption properties
to meet the STC rating from 50 to 54.
7.1.9 Sound Attenuation Blankets: Shall be 150 (6) thick enfaced mineral wool
blanket insulation produced by combination of fibers manufactured from glass
or slag with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type I
(blanket without membrane facing at internal walls only). Insulation material
shall not contain asbestos fibers.
7.1.10 Roofing Insulation: Shall be rigid polyisocyanurate (P.I.R.) thermal insulation

straight edge boards with asphalt felt facings on both sides with a nominal
overall density of 35 kg/m3 by SAPTEX or approved equal.
7.1.11 50mm thick x 610mm width x 1219 mm long EPS (maximum), reinforcing
glass fiber mesh including back wrapping, adhesive, mechanical fastening
system, basecoat and final coat. CPM
7.2 FIRE BARRIER
7.2.1 Install fire barriers between Dwelling Units to provide an air tight separation.
7.2.2 Fire Barrier shall be Rockwool fiber mat or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equal; 50mm and 60mm thick; 120 Kg/m3 density; reinforced with galvanized
steel 25mm hexagonal mesh and stitched with galvanized soft steel wire.
7.2.3 The Rockwool mat shall be used to caulk all small spaces around the fire
barrier, the CONTRACTOR shall additionally use as necessary an approved
intermescent fire putty to preserve the air tight seal.
7.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING
The WORK shall include but not be limited to preparing and performing all applicable
activities necessary during the installation or repair of pitched shingle roofs.
7.3.1 EXECUTION
Proceed with asphalt shingle WORK only after the substrate construction and
framing of openings has been completed or repaired, and wood blocking,
Page 87 of 221
nailers, curbs, vents piping drains and other projections through the roof have
either been installed or repaired. Proceed with the installation only when the
existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit WORK to be
performed. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all adequate precautions are
taken to cover roofs with sheets, protecting WORK from rain and wind.
7.3.2 INSTALLATION
Asphalt shingles shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer.

Instructions, using only compatible accessories as recommended and
specified by the manufacturer. Install one ply underlayment, securely
fastened to the roofing deck substrate with all joints lapped in the direction of
the roof slope. Underlayment shall be extended under all flashings.
Recommended fixings are 4 - 6 per shingle. Install roofing accessory shingles

of like color for hips and ridges maintaining correct laps. Fasteners shall be
aluminum, sharp-pointed, conventional barbed shank roofing nails, 11 gauge
with 9 mm diameter heads, 31 mm long or staples and shall be fixed with
pneumatic hand tools.
7.3.3 MATERIAL
7.3.3.1 Underlayment shall be non-perforated 7 15 kgs asphalt saturated

felt. Shingles will be U.L. Class "A" conforming to ASTM-D-3018-82.
7.3.3.2 Shingles: 3 Tab, Asphalt Impregnated fiberglass per ASTM D3018

Type 1, 300mm (12) x 900mm (36), mist white or white, Class A
fire resistant. Similar to SAMS 09-435-768.
7.3.4 WATER TEST
7.3.4.1 Upon completion of repair / renewal CONTRACTOR shall request in

writing to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer to arrange for
water test. All tests shall be witnessed by SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer and the SAUDI ARAMCO Inspection Department
Representative. CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the roofing
WORK is completely watertight by the use of hose pipes. Water test
shall be in accordance to SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety
Manual.
7.4 FIBER CEMENT CORRUGATED ROOFING TILES
7.4.1 Installation/Repair
Fiber Cement Corrugated Roofing tiles shall be installed/repaired on existing

or new pitched roofs. The installation of Fiber Cement Corrugated Roofing
Tiles shall only proceed after the inspection of the existing or new roof deck
and associated battens is completed and approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Project Engineer. Install Fiber Cement Corrugated Roofing Tiles in a
workmanlike manner. Tiles at eaves shall project 60 mm and be fixed over
corrugated rigid plastic eaves ventilating closure pieces. Tiles shall be
Page 88 of 221
spaced and lapped in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

Laps shall be sealed with self-adhesive PVC foam strips or approved mastic
sealant. The sealing material shall be positioned between the screws and the
bottom of the covering tile and the down slope between the mitered corners
of the tile. The complete installation shall be executed in accordance with the
roofing tile manufacturers written instructions and specifications.
Fiber Cement Corrugated Roofing Tiles shall be fixed through battens to the
roofing deck using 110 mm x 6.2 mm hot-galvanized lag screws; lag screws
shall not be over tightened. Tiles, which overlap flashings, shall be
fixed so as to avoid puncturing the flashing. Lag screws shall have aluminum
tightening washer, bitumen felt sealing washer and color matched plastic
screw cap. Screw holes in tiles shall be drilled larger than fixing screw
thickness. Where tiles are cut and mitered a spacing of 4 mm to 5 mm shall
be made to allow for small movements of the tiles and for sealing material to
be installed.
Install 400 mm x 150 mm conic ridge and hip tiles with end caps, bedded in
cement mortar, as required. Ridge and hip tiles shall be overlapped 70 mm.
Ridge and hip tiles shall be fixed through the middle of the overlap into the
ridge or hip board using 40 mm x 4 mm stainless screws with sealing
washers and ridge/hip sealing band. Form valleys with impregnated foam
closure pieces, as required.
Install pre-formed roof vents, special pipe vent tiles, conic rake tiles at verges
and shed shape tiles at ridges, where required. Special tiles shall be fixed in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Install all flashings including, hip and valley flashings, as required.
Note:1. All timber roofing battens and ridge battens where required are
deemed to be included within the Work Unit Rates for roof tiling and
ridge tiles.
2. CONTRACTOR shall exercise all precautions and spread the point

load when walking on corrugated roofing tiles. No material shall be
staged on corrugated roofing tiles.
7.4.2 Testing
All new or repaired roofs shall be subjected to a running water test as

directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer in writing. Any leaks or
defects found at the time of the test shall be corrected by CONTRACTOR at
no cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
7.4.3 Materials
Material shall be 610 mm long x 1100 mm wide Cembonit B7 Fiber Cement

Roofing Tiles as manufactured by CEMBRIT or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equivalent. Tile color shall be as selected by SAUDI ARAMCO. Accessories
Page 89 of 221
such as vents, special tiles, plastic eaves pieces, PVC foam strips, sealants
and flashings shall be as manufactured by CEMBRIT or approved equal.
7.4.4 Methods of Measurement
Roofing shall be measured based on the area in contact with the base.
No deduction shall be made for voids not exceeding 0.50 M2.
Rates for roofing shall include for the following:
1. Galvanized screw fixings, tightening washers, sealing washers and

matching plastic caps.
2. Self-adhesive sealing strips.
3. Plastic ventilated eave start
7.5 ALUMINUM LIGHT STEEL SHEETING
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which shall include, but not be limited to,
preparing and performing all applicable activities necessary during the installation of
aluminum/light steel corrugated or preformed sheeting pre-finished paint coated.
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which shall include, but not limited to,
preparing and performing all applicable activities necessary during the installation of
single skin and/or sandwich metal panels on roofs and/or walls.
Check condition of existing steel structural members prior to starting installation of

aluminum. Defects shall be reported to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
Install any sheet metal framing channel or stud channel to receive wall cladding.
Aluminum panels shall be fixed to structural members using special fixings as

recommended by the manufacturer, sheet metal screws, "J" clamps and nuts
complete with sealing caps "U" shaped washers, neoprene seals and separation
strips between aluminum and steel surfaces. All panels shall be installed true to line
and overlapped at each panel section, horizontal and vertical. When metal zip
screws are to be used, installation will be performed using pneumatic drills and guns.
Dissimilar Material which is not compatible with the adjoining materials when
exposed to moisture must be separated by means of approved coatings, gaskets, or
other effective means. Aluminum alloy shall be considered compatible with zinc and
cadmium coated surfaces and the 300 and 400 AISI Series Stainless Steel Alloys
and do not require application of barrier material.
7.5.1 Roof Panels (Single Sheet Roof Panels)
(a) Roof panel shall be made of a minimum 0.7 mm (22 gages) thick
galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet. Roof panels for
buildings in coastal areas, or as otherwise specified in the design
Page 90 of 221
drawings, shall be made of a minimum 0.9 mm thickness aluminum

sheet.
(b) Roof panels shall be ribbed to provide adequate rigidity.
(c) Panels shall provide a net coverage width of 900 mm. (3 ft. nominal)
minimum. End lap shall be a minimum of 150 mm. (6 inches nominal).
(d) Panel joints shall interlock in such a way as to provide complete water-
lightness and an allowance for thermal expansion for a thermal
differential of 67 degrees C.
(e) Material for preprinted galvanized steel panels shall have a minimum
yield of 230 MPa (33 ksi) and conform to ASTM A446 galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A525 Type G90.
(f) Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet panels shall conform to ASTM

A792M Grade 345 MPa (50ksi) with a coating designation of AZ150.
(g) The roof panels shall be insulated to provide the maximum heat
transmission coefficient (U) as specified on the design drawings.
However, the maximum U coefficient shall not be greater than 0.45 W/
(m2.k) (0.08 BTU/ (hr.ft2.degrees F)) through the installed roof.
(h) Use of fiberglass insulation shall meet the following conditions: flexible;
resilient; odorless; shall not contribute to corrosion of steel or aluminum;
flame spread rating of 25 or less and shall comply with the provisions
section 707 of the Uniform Building code; facing shall cover the width of
the fiberglass blanket plus two flanges each 50 mm wide; vapor barrier
to be aluminum foil or equal placed on the outside. Interior exposed
insulation shall receive a quilted covering (preferably a fiberglass scrim)
on the interior surface to protect the insulation.
(i) Fasteners shall be provided to secure the roof panels against wind
uplift, mechanical movement, and to maintain water-tight panel joints.
Particular care should be taken to ensure compliance with
UBC Section 1620 item (2) and Table 16-H with regard to local wind
pressure effects.
7.5.2 Alternate Roof panels (Sandwich Roof Panels): Sandwich roof panels shall
comply with the following:
(a) Roof panels shall be self contained, factory assembled foam plastic
insulated units having a nominal covering width of not less than 900 mm
(3 ft nominal) unless approved otherwise by SAUDI ARAMCO.
(b) The exterior face sheet shall be made of minimum 0.7 mm (22 gages)
thick galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated sheet steel and shall be
formed architecturally to provide adequate rigidity. For buildings in
coastal areas, or as otherwise specified in the design drawings, the
Page 91 of 221
external face sheet shall be made of minimum 0.9 mm thickness

aluminum sheet.
(c) The interior face sheet shall be minimum 0.45 (26 gage) thick
galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated sheet steel and shall be
formed into a plane surface.
(d) Foam plastic insulation shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less.
The vendor is cautioned that the section 2602 of the Uniform Building
Code contains certain restrictive requirements for the use of foam
plastic insulation that must be complied with. Accordingly, building
design should in corporate appropriate details which will satisfy the
code requirements.
7.5.3 Wall Panels (Single sheet wall panels)
(a) Wall panels shall have nominal covering width not less than 900 mm (3
ft nominal) unless approved otherwise by SAUDI ARAMCO.
(b) The panel shall be made of a minimum 0.7 mm (22 gages) thick
galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, or aluminum as
applicable, formed architecturally consistent with the ribbing of 7.4.4 the
roof.
(c) Wall panels for buildings in coastal areas, or as specified in the design
drawings, shall be minimum 0.9 mm thickness aluminum and shall be
ribbed to provide adequate rigidity.
(d) The panels shall be in one length up to a maximum or 9 m (30 ft

nominal) from base to building eave. Wall panel length for above and
below windows shall be as indicated on the drawings. Wall panels
shall extend not less than 38 mm below the column base plate, and sit
in a recess in the concrete foundation to close off the lower end of the
panels. The panels shall be self-draining to the exterior.
(e) Galvanized sill angles shall be provided to secure wall panels at floor
level.
(f) Wall panels shall be insulated to provide the maximum heat

transmission coefficient (U) as specified in the design drawings.
However, the maximum U coefficient shall be as follows:
(G) The exterior walls of areas indicated as non-air conditioned are to have
a U coefficient not greater than 1/19 W/(m2.K) {0.21 BTU/(hr. ft 2.deg
F)
(H) The exterior walls of air conditioned rooms are to have a U coefficient
not greater than 0.568 W/ (m2.K {0.10 BTU/ (hr. ft2 degrees F)}.
(I) Interior exposed insulation shall receive a quilted covering (preferably a

fiberglass scrim) on the interior surface to protect the insulation.
Page 92 of 221
7.5.4 Alternate Wall Panels (Sandwich Wall Panels): Sandwich wall panels shall
comply with the following:
(A) Wall panels shall be self contained, factory assembled foam plastic
insulated units, having a nominal covering width not less than 900 mm
(3 ft nominal) unless approved otherwise by SAUDI ARAMCO.
(B) The prepainted exterior face sheet shall be made of a minimum 0.7 mm
(22 gages) galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet and
shall be formed architecturally to provide adequate rigidity. For buildings
in coastal areas, or as otherwise specified in the design drawings, the
prepainted exterior face sheet shall be made of a minimum 0.9 mm
thickness aluminum sheet.
(C) The prepainted interior face sheet shall be made of a minimum 0.45
mm (26 gages) galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet
shall be formed into a plane surface.
(D) Metal to metal contact between the interior and exterior faces on vertical
edges shall be prevented.
(E) The vertical joints shall overlap having a thermal break and providing for
mechanical, as well as thermal, horizontal movement. The panel design
shall provide for expansion and/or contraction as caused by an ambient
temperature range without causing harmful buckling, opening of joints,
or other detrimental effects.
(F) The panels shall be in one length up to a maximum of 9 meters (30 ft

nominal) from base to building eave. Wall panel length for above and
below windows shall be as indicated on the drawings. Wall panels shall
extend not less than 38 mm below the column base plate, and sit in a
recess in the concrete foundation to close off the lower end of the
panels. The panels shall be self-draining to the exterior.
(G) A galvanized sill angle shall be provided to secure wall panels at floor
level.
(H) Foam plastic insulation shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less.
The vendor is cautioned that the section 2602 of the Uniform Building
Code contains certain restrictive requirements for the use of foam
plastic insulation that must be complied with. Accordingly, building
design should incorporate appropriate details which will satisfy the code
requirements.
7.5.5 Roof and Wall fasteners
All panels shall be attached to secondary framing members by means of self-

drilling or self-tapping screws. The screws shall be hex head carbon steel
screws assembled with a neoprene washer and mechanically zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM B695, Class 50 with a yellow chromate finish.
Page 93 of 221
However, in coastal areas, an austenitic (300 series stainless steel fasteners

shall be used.
7.5.6 Sealants and Closures
Sealant
(a) A sealing compound shall be provided to seal ends and side laps of
panels. The material shall consist of a blend of non-toxic, synthetic resin
base ingredients and inert extenders. Asphalt or asphalt derivatives are
not permitted.
(b) The application shall be of such cross-sectional area as to give a

positive seal between adjacent surfaces.
(c) The material shall have sufficient adhesion to metal and plastic so as to
remain in place during normal handling operations. Adhesive tensile
strength shall be a minimum off 28 KPa (4 psi).
(d) The sealing compound shall prevent the entry of water by capillary
action or otherwise when used in a properly installed roof or wall
system.
7.6 BUILT-UP MODIFIED BITUMEN FELT ROOFING SYSTEM
GENERAL SCOPE FOR ALL ROOF TYPES
The WORK shall include but not be limited to all applicable activities to perform the
installation and/or repair of various types of built-up modified bitumen felt roofing
systems on various substrates consisting of wood, concrete or metal deck surfaces.
(See Table B-1).
Table B-1
Insulation over
Deck System Concrete Wood Steel
Concrete
Single layer *Polyflame Slope 1 to 5% Slope 1 to 5% Slope 1 to 5%
4, loose laid, covered To be covered To be covered To be covered Slope 1 to 5% To
with gravel or with gravel with gravel be covered with
tile. gravel
Two layer, *Polyflame 4

first layer, loose laid, + As Above As Above As Above As Above
Polyflame 4 fully
bonded, covered.
Two layer, *Polyflame 4

first layer (See Slope > 1.0%
attachment method)
Page 94 of 221
+ First layer First layer to First layer to First layer to be

attachment be nailed be fully fully bonded.
*Polyflame 4 granule depends on bonded to
layer, fully bonded, substrate and covering
exposed. slope. Bonded, boards e.g.
loose laid, nailed rigid
etc insulation,
plywood etc.
* Polyflame 4 or similar SAUDI ARAMCO approved product
PREPARATION
Inspect wooden decks for projecting nails or other defects. Broom-clean the deck
before starting application of roofing. Concrete decks shall be thoroughly cleaned of
all loose concrete, debris or other materials. Projections shall be smoothed off, holes
or cracks shall be filled with mortar and the entire surface left clean and smooth.
Metal decks shall be adequately fastened to the structural framing and all end and
side laps properly stitched with stitch screws. The metal decking shall be free from
corrosion and all debris or other materials. The decking shall be brushed clean prior
to installation of all roofing materials and must be thoroughly dry.
MATERIALS
Bitumat Polyflame or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
Polyflame, an APP Modified Bitumen membrane reinforced with 180 gm/m 2

polyester mat, 4 mm. thickness nominal, black or granule finish. These materials are
torch welded to the substrate.
Hot Work Permit must be issued for torch welding in "Restricted Areas". Fire
extinguishers of the 13.5 kg dry chemical type (AMS No. 21-102-820) shall be
provided.
Bitumat Roofing Asphalt Type IV or approved equal. This is premium asphalt

complying with ASTM D312 Type IV
Bitumat Bituprime or approved equal. This is a cold applied roofing primer complying
with ASTM D41.
Bitumat Bitumastic or approved equal. This is a high quality, toweling grade roofing
plastic cement.
Bitumat Bitubond or approved equal. This is a specially formulated liquid cold applied
adhesive.
Page 95 of 221
INSULATION
Insulation shall comprise 25 mm thick (minimum) rigid Polyurethane (PUR) thermal

insulation boards with asphalt felt facing on both sides. Boards shall have a nominal
overall density of 35 kg/cu m. Boards shall have straight edges.
FILTER LAYER
Filter layer, where required, shall be 120 140 gm/sq. m non-woven geotextile.
SEPARATION LAYER
A separation layer comprising of 150 microns polyethylene sheet shall be used

where applicable.
TOPPING (SEVERAL OPTIONS)
A topping of crushed stone gravel, washed clean, 25/35 mm size, and minimum 5
cm. thick.
Reinforced Concrete screed, pavers/tiles or mortar bed for ceramic tiles etc.
Minimum 4 cm thick.
INSTALLATION
In general the modified bitumen membrane system shall be installed in full

accordance with the manufacturers specifications and installation manuals.
SINGLE LAYER, LOOSE LAID
The Polyflame membrane rolls or approved equal shall be installed with 10 cm side
laps and 15 cm end laps.
The membrane roll shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the roof deck starting at
the low point. All laps in the sheet shall be installed so as to avoid water edges. End
laps must be staggered.
Starting at the low edge of the roof, the membrane shall be unrolled and properly
aligned along the parapet. The membrane should then be stretched to remove any
wrinkles
The membrane will then be rolled back up to the middle of the sheet and the butane
flame shall be applied to the exposed outer surface of the roll, at the perimeter only,
until the surface reaches the proper application temperature (generally 200 oC) giving
a slight sheen.
The membrane sheet shall then be gradually unrolled to create a heat weld between
the membrane and the perimeter of the roof and the cant strip, pressing the
membrane to ensure proper bond.
Page 96 of 221
When this section of the roll has been securely installed re-rolls the rest of the
membrane up to the point of application and begins heat welding in the opposite
direction. If more than one roll is required for starter course, lap ends 15 cm.
Continue installing additional rolls in shingle fashion with 10 cm side laps and 15 cm
end laps which must be staggered. Heat welding should be done at the overlap only
so as to fuse and weld the two layers together.
Seams at overlaps shall be checked for proper weld by running a heated trowel
along the edge of the seam to re-seal all voids in the laps. Seal all edges with the
heated trowel by slightly melting the modified bitumen compound evenly creating a
fully welded seam.
After covering the whole roof area, recheck to ensure that the membrane is fully heat
welded at all laps and around the perimeter of the roof and all roof protrusions.
SINGLE LAYER, FULLY BONDED
Proceed as per Loose Laid first layer for roll handling and overlapping, but torch
fully the membrane onto the deck by applying the butane torch flame to the whole
width of the roll in order to burn off completely the polyethylene foil and melt
superficially the bitumen. A small wave of melted bitumen may appear at the base of
the roll in contact with the deck. To avoid overheating of the bitumen coating, this
wave shall not be more than 1 2 cm.
SECOND LAYER, FULLY BONDED
The bitumen membrane roll shall be perpendicular to the slope of the roof starting at
the low point. All laps in the sheets shall be installed so as to avoid water edges. End
laps must be staggered. All side laps shall be 10 cm and end laps 15 cm.
Side laps of the first layer and of the second layer shall be staggered or crossed, but
in no case superimposed.
The membrane is installed fully bonded onto the first layer by applying the butane
torch flame to the whole width of the roll.
After covering the whole roof area, recheck all seams and laps.
VERTICAL FLASHINGS
The top of the membrane base flashing must be higher than the finished roof level by
at least 15 cm. and/or at least 5 cm. higher than the maximum expected water level.
The upper horizontal joint of the base flashing strip must be protected by a counter
flashing system (metal strip, reglet, counter cladding, concrete structure etc.).
The membrane base flashing shall be self-protected (mineral granules or aluminum

foil).
Page 97 of 221
Sand/cement, fiber, wood or insulation cants strips shall be provided at all wall and
curb type protrusion flashings.
All membranes for flashing details are always fully bonded to primed substrates.
The membrane flashing shall be installed in strips not longer than 1 meter and cut to
the width required for the flashing girth.
Reseal all seams and edges with the heated trowel running it only once along all
joints. Overheating and over melting of the surface bitumen must be avoided.
All external and internal corners shall be cut and shaped using a second reinforcing
piece at the central joint and shall be fully heat welded with resealed edges and
seams as the rest of the flashing.
EDGE FLASHINGS
At flat edges, the edge of the covering board shall be protected by a membrane base
strip extending 10 cm both above and below the board.
A metal flashing shall be mechanically fastened at the edge, extending at least 10 cm

onto the roof and 5 cm below the metal deck level.
The regular modified bitumen membrane roofing system is stopped at the extreme
edge of the roof, fully bonded onto the primed metal plate.
An acceptable ballast retainer (gravel stop) shall be installed at the perimeter of the
roof and around roof drains in the case of covered systems.
OUTLETS AND OVERFLOWS
Each roof or portion of roof surrounded by roof dividers shall have at least 2 No. rain
water outlets, or 1 No. rain water outlet and 1 No. overflow.
To avoid ponding water around outlets, the opening shall be surrounded by a

depression of not less than 1.5 cm deep and a radius of (15 cm + outlet radius).
The rainwater outlet can be designed in two ways:
(a) Prefabricated lead or special rubber or PVC to be installed fully bonded

between two layers of modified bitumen membrane
(b) Cast iron, fixed onto the roof deck, properly sealed with Polyflame or approved
equal welded onto primed metal plate with at least 10 cm overlaps between
metal and membrane.
Outlets and overflows made of normal PVC are to be avoided as proper torch
welding of bitumen membrane onto PVC is impossible.
VENTILATION PIPES AND A/C DUCTS
Page 98 of 221
Pipe protrusions shall receive a flashing system similar to that outlined in Vertical
Flashings above.
They shall be made of steel or other acceptable metal fixed onto the roof deck
through a welded flange.
A/C ducts shall be surrounded by a metallic curb. A counter flashing system shall be
installed onto the duct by the CONTRACTOR to cover the curbs and prevent water
leaks along the duct.
Electrical cables shall pass through an elbow steel pipe fixed onto the roof deck.
VALLEYS AND RIDGES
Modified bitumen membrane systems are always fully bonded and properly
reinforced at valleys and ridges.
Membrane first layer (if 2 layer system is specified) is laid fully bonded, 1.5 m wide,
each side of the valley or ridge line.
WATER TEST
After completion of all roofing works, the outlets shall be temporarily sealed and the
roof flooded with water to a height below the top edge of the up stand flashing for a
period of 48 hours to ensure there is no leak and no point without a properly welded
seam.
If the slope of the roof is such that a water flood test cannot be carried out, then the
water tightness of the roof shall be checked using running water. Any leaks or
defects found at the time of the test shall be corrected by CONTRACTOR at no cost
to SAUDI ARAMCO.
In the case of a covered system, the water test shall be carried out before and after
the application of the cover material.
INVERTED ROOF SYSTEM
The following basic procedures shall be adopted when installing an inverted roof
system. The insulation manufacturers recommendations must be followed at all
times
Apply an adequate separation layer on modified bitumen membrane systems.
Apply insulation boards, staggered joints, loose-laid over separation layer.
Apply a filter layer loose-laid over insulation boards overlapped by at least 10 cm.
Filter layer shall be 120/140 gm/sq. m. non-woven geotextile.
Prevent wind uplift by covering only areas which shall be immediately ballasted the
same day.
Page 99 of 221
If no inverted insulation is used in the roofing system, proceed directly to the

installation of the top covering system after laying the geotextile protection layer.
On exposed membranes the granule finish provides efficient protection against UV

and weathering stresses so a covering system is not required.
7.7 EPDM ROOFING SYSTEM
7.7.1 GENERAL WORKS
The following conditions apply to both Loose Laid Ballast and Fully Adhered
EPDM roofing systems.
Inspect the roof deck and report/document all defects to SAUDI ARAMCO for
assessment.
The substrate must be clear off all debris, protrusions and foreign material.
Installation of the EPDM membrane shall be in strict accordance with the

Manufacturers printed instructions and recommendations.
Flash all Penetrations and walls etc.
Lay protective mat over membrane and spread approved ballast over roof
area for Loose Laid System only.
7.7.2 MATERIALS
Rigid underlayment shall be 25mm thick rigid polyisocyanurate (P.I.R.)

thermal insulation straight edge boards with asphalt felt facings on both sides
with a nominal overall density of 35 kg/m3 by SAPTEX or approved equal.
Membrane shall be 1.52mm (0.060) thick, maximum 15.5 m. wide black or

white non-reinforced EPDM membrane
(Terpolymer of Ethylene, Propylene and Diene). Approved bonding adhesive,

splice cleaner, splicing cement, in seam sealant, lap sealant, uncured
Electroform flashings, expansion joint supports, securing strips and gravel
stops shall be utilized.
7.7.3 ACCEPTABLE Manufacturers
Materials shall be approved by SAUDI ARAMCO. The following

manufacturers are already on the approval list:
Carlisle Syntec Systems.

Firestone Building Products Europe.
Royal Edge Roofing Products International Inc. (R.P.I.)
7.7.4 WATER TESTING OF EPDM ROOFING SYSTEMS
Page 100 of 221

All membrane roof systems shall be subjected to a flood test for a period of
no less than 48 hours as per SAUDI ARAMCO Building Code, SAES M-100,
and Section 1501.1. If the slope of the roof is such that a water flood test
cannot be carried out, then the water tightness of the roof shall be checked
using running water. Roof tests shall be carried out in accordance and in
manner acceptable to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer and SAUDI
ARAMCO Inspection Department Representative. CONTRACTOR, at no cost
to SAUDI ARAMCO, shall correct any defects found during the flood test.
Roofing will only be acceptable to SAUDI ARAMCO upon acceptance by
SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer and Inspection Department
Representative.
Submit a written report of the water test(s) fully attested by the SAUDI
7.7.5 EPDM WARRANTY
All materials shall carry a 20-year warranty from the supplier/manufacturer

and this shall be submitted in writing to SAUDI ARAMCO on completion and
acceptance of the works. CONTRACTOR shall warrant by his acceptance of
the contract that all WORK installed shall be free from defects in
workmanship and erection. If during the period of 20 years, or as otherwise
specified ,from the date of final acceptance and approval defects in
workmanship or performance appear, CONTRACTOR shall without cost to
SAUDI ARAMCO, remedy such defects within a reasonable time frame
SAUDI ARAMCO may have such WORK done at the cost of CONTRACTOR.
7.7.6 CONTINUATION OF WARRANTY
Where and existing roof has a twenty (20) year materials and water tightness
warranty, the CONTRACTOR shall maintain the warranties to disrupted and
repaired areas issued by the original roof membrane manufacturer to SAUDI
ARAMCO upon substantial completion of the project.
7.7.7 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. E.P.D.M flat roofing shall be measured as the area covered with the
relevant Roofing System (System I-Loose Laid or System II - Fully
Bonded). Area shall be measured to the outside of parapet walls and over
gutters. Dimensions shall be taken to the nearest one (1) inch.
B. New flashings, capping, accessories, gravel and other roofing

components are to be used in roofing installations except as specifically
identified in the Scope of Work and any accompanying Drawings.
C. There will be no separate measurement for flashings, parapets, upturns,

up stands, expansion joints or any other construction details necessary to
comply with manufacturer's specifications or warranty requirements.
D. Openings in the roof surface shall be measured as follows:
Page 101 of 221

E. No deduction for openings containing less than 100 SF (9.3 SM).
F. Deduct one half the size of opening between 100 SF (9.3 SM) and less
than 500 SF (46.5 SM).
G. Deduct in full openings having an area of 500 SF (46.5 SM) or more.
H. Repair and partial roof WORK is measured by the actual quantity.
7.7.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Cleaning up and removal of excess materials, debris and equipment shall

be performed as part of the WORK, in a manner satisfactory to the
B. Work shall be kept clean and free from accumulation of stains, scratches,
surface defects and foreign materials.
7.7.9 INSTALLATION OF EPDM LOOSE LAID BALLASTED SYSTEM
UNDERLAYMENT
The insulation underlayment shall be loose laid over the roof deck with no
gaps greater than 6 mm. Gaps greater than 6 mm shall be filled with the
same insulation material.
MEMBRAINE
The EPDM membrane shall be loose laid over the insulation board
underlayment. Adjacent EPDM membrane sheets shall be overlapped and
spliced together with cement, inseam sealant and feathered lap sealant to
completely cover the splice edge. The EPDM membrane shall be additionally
secured at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb, skylight,
interior wall, penthouse etc., at any angle change which exceeds 50 mm in
300 mm horizontal run and at all other penetrations in accordance with
manufacturers standard details. The additional securing membrane shall be
made with approved recommended fastening strips.
MEMBRANE FLASHING
When feasible all penetrations and walls shall be flashed with cured EPDM
membrane. Uncured Elastoform flashing shall be limited to all inside and
outside corners, scuppers, prefabricated curbs and other penetrations or
unusually shaped walls where the use of cured membrane flashing is not
practical. Prefabricated accessories should be used when feasible in lieu of
uncured Elastoform flashing. Flashing shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers standard detail.
BALLASTING
Page 102 of 221

Gravel ballast shall be installed for adequate securing and to provide

complete coverage of the loose laid EPDM membrane. Ballast shall not be
less than 450 kg / 10 sq. m. and must be continuously distributed to maintain
an average of 5 kg / 30 sq. cm. over the field of the roof.
Page 103 of 221

7.7.10 INSTALLATION OF EPDM FULLY ADHERED ROOFING SYSTEM
The insulation underlayment shall be mechanically fastened to the roof deck

with a minimum of one (1) approved fastener and plate for every 60 Sq. cm of
insulation board.
MEMBRANE
The EPDM membrane shall be 100% adhered to the insulation underlayment

with bonding adhesive applied at the rate specified by the manufacturer.
Adjacent EPDM membrane sheets shall be overlapped and spliced together
with cement, inseam sealant and feathered lap sealant to completely cover
the splice edge. The EPDM membrane shall be additionally secured at the
perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb, skylight, interior wall,
penthouse etc., at any angle change which exceeds 50 mm in a 30 cm run
and at all other penetrations in accordance with the manufacturers standard
details. The additional securing membrane shall be made with approved
recommended fastening strips.
MEMBRANE FLASHING
When feasible all penetrations and walls shall be flashed with cured EPDM
membrane. Uncured Elastoform flashings shall be limited to all inside and
outside corners, scuppers, prefabricated curbs and other penetrations or
unusually shaped walls where the use of cured membrane flashing is not
practical. Prefabricated accessories should be used when feasible in lieu of
uncured Elastoform flashing. Flashings shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers standard detail.
7.8 LIQUID APPLIED ROOFING MEMBRANES
7.8.1 Prepare substrate and apply Thortex Poly-Tech, Belzona 3111, Synroof Hi-
Build or other SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal built-up elastomeric high
build roofing systems, strictly in accordance with the manufacturers printed
instructions and recommendations.
7.8.2 Clean off all debris, loose dirt and dust. Apply bridging material to all wide
joints, joints on corrugated roofs, joints at poor fitting flashings and joints
where excessive movement can be expected.
7.8.3 Apply appropriate primer for substrate by brush to all areas to be covered.
7.8.4 Apply first coat of waterproofing by brush and secure reinforcing into the coat
to follow contour of the roof surface. Brush further coating onto and through
the reinforcing maintaining an even thickness.
7.8.5 Over-large areas reinforcing shall be laid out over the primer area and the
coating brushed through the reinforcing to form a uniform layer that follows
the contour of the surface.
Page 104 of 221

7.8.6 THORTEX POLY-TECH WARRANTY
7.8.6.1 All materials shall carry a 10-year warranty from the supplier /
manufacturer and this shall be submitted in writing to SAUDI
ARAMCO on completion and acceptance of the works.
CONTRACTOR shall warrant by his acceptance of the contract that
all WORK installed shall be free from defects in workmanship and
erection. If during the period of one year ,or as otherwise specified
,from the date of final acceptance and approval defects in
workmanship or performance appear, CONTRACTOR shall without
cost to SAUDI ARAMCO, remedy such defects within a reasonable
time frame specified in writing by the SAUDI ARAMCO project
Engineer. In default, SAUDI ARAMCO may have such WORK done
at the cost of CONTRACTOR.
7.9 SIDING INSTALLATION
WORK to be performed shall include but not be limited to all necessary activities
involved in preparing for the installation of wall siding systems. The WORK shall be
executed in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO applicable building codes and
standards.
For framing system or stud WORK and wall sheathing as required, refer to Section
6.0 Wood and Plastic of this Attachment IV to Schedule B.
For insulation system, refer to Section 7.0 Thermal and Moisture Protection of this
Attachment IV to Schedule B.
7.9.1 FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT BOARDS
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK, which shall include but not be
limited to preparing and performing all applicable activities necessary during
the installation of fiber reinforced cement boards faced with a natural stone
finish.
MATERIALS:
Cement Fiber Boards: Shall be Cemstone or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal natural stone surfaced boards in standard sheet sizes. The base
material shall be 6 mm () thick mineral fiber board composed of cement,
cellulose fiber and selected mineral fillers. Surface of the boards shall have a
natural stone finish. Color shall be Beige as per Cemstone standard color,
or approved equal.
Seam Tape: Shall be 60 x 1 mm thick black E.P.D.M rubber seam tape as

supplied by Cemstone manufacturer or approved equal. The E.P.D.M seam
tape shall be fixed to all vertical furring members using approved bonding
adhesive.
Page 105 of 221

Vertical and Horizontal Joint Fillet : Shall be standard 0.7 mm powder coated
aluminum fillet flashing as supplied by Cemstone manufacturer or approved
equal.
External Corner Fillet: Shall be standard 0.7 mm powder coated aluminum

fillet flashing as supplied by Cemstone manufacturer or approved equal.
Fasteners: Shall be Acid-Proof Annular Ring-Shan ked nails.
Accessories: Shall be the standard accessories supplied by Cemstone

manufacturer or approved equal.
Install vapor barrier (TYVEK type or Saudi ARQMCO approved equal) to the
completed existing or new structure ensuring correct overlaps are
maintained.
Prepare and install stone faced panels fix to studs over vapor barrier, using
non-corrosive fixings. Fastener spacing shall be 150 mm o.c. perimeter and
300 mm o.c. field; fastener shall be a minimum of 9 mm from panel edge.
Maintain a 6 mm gap between all panel joints to allow for expansion. All
expansion joints shall be caulked using an approved sealant such as
silicones, urethanes, polysulfide or acrylic latex.
Panels shall be correctly trimmed and fitted to door, window openings and
flashings maintaining a 6 mm gap for expansion, which shall be caulked with
a SAUDI ARAMCO approved sealant, as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Project Engineer.
Alternative method for panel joints between panel joints may be performed
using approved then trimmed joints such as "T" Divider, "H" Divider for all
vertical joints when called for by SAUDI ARAMCO.
Prior to abutting panels to window and doorframes, the window head, side
and bottom accessories shall be installed. Window accessories shall be
embedded in sealant prior to final fixing. At corner joints inside or outside
corner fillet shall be installed and embedded in sealant prior to installation of
the panel.
CONTRACTOR shall prepare a cutting plan for the panels to ensure
minimum cutting waste.
7.9.2 EXTERIOR WALL INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK preparing and performing all

activities necessary in the installation of Exterior Wall Insulation and Finish
System.
7.9.2.1 Install/apply Exterior Wall Insulation and Finish System with or

without insulation in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions.
7.9.2.2 WARRANTY
Page 106 of 221

All materials shall carry a 10-year warranty from the manufacturer

and this shall be submitted in writing to SAUDI ARAMCO on
completion and acceptance of the works. CONTRACTOR shall
warrant by his acceptance of the contract that all WORK installed
shall be free from defects in workmanship and erection. If during the
period of 10 years, or as otherwise specified from the date of final
acceptance and approval defects in workmanship or performance
appear, CONTRACTOR shall without cost to SAUDI ARAMCO,
remedy such defects within a reasonable time frame specified in
writing by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. In default SAUDI
ARAMCO may have such WORK done at the cost of
CONTRACTOR.
7.9.2.3 Work shall be performed in direct supervision by the manufacturer.
7.9.2.4 Recommended manufacturer shall be DRYVIT Systems,

Incorporated or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
7.9.3 VINYL AND ALUMINUM CLADDING
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK, which shall include, but not be
limited to, preparing and performing all activities necessary in the installation
of "VINYL" or "ALUMINUM", horizontal wall cladding and all associated
fixings and fixtures.
7.9.3.1 INSTALLATION
Install vapor barriers (TYVEK type or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal) to the complete stud structure, ensuring correct overlaps are
maintained.
Using a chalk line, establish a base course line. Install starter strip
along the level of the chalk line, starter strip shall be nailed in the
middle of the slots to allow for movement. Starter strip shall be
nailed at 150 mm to 200 mm o.c. When butting starter strips allow
10 mm for expansion. Starter strip should be cut back 75 mm from
both outside and inside corners to allow corner posts to be installed.
Place the first siding panel in the starter strip and securely lock in
position, leave a 6 mm gap between panel and corner post to allow
for expansion. Continue in the same manner for additional courses.
Where siding material abuts window and door openings, finishing
trim and drip cap flashing shall be installed. Joints in lap siding shall
be overlapped 25 mm at the joint. Joints shall be staggered to
improve appearance.
Closure at the junction of wall siding and underside of soffit shall be

closed using the proper finishing trim. Eaves and soffits shall be
completed prior to finishing trim being installed. Wall panel siding
shall be hung without any strain on the boards, never put the panel
Page 107 of 221

under vertical strain to make it fit. All panel sidings shall be fixed
with the nail in the center of the slot in the panel; fixings shall not
exceed 400 mm o.c.
Gable end walls shall be finished with "J" trim and a 6 mm gap shall
be left between the panel ends and the "J" trim to allow for
expansion. Panel type in general shall be 100 mm double type
unless otherwise specified.
7.9.4 GLASS FIBER CLOTH REINFORCED PLAIN BOARD
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK, which shall include, but not be
limited to, preparing and performing all activities necessary in installing and
fixing glass fiber cloth reinforced plain board.
7.9.4.1 MATERIAL
Plain Board: glass fiber cloth reinforced board; fire resistant and
moisture tolerant. ASK Speedwall Board or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
7.9.4.2 INSTALLATION
Install vapor barriers (TYVEK type or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal) to the complete stud structure, ensuring correct overlaps are
maintained.
Using a chalk line and level, establish a base course line around the
perimeter of the building; base line shall be a minimum of 150mm
above the finish grade level. Starting from the corner, install board in
a vertical pattern from the base line. Board shall be fixed with non
corrosive 6d deformed shank nails or self tapping screws using
necessary pneumatic tools, at 150mm on centers at edges and
300mm 0n centers at intermediate supports. Continue in the same
manner with additional boards until the whole area is covered.
Boards shall be neatly cut and trimmed to allow window and door
openings, 8mm gap should be maintained where boards abut each
other and other framework. Perform necessary caulking as required.
Horizontal nailers shall be installed at intersection where horizontal
joints occur.
Eaves and soffits shall be treated in the same manner for

installation.
7.10 FLASHINGS, TRIM CLOSURES, RO0F DRAINS, SCUPPERS AND GUTTERS
7.10.1 Install flashing, rood drains, scuppers, trim closures, and gutter and down
spout with outlet nozzle.
Page 108 of 221

7.10.2 Flashing and/ or trim shall be furnished at the rake, corners, eaves, at
framed openings, and wherever necessary to provide weather tightness
and a finished appearance. Color will be as specified by the SAUDI
7.10.3 Galvanized or aluminum-zinc steel for flashing, metal closures, trims,

scuppers and other miscellaneous used shall be 0.7 mm (22 gage).
Aluminum flashings, trims etc. shall be 0.9 mm (20 gages).
7.10.4 A formed panel matching the slope and profile of adjoining panels shall be
provided along the building ridge.
7.10.5 Preformed closures matching the profile of the panel shall be installed
along the eave and other locations as specified on drawings or as required
for weather tightness, and may be made of solid or closed cell plastic
materials subject to Buyers approval.
7.10.6 Gutters shall be formed from 0.7 mm, pre-painted, galvanized metal sheet
to the size and shape as outlined on the Design Drawings. Color shall
match roofing sheets or as specified by the SAUDI ARAMCO project
Engineer.
7.10.7 Roof drains shall be coated cast iron, large polypropylene locking dome,
non puncturing clamp ring with integral gravel stop, large sump with wide
roof flange and bottom outlet; JOSAM 21500 series or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
8.0 DOOR AND WINDOWS
WORK includes installation of any type of doors, windows and frames, including
glass/glazing units hardware and accessories. WORK shall likewise include replacement
of same of similar material and finishes as existing.
8.1 WOOD AND METAL DOOR FRAMES
8.1.1 Install door frames straight, true to line, and plumb. Openings shall be timber
stud, metal stud or masonry. Door frames shall be installed using the
appropriate fixings for the openings into which they are installed.
8.1.2 Fill small field dimples in frames, screws and bolts using metal filler; grind
smooth. Dimples shall not show in the finished WORK.
8.1.3 Wooden Door Frame (Exterior): Ponderosa pine; white alkyd primed; integral
foam seal, oak/extruded aluminum sill, rebated joints; back scored. (Similar to
SAP 1000186543).
8.1.4 Wooden Door Frame (Interior): White pine; P-GR/WWMMP; white alkyd
primed; 10-12% moisture content before priming; mitered casings both sides,
mitered stops, routed joints, back scored. (Similar to SAP 1000186577).
Page 109 of 221

8.1.5 Metal Door Frame: Cold rolled steel as per ASTM A366/M; Hot dipped zinc
coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 G90; gage 12 for exterior and
gage 16 for interior; face miter seam shall be closed and tight; weld face
seam and the full web of the frame corner or intersection; grind and dress
smooth weld areas; zinc rich epoxy primed.
Page 110 of 221

8.2 WOOD AND METAL DOORS (any size unless noted otherwise)
8.2.1 Carefully set out and check all components are present prior to proceeding
with door installation. Ensure that door frame is straight and plumb. Install
doors into the prepared openings.
8.2.2 Wooden doors shall be as shown on SAUDI ARAMCO Library Drawing No.
AA-036236.001, revision 02 and/or as specified below.
8.2.3 Scribe, cut, trim and fit external or internal doors of various types, heights and
widths and thickness, to frames in place. Frames shall be timber or metal.
Doors vary from hollow core plywood flush through fire rated to metal doors.
Hinges are deemed to be included in the installation of doors. Doors shall
receive 1-1/2 pair of hinges unless otherwise stated. Wooden doors shall be
undercut to allow for carpet installation where required.
8.2.4 Screen doors shall be inclusive of all hardware and insect screen. Installed
doors shall be checked for ease of opening and shall not bind on any surface
for the door frame. Doors shall be installed to allow for paint clearance on
stile and head.
8.2.5 Garage door shall be installed complete with all required accessories and
hardware such as tracks, rollers, torsion spring, lock, pulls and door opener.
8.2.6 All doors shall include required hinges, lock sets and fixings. Door lock shall
be Schlage or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal. Hinge shall be Hager or
SAUDI ARAMCO approved.
8.2.7 Metal doors shall be either with or without rim device.
8.2.8 After installation test operate all door hardware to demonstrate satisfactory
operation acceptable to SAUDI ARAMCO. Carry out adjustment as
necessary.
8.2.9 Material:
8.2.9.1 Hollow Core Wood Door: Flush seven (7) ply Hollow Core; Type I;
glue bonded; edges factory sealed; all stiles, rails and lock blocks
shall be western softwood, premium grade birch, ash or white OAK
faces. (Similar to SAP 1000185833).
8.2.9.2 Solid Core Wood Door: Flush, 7 ply, solid particle board core; edges
factory sealed; all stiles, rails and lock blocks shall be Western
Softwood; premium grade white OAK or Birch or ASH Faces.
(Similar to SAP 1000186022).
8.2.9.3 Twenty (20) MIN. Fire Rated Wood Door: Flush; 7 ply; Mineral Core
NWWDA I.S.1 Series; type 1 Glue Bonded; edges factory sealed;
fire rating label stamped on the door at eye level; Good grade birch,
ash or white OAK; (Similar to SAP 1000186057).
Page 111 of 221

8.2.9.4 One (1) Hour Fire Rated Wood Door: Flush; 7 ply; Mineral Core;
NWWDA I.S.1; edges factory sealed; Type 1 Glue Bonded; fire
rating label stamped on the door at eye level; Good grade birch; ash
or white OAK. (Similar to SAP 1000186059).
8.2.9.5 Metal Door: Face sheets are to be made of commercial quality cold
rolled steel that complies with ASTM A924 G90; Vertical edges shall
join the face sheets by a continuous weld extending the full height of
the door. Welds are to be grounded, filled and dressed smooth to
make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface; hinge
reinforcement shall be not less than 10 gage plate 1-1/4" X full
height of door; Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a
continuous steel channel not less than 16 gage, extending the full
width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an
inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel screwed in
place so that the web of the channel is flush with the face sheets of
the door. Door cores shall be resin impregnated honeycomb
securely bonded to both face sheets.
8.2.9.6 Bi-Fold: Full louvered design ponderosa pine; Standard Grade;

NWWDA I.S.6. Complete with hinges pivots, guides, track, jamb
brackets and pulls. Two door leaf per set. (Similar to SAP
1000186093).
8.2.9.7 Roll-Up Door:
A. Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats. End locks shall be

attached to each of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement.
The front slats shall be fabricated of 26 gauge galvanized steel;

the back slats shall 24 gauge galvanized steel. Slat cavity shall
be filled with polyurethane insulation.
B. Bottom Bar: shall be two (2) prime painted steel angles,

minimum thickness 1/8, bolted back to back to reinforce the
curtain in the guides, and shall have bottom weather seal.
C. Guides: shall be three (3) structural steel angles with a minimum

thickness of 3/16. Guides shall be weather-stripped with vinyl
weather seal at each jamb, on the exterior and interior curtain
side. Guides shall be equipped with wedlock bars to meet a
minimum design wind load of 20 PSF.
D. Brackets: shall be hot-rolled steel plates to support the counter

balance, curtain and hood.
E. Counterbalance: shall be helical torsion spring designed for

standard 20,000 cycles. The counterbalance shall be housed in
a steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection
limited to 0.03 per foot of span (width). The counterbalance
shall be adjusted by means of an adjusting tension wheel.
Page 112 of 221

F. Hood: shall be minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel.

Intermediate support shall be furnished to support the hood
where required on wider openings. The hood shall be supplied
with an internal hood baffle weather seal.
G. Finish: Slats and hood shall be galvanized steel in accordance

with ASTM A 525 and receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process,
including bonderizing, 0.2 mils thick bake-on prime paint, and
0.6 mils thick baked on polyester (powder coated) top coat. Non
galvanized exposed ferrous surface shall receive one coat of
rust-inhibitive primer.
H. Operation: manual chain hoist or electric motor and crack

operated.
Motor: HP, 110 or 220 volts, 1 pole or 2 pole, 60HZ provided

with three (3) button control.
For electric motor operated, provide chain hoist for manual use
in case of power failure.
8.2.9.8 Access Doors: satin finish Type 304 stainless steel or extruded
aluminum alloy 6063-T6 anodized or powder coated finish.
8.2.9.9 Panel Section Sliding Garage Door: Exterior hardboard in selected

western softwood frames; paneled; solid core, 4 sections high x 4
panels across, no glazed; NWWDA I.S. 1 Standard; primed white
alkyd; non-fire rated; complete with hinges, tracks, rollers, torsion
spring, lock, pulls and door opener; 2.743M (9) wide X 2.134M (7)
high X 35mm (1-3/8) thick. (Similar to SAP 1000186154).
or
Panel Section Sliding Garage Door: Sectional overhead type, style
non fire rated, hot dipped galvanized steel body, 50mm (2) wide
jamb, 2.743M (9) wide X 2.134M (7) high X 50mm (2) thick,
sections coated on both sides with bacon primer and white polyester
top coat finish, without insulation, hot dipped galvanized tracks,
steel ball bearing rollers, tempered wire springs, paneled, heavy
duty 25 gage steel, automatically lock when closed, with 5 pin
cylinder lock, tongue and groove joint seals out wind, rain and sand,
heavy 18 gage galvanized center and end stiles fastened with
stainless steel rivets, no exterior welds, aluminum and vinyl bottom
weatherstrip. (Similar to SAP 1000186159).
8.2.9.10 Screen Door: Exterior; ponderosa pine; conform to ANSI/NWMA I.S.

1series; style 852; top panel with fiberglass or aluminum insect
screen; bottom panel with 6.25mm () plywood; preservative
treated; NWMA certification stamp required; 28mm (1-1/8) thick.
(Similar to SAP 1000185791)
Page 113 of 221

8.3 ALUMINUM DOORS (any size)
8.3.1 Install aluminum doors and frames (sliding or swing) complete with
manufacturers standard hardware and accessories. Doors shall be installed
in prepared openings in timber frames or fixed directly in masonry openings.
8.3.2 Fixings shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and be

non-corrosive. Doorframes shall be of inside slider design. Frames shall be
complete with nailed flange.
8.3.3 Hardware shall be cast, rough forged aluminum, with pulls and keyless
locking device, lockable from inside only. Doors shall be fitted with weather-
stripping to both faces of both fixed and sliding door. Weather-stripping shall
be polypropylene backed pile.
8.3.4 Sliding door units shall utilize interlocking fixed and sliding panels without
aluminum contact between panels. Assemble components into weather tight
units with flush hairline joints.
8.3.5 Framing members shall have an overall depth of not less than 90 mm unless
otherwise stated. Fixed and sliding panel depth shall be not less than 2.54
cm. Panels shall be reversible and interchangeable between tracks after
installation. Sliding panels shall not be removable when in the locked
position.
8.3.6 Sliding screen doors shall be fitted with adjustable keeper and spring loaded
bottom nylon rollers for sliding doors. Sliding door units shall utilize
interlocking fixed and sliding panels, without aluminum to aluminum contact
between panels.
8.3.7 Door shall be provided with all required hardware and accessories as per
manufacturers standards, including sliding tack, rollers, locksets, hinges,
door closer, push bar, pull bar and panic device as required.
8.3.8 Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to the
exterior.
8.3.9 Upon completion of the installation, installed units shall be checked and
adjusted for smooth operation and watertight/airtight installations.
8.3.10 All aluminum sections or sheets shall be extruded aluminum 6063-T6, 1.5mm
thick, anodized or powder coated finished. Glass shall be 6mm thick
tempered glass.
8.3.11 Glazing Strips and Weather Strips shall be molded EPDM or neoprene
gaskets complying with ASTM D2000, or molded PVC gasket complying with
ASTM D2287 or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gasket complying with
ASTM C509, Grade 4.
Page 114 of 221

8.4 ALUMINUM WINDOWS (any size)
8.4.1 Install aluminum windows (sliding or fixed) complete with required hardware
and accessories into prepared openings, in timber or metal stud walls or
prepared masonry opening. Masonry openings shall have timber grounds
installed for fixings.
8.4.2 Replace aluminum window frames (fixed and sliding).
8.4.3 Lubricate window tracks/adjust rollers.
8.4.4 Replace window lock, safety pin lock, window curtain rod and bracket.
8.4.5 Replace sliding window track, roller and latch.
8.4.6 Units shall be installed using appropriate fixings as recommended by the

manufacturer. Window units shall be installed true to line and plumb.
Surrounding edges of aluminum frame shall be caulked with a suitable
sealant to provide a weather tight construction.
8.4.7 Horizontal sliding window units shall be fitted with nylon rollers in sash with
combination pull and latch which will prevent the removal of the sash when
latched. Fixed units shall be supported on rigid polyvinyl chloride extruded
glide blocks. Sliding windows shall have tubular aluminum insect screens
fitted into the track and held in position by spring clips. Insect screens shall
be removable from the inside only. Screen mesh shall be 18 x 14 gauge
mesh of plastic coated glass fiber, resistant to stretch and impact damage.
Screen cloth shall be secured in the aluminum frame by vinyl screen splint.
Framing members shall have an overall depth of not less than 90 mm unless
otherwise stated. Fixed and sliding panel depth shall be not less than 2.54
cm. Panels shall be reversible and interchangeable between tracks after
installation. Sliding panels shall not be removable when in the locked
position.
8.4.8 Upon completion of the installation, installed units shall be checked and
adjusted for smooth operation and water tight/airtight installations to the
satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO.
8.4.9 All aluminum sections or sheets shall be extruded aluminum 6063-T6,

1.5mmmm thick, anodized or powder coated finished. Glass shall be 6mm
thick tempered glass unless otherwise noted.
8.4.10 Glazing Strips and Weather Strips shall be molded EPDM or neoprene
gaskets complying with ASTM D2000, or molded PVC gasket complying with
ASTM D2287 or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gasket complying with
ASTM C509, Grade 4.
8.5 ALUMINUM DOOR/WINDOW SCREEN (any size)
8.5.1 Install aluminum mesh screen for aluminum doors and windows.
Page 115 of 221

8.5.2 Replace/install insect screen to sliding window and door.
8.5.3 Replace/install insect screen frame.
8.5.4 Sliding Doors/windows shall have tubular extruded aluminum alloy securely
joined with zinc corner plates insect screens fitted into the track and held in
position by spring clips.
8.5.5 Screen mesh shall be 18 x 14 gauge mesh of plastic coated glass fiber,
resistant to stretch and impact damage. Screen cloth shall be secured in the
aluminum frame by vinyl screen splint.
8.5.6 Sliding screen door shall be fitted with adjustable keeper and spring loaded
bottom nylon rollers. Sliding door units shall utilize interlocking fixed and
sliding panels without aluminum contact between panels.
8.5.7 Assemble components into weather tight units with flush hairline joints.
Framing members shall have an overall depth of not less than 3-5/8" unless
otherwise stated.
8.6 DOOR AND WINDOW GLASS/GLAZING

WORK shall include replacement or installation of glass/glazing units. Glass shall be
product of Zamil Glass or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
8.6.1 Double Glaze:

8.6.1.1 A double glazed pane is fabricated in a workshop and consists of
two sheets of glass with a vacuum (air gap) in between, sealed to
the exact pane.
8.6.1.2 The thickness of a double glass pane shall vary from 20mm to
30mm and broken down as follows:
- Vacuum gap 8 12 mm
- External glass 6 mm -tempered
- Internal glass 8 12 mm laminated safety glass.
8.6.1.3 The double glazed pane must be stamped and conformed to the
requirements of ANSI and ASTM E330. This certifies that the pane,
as a unit, is safe and that the various thickness of the glass has
been approved for the size of the pane.
8.6.2 Heat Mirror insulating Glass Units
8.6.2.1 TYPE 1: 6mm thick clear tempered glass (outer) + 12mm air space
(A/S) with SC75 Heat Mirror + 8.8mm clear limited glass (inner).
8.6.2.2 TYPE 2: 6mm thick green tempered glass (outer) + 12mm A/S with
HM66 Heat Mirror + 6mm clear tempered glass (inner).
Page 116 of 221

8.6.2.3 TYPE 3: 6mm thick Tinted Bronze Tempered + 12mm A/S with Heat
Mirror HPR 38 + 6mm thick Clear Glass.
8.6.2.4 TYPE 4: 6mm thick Tinted Bronze Tempered + 12mm A/S with Heat
Mirror HPR 38 + 6mm thick Clear Tempered Glass
8.6.2.5 TYPE 5: 6mm thick Tinted Bronze + 12mm A/S with Heat Mirror
HPR 38 + 6mm thick Clear Glass.
8.6.3 Tempered Glass
8.6.3.1 Shall be 6 mm thick clear tempered safety. Provide permanent

marking on glazing units where required to comply with
requirements of SAES-M-100 (U.B.C), 1994, section 2402.
8.7 DOOR HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES.

8.7.1 Replace/install various types of door hardware and accessories such as
hinges, lockset, door closer, door stop and threshold.
8.7.2 Replace/install bi-fold door hinges, knob, roller, guide track and stopper.
8.7.3 Replace/install screen door hinges, latch set, door closer, push bar.
8.7.4 Replace/install sliding window track, roller and latch.
8.7.5 Replace door chime and push button switch.
8.7.6 Mount hardware units at heights and locations recommended in

Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware by NBHA, except as
otherwise indicated on drawings or as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Project Engineer.
8.7.7 Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to ensure proper operation
or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with lubrication type
recommended by manufacturer. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and
lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for application made.
8.7.8 Final Adjustment: Where hardware installation is made more than one month
prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to WORK during
week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and
adjustment of all hardware and doors.
8.7.9 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
8.7.9.1 Lockset: Bored for 45 mm thick door, 4 keys cut; reversible position;
cold rolled steel; round knob; satin chrome finish; Litchfield design
complete with installation screws and strike plates; ANSI A156.2,
Yale Series 4000 or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equivalent. (Similar
to SAP 1000185160).
Page 117 of 221

8.7.9.2 Door Closer : Overhead modern surface; 33mm long x 54mm wide x
73mm high; non-handed offset pivot, aluminum alloy, standard
mounting; ANSI A156.4; with adjustable back check, sweep and
latch speed; with slim line cover; silver lacquer finish. Yale No.
3301-SB or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equivalent.(Similar to SAP
1000183265).
8.7.9.3 Door Stop: Dome type; floor mounted; cast brass or bronze; with
screw and expansion shield. Ives/Harrow No. 438 26D or SAUDI
ARAMCO approved equivalent. (Similar to SAP 1000185538).
8.7.9.4 Threshold: extruded aluminum 6063-T5, saddle style with fluted top;
mill finish. Pemko No. 171A or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equivalent.(Similar to SAP 1000189773).
8.7.9.5 Threshold: extruded aluminum 6063-T5, sill type with smooth top;
mill finish. Pemko No. 160A or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equivalent. (Similar to SAP 1000189857).
8.7.9.6 Threshold: extruded aluminum 6063-T5, half saddle type with fluted
top; mill finish. Pemko No. 227A or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equivalent. (Similar to SAP 1000189914).
8.7.9.7 Door Locks Orbit A53 PD SCHLAGE or SAUDI ARAMCO

approved equivalent, A156.2, 1996 Series 4000 Grade 2; Wrought
Brass: Lever is Zinc Base plated, Six (6) pin tumblers, tumbler with
two (2) Nickel Silver keys per lock. Standard latches and strikes
have adjustable brass or bronze face plates, furnished in compatible
lock trim finishes.
8.7.9.8 Door Closer 1460 service mounted closures, LCN 1000 series or
SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal. Mounting: Hinge face, top jamb
and parallel arm, Non-handed, non-sized interior to 5-0 exterior
doors to 4-0. Arms: Heavy duty, hold open, extra duty, fusible link,
cushy-n-stop and spring Cushy. Delay Action (optional) provides
additional time for people to move through the door.
8.7.9.9 Jamb Weather-strip: 896S Series HAGER, USA or SAUDI ARAMCO

approved equivalent. 6.4 mm Deep x 19.1 mm Wide x 6.4 mm
Thick.
8.7.9.10 Screen door hinge: Single acting; wrought steel; zinc plated finish;
enclosed spring, adjustable tension with 2 vertical bearings; full
surface type; The Stanley Works No. 154 US2C or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal. (Similar to SAP 1000183895).
8.7.9.11 Door Pull (screen door): integral base mounting; grip type; wrought
steel japanned; The Stanley Works No. 1257-2 US1B.3 or SAUDI
ARAMCO approved equal. (Similar to SAP 1000185379).
Page 118 of 221

8.7.9.12 Door Closer (Screen door): overhead type; air control; Stanley
Hardware Co. No. CD1708-AL or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal
8.7.9.13 Install/replace angle bars any size
8.7.9.14 Install/replace flat bars any size
8.7.9.15 COMBINATION LOCK:
8.7.9.15.1 Contractor shall provide and install new

Mechanical Combination Push Button
Lock, cylindrical latch with 3-hour
UL/ULC fire rating on A Labeled doors,
single access code easy to manage.
8.7.9.15.2 Heavy-duty cylindrical lock housing with
cast front housing, unified plate and
fixed ADA compliant lever.
8.7.9.15.3 Vandal resistant, solid metal push button
8.7.9.15.4 Recommended Manufacturer:
8.7.9.15.4.1 KABA / YALE
8.8 MISCELLANEOUS
8.8.1 Install / replace pocket door steel hangers, tracks, rollers complete with
necessary fittings.
8.8.2 Install door locks, latches, deadbolts, rim locks in doors of various thickness,
timber or metal, all installed door locks, etc, are to be checked and adjusted
after installation to ensure optimum operation.
8.8.3 Replace rusty and defective hinges to interior / exterior wooden doors.
8.8.4 Replace / install new window latch sets, wooden garden gate latch sets,
complete with necessary fittings and accessories.
8.8.5 Replace rusty garden gate hinges and door stopper.
8.8.6 Remove old insect screen, prepare and fix new screen mesh to doors and
windows in an acceptable smooth operating condition.
8.8.7 Door hardware shall be in accordance with the requirements of SAUDI

ARAMCO Library Drawing No. ARS08710.
8.8.8 Install/replace Complete Set Window Shade including all accessories and
any size
8.8.9 Install/replace fixed or sliding door locks
Page 119 of 221

8.8.10 Install/replace fixed or sliding window locks
9.0 FINISHES
9.1 PLASTER FINISHES ON CONCRETE/CMU, TIMBER/METAL STUD WALLS AND

CEILING
9.1.1 Prepare Surfaces for Plaster
9.1.1.1 All surfaces to receive plaster shall be clean and free from loose
particles, adhering plaster, grease or other foreign particles.
Masonry surfaces shall be evenly wetted, not saturated immediately
before plaster is applied. Concrete surfaces shall be rough to
provide bond. If the surface is not rough it shall be sparrow picked
or a bond coat composed of one (1) part cement to 1 parts fine
sand, mixed to a mushy consistency, shall be used. CONTRACTOR
shall allow for setting before the next coat is applied. If no bonding
coat is required, the surface shall receive a neat cement wash. For
interior plasterwork, properly regulated ventilation shall be provided.
In dry windy conditions all precautions shall be taken to avoid
plaster drying out before the curing is complete.
9.1.2 Installation of Galvanized Rib Lath / Metal Lath
9.1.2.1 Rib lath shall be installed with the ribs against the supports. When
installed on stud walls, ribs shall run horizontally and the lath shall
be paper backed. Rib metal lath with edge ribs greater than 3 mm
shall be lapped at the sides by nesting the outside ribs. When edge
ribs are 3 mm or less, rib metal lath may be lapped 12 mm at the
sides, or outside ribs may be nested. Where the end laps of sheets
do not occur over supports, they shall be lapped 25 mm and
securely tied together with not less than 16 Ga. wires.
9.1.2.2 Metal lath shall be lapped not less than 12 mm on the sides and 25
mm at the ends. Wire fabric lath shall be lapped not less than one
mesh on the sides and end laps shall not be less than 25 mm.
9.1.2.3 Sheets of lath shall be secured to studs using appropriate fasteners.
9.1.2.4 No vertical joints shall occur in corners, unless corner lath is applied
with wiring edges every 150 mm. Wire mesh shall be stretched tight
in all directions and fastened securely to prevent loose areas.
9.1.2.5 Where masonry walls meet concrete beams or columns, strips of

expanded metal lath shall be installed. This lath shall extend not
less than 150 mm on each surface, in such a manner that cracks in
finished plaster will be eliminated. Corner beads shall be installed
plumb, true and straight, extending full length of angles or as shown
on the drawings and secured at ends not over 300 mm on centers.
9.1.2.6 Corner grounds (screeds) shall be installed at the terminations of

plasterwork or where abutting surfaces are of different materials.
Page 120 of 221

9.1.2.7 37 mm hardened masonry nails shall be used for nailing into

masonry and into holes previously drilled in concrete.
9.1.2.8 Chases less than 300 mm wide in masonry walls shall be covered
with strip lath. Masonry on both sides of chase shall be lapped 75
mm and secured to masonry with masonry nails. Chases more than
300 mm wide shall be bridged with furring channels 300 mm apart,
secured to masonry on both sides of chase and lath as above.
9.1.3 Sand/Cement Render
9.1.3.1 Sand/Cement render shall be mixed in the following proportions by

volume and with just enough sweet water to provide a workable
consistency.
Scratch Coat: 1 part Portland cement to 3 parts sand.
Brown Coat: 1 part Portland cement to 3 parts sand.

Finish Coat: 1 part Portland cement to 4 parts sand. A plasticizing
agent approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer shall be
used in lieu of lime putty.
9.1.3.2 Bonding and/or waterproofing admixtures may be added to the mix

at the discretion of the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
9.1.4 Gypsum Plaster Render (Interior Applications only)
9.1.4.1 Gypsum Plaster shall consist of a scratch and brown coat using
sand/cement render (see above) with a gypsum gauging or neat
plaster finish coat.
9.1.4.2 Gypsum plaster shall be manufactured in full accordance with

ASTM-C-28: 1992.
9.1.5 Plastering Work
9.1.5.1 All mixing shall be carried out using a mechanical mixer. Hand
mixing using a suitable mixing box can be used on approval of the
SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. Plaster materials shall be
thoroughly mixed to a uniform batch of proper consistency. Plaster
shall be mixed in independent batches. No more material shall be
mixed than can be used in one hour and plaster shall not be re-
tempered after it has commenced to set.
9.1.5.2 Mechanical mixers and tools shall be cleaned after mixing each
batch. Tools shall not be rinsed in water to be used for mixing.
Mixing boxes shall be clean and watertight and cleaned after each
days WORK or immediately after use when not in continuous
operation.
Page 121 of 221

9.1.5.3 Plastering on metal lath or metal reinforcement shall be three-coat

WORK, consisting of scratch and finish coats. Thickness from face
of plaster to stud or other backing shall not be less than 22 mm.
9.1.5.4 Plaster on concrete, brick or concrete block masonry shall be two-

coat WORK consisting of a doubled-up base coat and a finish coat.
Thickness shall be sufficient to fill masonry irregularities and at no
point less than 12 mm.
9.1.5.5 The Sand/Cement Render scratch (first) coat shall be applied to a

uniform thickness of approximately 10 mm. Surfaces of masonry or
cast in place concrete shall be thoroughly and evenly dampened but
not saturated immediately preceding the application of the scratch
coat. When the scratch coat is applied to metal reinforcement it shall
be applied with sufficient pressure so that it completely embeds the
reinforcement. Before the scratch coat has hardened it shall be
evenly scored in two directions with a scoring travel capable of
approximately 6 mm grooves. Continuous moist curing by fogging
for 48 hours shall begin when the cement is stable enough not to be
eroded by the water.
9.1.5.6 The scratch coat for tile WORK and the base coat in two-coat
WORK shall be applied in the same method as above.
9.1.5.7 The Sand/Cement Render scratch (second) coat shall be applied to

a thickness of approximately 10 mm 48 hours after application of
first coat. The surface of the scratch coat shall be uniformly damp
before the second coat is applied. Any wall thickness variations
being compensated for in plastering shall be accomplished in this
coat. The surface of the brown coat shall be brought to an even
surface by screeding with a straight edge or floating and left rough
to receive the finish coat. Water shall not be applied during the
screeding and floating operation. The brown coat shall be moist
cured at least 48 hours.
9.1.5.8 The Sand/Cement Render finish coat shall be applied to a thickness

of approximately 3 mm 7 days after application of the brown coat.
The surface of the brown coat shall be uniformly damp when the
finish coat is applied. The material shall be screeded to a true even
surface in all directions. The surface shall be toweled or floated to
produce the texture required by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer or to match approved samples or existing plaster. The
finish coat shall be moist cured for at least 48 hours.
9.1.5.9 Render shall be protected against premature drying, damage,

marking or other defacing.
9.1.5.10 After other construction is completed, cutting, patching, repairing

and pointing-up shall be thoroughly and neatly performed. Cracks,
indentations and other defects shall be raked out or cut out to the
Page 122 of 221

extent of such defects, the surfaces moistened, the imperfections

filled with new render and then flush with adjoining surfaces.
9.1.5.11 Care shall be exercised to avoid soiling or spattering render or

cement mortar on other parts of the building construction. All
doorframes, windows and other surfaces adjacent to rendering
WORK shall be cleaned of all render.
Surfaces of hard wood and window frames shall be protected from

render through all stages. Floors shall be cleaned of all render and
debris and left in acceptable clean condition upon completion of
plastering.
9.1.5.12 The Gypsum Plaster Render first (scratch) and second coats shall
be applied as indicated above for Sand/Cement.
9.1.5.13 The Gypsum Plaster Render finish coat shall be applied to a

thoroughly set and surface dry brown or base coat. Finish shall be
scratched in thoroughly, doubled back and filled out to a true, even,
plumb surface about 1.5 mm to 3 mm thick. Corners, angles and
intersections shall be straight, sharp and true.
9.1.5.14 A smooth plaster finish shall be obtained by toweling the gypsum

neat/gauging plaster with water and a steel trowel to a smooth, true
surface, free of blemishes. Rough finish plaster shall be obtained by
water floating with wood, carpet or cork float to an even surface
texture required by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
9.2 REPAIR OF SAND /CEMENT PLASTER AND GYPSUM PLASTER.

9.2.1 Plaster Removal
9.2.1.1 Locate all hollow sounding areas using hammer. Remove all
delaminated or deteriorated plaster, taking care not to crack or
otherwise damage remaining plaster. Where corrosion to metal rib
lath is visible, remove plaster around and behind lath until
continuous length of 50mm. of clean and non corroded lath has
been exposed from sound plaster.
9.2.2 Metal Rib Lath
9.2.2.1 Replace all corroded metal lath including paper backing. Paper
backing shall be 6 mils thick TYVEK type vapor barrier. Metal
lath shall be lapped 25mm to existing and securely tied together

with no less than gauge 16 wire. If lap occurs over supports, they
shall be fixed with 32mm long x 16 gauge annealed wires.
9.2.3 Plastering
9.2.3.1 Proportions, mixing and plastering of sand/cement and gypsum

plaster shall be done as specified above.
Page 123 of 221

9.3 GYPSUM BOARD
9.3.1 Install gypsum board to timber or metal stud walls or ceiling applications.
9.3.2 Prior to installation of gypsum board, check all stud or joists for any defective
members. Inform the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer of any defects.
Defects shall be corrected as instructed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer in writing. Replacement of defective members is covered in other
sections of this Schedule "B". Ensure that all joists or studs are plumb, level
and true to line, adjust where required. Install gypsum board with all edges
and ends occurring on the center of framing or joist members. Edges of
adjoining sheets shall be in moderate contact, do not force it. Gypsum board
shall be neatly cut to fit around openings. Provide corner beads whenever
required.
9.3.3 Fasteners shall be spaced not less than 9 mm from edges and ends of
gypsum wallboard.
9.3.4 Where wallboard is to receive ceramic tiles over 6.35mm mortar, board shall
be fastened at 100mm on centers.
9.3.5 Hold board in firm contact with the supporting member while the fasteners are
being driven. Fasteners shall proceed from central position of the boards
towards the edges and ends.
9.3.6 Fastening of gypsum board shall be with screw type fasteners. For vertical
application of board, screw fasteners shall be spaced a maximum of 200mm
on centers, staggered along the application. Screw fasteners shall be spaced
a maximum of 300mm on centers along the abutting end joints. Screws shall
be power driven with electric screwdriver and set so that the screw head
provides a slight depression below the surface of the board without tearing
through the face paper.
9.3.7 Fire Rated Gypsum Board: Type X shall conform to ASTM C-36.
9.3.8 Water/Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: Type "WR" shall conform to ASTM
C-630.
9.3.9 Ordinary Gypsum board: Shall conform to ASTM C-36.
9.3.10 Type X (special fire resistant) water resistant: Shall conform to ASTM C
630.
9.3.11 Fasteners shall be designated Type S complying with ASTM C-646 for non
load bearing and Type S-12 screw for load bearing.
9.3.12 Corner beads: galvanized steel produced specifically for drywall construction.
Note: For taping and jointing refer to the Painting Section 9.0 of this
Attachment IV to Schedule B, and Community Maintenance Painting
Manual.
Page 124 of 221

9.4 TILE WORK
The WORK shall include but not be limited to the following:
9.4.1 Preparation of sub-base for the installation of ceramic tile, quarry tile, marble
tile, mosaic tile, terrazzo tile, granite and slate tile to walls and/or floors. The
sub bases shall be of varying types, i.e.; plywood, concrete, plaster, block
WORK or sand bed.
9.4.2 In certain wet room areas, a waterproof tanking system, BAL WP-1 Tanking
System or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal shall be applied to the floor sub-
base prior to laying new tiles.
9.4.3 Set out and lay ceramic, quarry, marble, mosaic, granite and slate tiles or
approved equal in accordance with the specific project Scope of WORK and
the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer instructions. Ceramic, quarry, marble,
mosaic, granite and slate tiles shall be set using adhesives such as dry set
mortar, epoxy ceramic tile adhesive, organic tile adhesive or other
appropriate approved methods as specified by tile manufacturers. Ceramic
tiles shall be installed complete with internal/external corner tiles for walls and
cove base for floors.
9.4.4 Tiles shall be laid in a grid pattern. Align joints when joining tiles on floor,
base, walls and trim where tiles are of the same size. Set out and adjust tile
to minimize tile cutting. Consult tile manufacturer's instructions for
recommended expansion joints.
9.4.5 Install ceramic tiles complete with external and internal corner tiles
accessories and cove base.
9.4.6 Ceramic, quarry, marble, granite, mosaic and slate tiles shall be grouted
using the required epoxy grout or grout appropriate to the tiles being set.
Force maximum of grout into joints. Follow grout manufacturers instructions
explicitly. Before grout sets, strike or tool the joints of tile to depth of cushion.
Fill all gaps. Do not permit cement or adhesive to show through grouted
joints. Apply Protective Sealer to all areas prior to grouting.
9.4.7 Dilute acid and wash over existing tiles. Scrub tile area and wash down with
sweet water. Repeat procedure until desired finished is obtained.
9.4.8 Polish marble floor finish using #4 stone. Polish (final) marble flooring using
#5 stone. Place protection board on finished area. Repeat procedure until
desired finished is obtained.
9.4.9 Leave finished installation free from excess grout, chipped, cracked, broken,
un-bonded or otherwise defective tile WORK. Protect installed tile WORK
with Kraft paper or other heavy duty covering during the construction period.
9.4.10 Perform all activities necessary to re-grout/grout new and existing floor, wall
or pool tiles. All surfaces must be cleaned, prepared and applied with
protective sealer prior to grouting.
9.4.11 After grouting to new and existing floor tiles is completed and when grout has
cured, apply tile sealer to ceramic floor tiles, terracotta, slate, terrazzo tiles,
etc.
Page 125 of 221

9.4.12 Materials
9.4.12.1 Ceramic Floor Tiles: Complying with ANSI A-137.1.; 6,5 mm thick;
slip resistant; edges as per project requirement, impact resistant
with a minimum breaking strength of 113kg in accordance with
ASTM C 648, rated frost resistant as determined by ASTM C
1026, water absorption shall be 0.50 maximum percent in
accordance with ASTM C 373, Minimum coefficient of friction shall
be 0.50 in accordance with ASTM C1028, Class IV Plus-Extra
Heavy Traffic durability classification when tested in accordance to
ASTM C 1027.
OR
KERASTAR Series by H&R Johnson Ceramic International,
KER 24 Jason, 8.5mm thick.
Sizes: 100mm x 100mm
150mm x 150mm
200mm x 200mm
or
KERASTAR Series by H&R Johnson Ceramic International,
KER 25 Primus, 8.5mm thick.
150mm x 150mm
200mm x 200mm
or
9.4.12.2 Ceramic Wall Tiles: ANSI A137.1, Std. Grade; Pre-grouted self
trimming sheets of 4-1/4 x 4-1/4 modular tiles with trim; bright
glazed; 7mm thick; Semi-gloss.; Supplied as set. Complying with
ANSI A-137.1.; 8 mm thick; edges as per project requirement,
impact resistant with a minimum breaking strength of 41kg in
accordance with ASTM C 648, rated frost resistant as determined
by ASTM C 1026, water absorption shall be 0.50 maximum
percent in accordance with ASTM C 373.
OR
PRISMATICS Series by H&R Johnson Ceramic International,
PRG11 Shark Gloss, 6.5mm thick.
150mm x 150mm
200mm x 200mm
OR
PRISMATICS Series by H&R Johnson Ceramic
International, PRS15 Shark Satin, 6.5mm thick.
Page 126 of 221


150mm x 150mm
200mm x 200mm
OR
9.4.12.3 Quarry Tiles: Standard grade vitreous clay, unglazed, slip
resistant; 13mm () thick; abrasion and acid resistant, complying
with ANSI A 137.1. (Similar to SAP 1000188582).
9.4.12.4 Mosaic Tiles: Ceramic porcelain, unglazed, abrasion and acid
resistant 6mm () thick X 25mm (1) square set on 600mm (2) x
300mm (1) standard sheet, complying with A 137.1. (Similar to
SAP 1000188412)
9.4.12.5 Terrazzo Tiles: combination of resin matrix with rich colored
marble, granite or other aggregates, sealed to produce a glass like
finish. Factory ground and polished finish, 19mm thick. Meets the
minimum required compressive strength as per ASTM C 140,
flexural strength per ASTM C 293, water absorption per ASTM C
140, static coefficient of friction per ASTM C 1028.
9.4.12.6 Granite Tiles: Standard Saudi Granite in accordance with ASTM C
615, Architectural Grade, polished or flamed or honed finish,
20mm thick and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 97
for Absorption and Density, ASTM C99 for Modulus of Rupture,
ASTM C170 for Compressive Strength, ASTM C241 for Abrasion
Resistance and ASTM C880 for Flexural Strength. All granite for
shall be obtained from quarries having adequate capacity and
facilities to meet specified requirements. All granite shall be free of
flaws, reeds, rifts, laminations, cracks, seams, or other defects
which may impair its strength, durability or functions. Exposed
surfaces shall be free from spots, spells, chips, stains,
discoloration or other defects.
9.4.12.7 Marble Tiles: Shall be in accordance with ASTM C 503,
Architectural Grade, polished or flamed or honed finish, 20mm
thick and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 97 for
Absorption and Density, ASTM C99 for Modulus of Rupture, ASTM
C170 for Compressive Strength, ASTM C241 for Abrasion
Resistance and ASTM C880 for Flexural Strength. All granite for
shall be obtained from quarries having adequate capacity and
facilities to meet specified requirements. All granite shall be free of
flaws, reeds, rifts, laminations, cracks, seams, or other defects
which may impair its strength, durability.
9.4.12.8 Adhesives: Waterproof and epoxy type compatible with tiles
installed, pigmented to match tile color as follows:
1. for Walls: BAL Flex or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
2. for Floors: BAL Fastflex or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.

Page 127 of 221
3. BAL Marblefix or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal for marble,

granite and slate tiles.
9.4.12.9 Grout; Waterproof and epoxy type compatible with tiles installed,
pigmented to match tile color as follows:
1. for Floor: BAL Floor Epoxy Grout (except for granite and
marble) or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
2. for Wall: BAL Wall Epoxy Grout (except for granite and marble)
or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
3. for Granite and Marble: Latapoxy SP 100 Epoxy Grout. or

9.4.12.10 Sealer: BAL protective Sealer or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal. Use two (2) coats of protective sealer before applying
grout; applied in accordance with the manufacturers instruction.
9.4.12.11Tile Sealer: BAL Impregnating Tile Sealer or SAUDI ARAMCO

approved equal deep penetrating sealer.
9.5 ACOUSTIC CEILING SYSTEM
9.5.1 Prior to starting any WORK, check the progress of other trades WORK which
may be affected by the installation of suspended ceiling such as A.C.
ductwork, electrical and plumbing.
9.5.2 Check perimeter walls for straightness and protrusions that may affect the
installation. Where required and instructed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer, correct any defects in the wall surfaces.
9.5.3 Establish a datum point, datum shall be permanently marked, the datum point
shall be checked and confirmed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
Using a water level or other approved means, establish the level from the
datum line around the perimeter of the room to receive the suspended ceiling
system. Starting from one corner, install the wall angle plate to the previously
set level. Wall angle plate shall be drilled, plugged and screwed to the wall
surface. Fixings shall be no less than 600 mm o.c. Set out centers for
installation of main Tee runners. Mark sub- ceiling and chalk line the
centerline of tees.
9.5.4 Install suspension hanger plates fixed to sub-ceiling at no more than 1.3
meters o.c. Fixings will be dependent upon type of sub-ceiling base, i.e.
wood or concrete, etc. Centers for Tee runners shall vary according to type
of lay in tile; min 600 mm o.c., max. 1.3 meters o.c. Tie on and drop down
hanger wire from the sub- ceiling to the established height of the suspended
ceiling. Hanger wire shall be no less than 12 gauges galvanized, with no less
than six turns of the hanger wire around the diameter of the hanger wire.
Continue until all hanger wire is in place. Install main Tee runners to
suspension hanger wire and adjust to the same level as the wall plate angle.
Continue until all Tee runners are installed. At all joints in main Tee runners,
Page 128 of 221
install a stiffener to ensure all joints stay lined up with each other and no
deflections occur. Install cross Tees slotted into main Tees at varying centers
from 600 mm min to 1.3 meters max. Ensure cross Tees line up with the
bottom edge of the main Tee runner. Cross Tee centers may vary due to
installation of lay in electrical fluorescent fixtures, A.C. supply and return air
grills, speakers and other apparatus.
9.5.5 Where fluorescent fixtures are to be installed the four corners of the Tee at
the extremity of the fixture shall have additional hanger wire installed to carry
the load, and eliminate deflections. When works by other trades within the
void space are completed, lie in acoustical tiles and hold down clips.
9.5.6 Install acoustic ceiling tiles level and plumb.
9.5.7 Suspension Systems
9.5.7.1 Type: Exposed T grid. Structural classification shall as a minimum
be intermediate-duty in accordance with ASTM C635. All
components of system shall be from one manufacturer.
9.5.7.2 Main, Cross and Concealed Members: Commercial grade rolled

steel, minimum thickness of 0.5 mm, preprinted white finish. Color to
match for ACT-1. Web design shall be double. Exposed flange, 25
mm width.
9.5.7.3 Edge molding: Minimum 0.5 mm commercial grade rolled steel,

channel or angel shaped, with minimum flag width of 25 mm.
9.5.7.4 Hold down Clips: Type as supplied by suspension system

manufacturer which allow tile removal.
9.5.8 Rough Suspension Systems

9.5.8.1 Hanger Wire: Minimum Ga.9 galvanized soft-annealed, mild steel
wire.
9.5.8.2 Wire Ties: 1.2 mm (Ga.18), galvanized annealed steel wire
9.5.9 Acoustical Ceiling Units
9.5.9.1 Regular: Lay-in Acoustical Panels: Unless otherwise indicated, shall

be mineral fiber board fissured; heat resistant, factory applied vinyl
latex paint or acrylic coating finish, NON SAG, white 600 mm x 600
mm grid size (or 600mm x 1200mm) x 19 mm (or 16mm) thick.
Flame spread 25 or under, according to ASTM E-1264 and Fed.
Spec. SS--S-1188; NRC range 0.50 to 0.65. STC range 40-44; light
reflective LRI over 75%.
9.5.9.2 Regular (washable): Lay-in Acoustical Panels: Unless otherwise

indicated, shall be mineral fiber board fissured; water and heat
resistant, washable, factory applied vinyl latex paint or acrylic
coating finish, NON SAG, white 600 mm x 600 mm grid size (or
600mm x 1200mm) x 19 mm thick. Flame spread 25 or under,
Page 129 of 221

according to ASTM E-1264 and Fed. Spec. SS--S-1188; NRC range

0.50 to 0.65. STC range 40-44; light reflective LRI over 75%.
9.6 RESILIENT FLOORING
9.6.1 Prior to the installation of vinyl tiles or linoleum floor covering, examine the
floor for any irregularities that would cause a fault in the finished flooring.
Report any irregularities to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
Irregularities shall be corrected as instructed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer. Upon completion of patching irregularities, ensure the sub-floor is
in sound condition with no squeaky or springy floorboards and perfectly clean
from all foreign materials.
9.6.2 Cut fit and lay vinyl tiles and linoleum floor covering to prepared and
thoroughly cleaned sub-base floor. Floor covering shall be adhered to sub-
floor with a suitable tile adhesive as recommended by the tile manufacturer.
Lay polyethylene plastic film to protect floor covering.
9.6.3 Lay all tiles symmetrically about axis lines and toward outside edges, both
directions. No tile shall be less than 1/3 tile. Lay tile in straight lines, in perfect
alignment, without offsets in joints and as per manufacturer's directions. All
joints shall be tight, closed and even. All surfaces shall be in true, level plane,
with no raised corners or edges. Do not roll tile. Extend tile into recesses,
openings and all similar conditions.
9.6.4 Cut edges of all tiles to fit accurately at walls, vertical surfaces, offsets and at
joining of tile and other floor finishes. Cut holes for pipes neatly so that floor
plates or flanges cover same.
9.6.5 Install reducer strips at all door openings.
9.6.6 Clean all newly installed vinyl tiles and linoleum floor covering with approved
cleaner after installation. Leave tiles clean and in perfect condition at
completion of project. Cleaning shall be done using wax polish stripper,
concentrated liquid detergent and floor wax in liquid form. Waxing of floor
shall be carried out in three (3) applications. Allow for drying after each
application.
9.6.7 Clean and polish existing resilient floorings.
9.6.8 Vinyl Tiles: vinyl composition, marbleized pattern; Grade Type B Standard; 3
mm thick. ARMSTRONG EXCELON Stonetex Series (any color) or SAUDI
ARAMCO approved equal. Provide gray color non static type for
communication/data rooms.
9.6.9 Linoleum: Shall be Castilian by ARMSTRONG or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal. 1.65 mm thick.
9.6.10 Adhesive: Shall be multi-purpose, water based, water resistant, non-

flammable and trowel or brush applied. (Similar to SAP 1000190035).
Page 130 of 221

9.6.11 Floor Cleaner (for Resilient Flooring): ARMSTRONG S 485 or SAUDI

9.6.12 Floor Polish (for Resilient Flooring); ARMSTRONG S 480 or SAUDI

9.7 CARPET
WORK includes installation or replacement of carpet including required accessories

such as underpadding, clamp down, strip and etc.
9.7.1 Prior to the installation of floor covering, examine the floor for any
irregularities that would cause a fault in the finished flooring. Report any
irregularities to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. Irregularities shall be
corrected as instructed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. Upon
completion of patching irregularities, ensure the sub-floor is in sound
condition with no squeaky or springy floorboards and perfectly clean from all
foreign materials.
9.7.2 To prepared floor surface which should be thoroughly clean and free from any
foreign matter, install carpet tack strip to perimeter of all rooms. Carpet tack
strip shall be fixed by masonry nails at no less than 225 mm o.c. Where
carpet is to abut sheet vinyl or ceramic tile finishes a transition strip in
conjunction with tack less strip shall be installed. Install thresholds where
required.
9.7.3 Cut and lay within the perimeter of the tack strip, carpet underlayment.
Seams shall be tightly abutted and securely taped with 50 mm wide water
proof tape as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
9.7.4 Measure each space to receive carpeting as a basis for cutting and seaming
the carpet. Carpeting shall be laid out and roughly cut to the size required. All
cuts under doors shall be made so that edges will lie at the mid- point of the
thickness of the door when the door is in the closed position. No cross
seams will be allowed within door openings or within 300 mm of door
opening. Seams in carpet shall be joined using a hot melting seaming tape
and sealing gun. Carpeting shall be laid with all tufting parallel with edges and
in one direction, unless otherwise directed. All carpeting shall be stretched
tightly so it will remain free of wrinkles. Lines in carpet shall not be crooked by
stretching. Carpet shall be stretched using commercial grade carpet stretcher
and knee kickers.
9.7.5 Upon completion of installation, carpet shall be protected from soiling by
polyethylene plastic film. The installation of polyethylene plastic film is
considered to be included as part of this Scope for carpet laying.
9.7.6 Carpet Roll: 100% polyester yarn; tufted cut pile; 12.5mm pile height
(finished);1900 grams/ M pile weight; 5.5 yarn count; 43 stitches per 10 cm;
gauge 3.175mm; 33mm tuft length; primary backing woven polypropylene;
latex coating SBR latex at 1000 grams per M; total weight 3.1 kg per M;
total thickness 15mm, color fastness wet minimum standard 4; dry min.
standard 4 and light min. standard 5; dyeing method piece dyed carpet; tuft
lock min. 2.5 kg. (Similar to SAP 1000210255).
Page 131 of 221

9.7.7 Tape: carpet weld, iron heat, 76.2 mm (3 in) wd wd, 1.78 mm (0.070 in) thick,
20.12 m (22 yd) lg, brown with black and white, fiberglass, paper backing
9.7.8 Carpet Strip: 25.4 mm (1 in) wd x 1.2 m (4 ft) lg x 7.1 mm (9/32 in) thick,
wood, tackless, pre-set thin concrete nails 6.4 mm (1/4 in) pin ht. (SAP
1000210936).
9.7.9 Underpad: carpet, 1.8-2.0 m (6-6.56 ft) wd x 18.3-20.0 m (60-65.57 ft) long x
1.3-1.5 cm (1/2 to 19/32 in) x 12.7-14.98 mm thick roll, polyester
polyurethane, underpadding, flat, slit, meets requirements of ASTM E-84 &
FHA UM72 tear strength 1.1 KG (2.4 lb), 35.2 kg/m 3 (2.2 lb/ft3). (Similar to
SAP 1000211067).
9.7.10 Clamp Down: Carpet, metal, silver color, 34.9mm (1-3/8) wide X 3.7M (12)
long X 8mm (11/32) high. (Similar to SAP 1000210270)
9.7.11 MOSQUE CARPET:
9.7.11.1 Manufacturing type: Wall to wall Special Mosque
Carpet.
9.7.11.2 Pile Quality and Material: Pile is 100 % Acrylic
Woven Cut Pile. Wool threads are fixed before
weaving by washing with hot water. Also they
cleaned from oil and dirt in hygienic limits.
9.7.11.3 Mothproof :Treated with anti-moth Eulan SPA,
Antibacterial
9.7.11.4 Flammability: It meets the requirements of Bfl S1
Flammability as per European Norm EN 13501 with
report no. 390807 of Germany-Aachen University
Textiles and Flooring Institute.
9.7.11.5 Weft Material: 100 % Super Quality Jute Warp
Material: 65/35 P/C (NE 12 extra-ring). (8 time
conveyor, 4 time link)
9.7.11.6 Backing :Latex ( Vinyl-Acrylic Copolymer )
9.8 CARPET TILE
9.8.1 Prior to the installation of floor covering, examine the floor for any
irregularities that would cause a fault in the finished flooring. Report any
irregularities to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. Irregularities shall be
corrected as instructed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. Upon
completion of patching irregularities, ensure the sub-floor is in sound
condition with no squeaky or springy floorboards and perfectly clean from all
foreign materials.
9.8.2 Cut fit and lay carpet tile to prepared and thoroughly clean sub-base floor.
Carpet tile shall be adhered to sub-floor with a suitable carpet tile adhesive as
recommended by the carpet tile manufacturer. Lay polyethylene plastic film to
protect carpet tile.
Page 132 of 221

9.8.3 Lay all tiles symmetrically about axis lines and toward outside edges, both
directions. No tile shall be less than 1/3 tile. Lay tile in straight lines, in perfect
alignment, without offsets in joints and as per manufacturer's directions. All
joints shall be tight, closed and even. All surfaces shall be in true, level plane,
with no raised corners or edges. Do not roll tile. Extend tile into recesses,
openings and all similar conditions.
9.8.4 Cut edges of all tiles to fit accurately at walls, vertical surfaces, offsets and at
joining of tile and other floor finishes. Cut holes for pipes neatly so that floor
plates or flanges cover same.
9.8.5 Install reducer strips at all door openings.
9.8.6 Upon completion of installation, carpet shall be protected from soiling by
polyethylene plastic film. The installation of polyethylene plastic film is
considered to be included as part of this Scope for carpet laying.
9.8.7 Carpet tile; heavy contract; tufted loop pile tile; 100% noval contract; graplex
tile backing; 2.5mm pile height; 6.5mm total thickness; 4000 grams/m;
450mm (18) x 450mm (18); MOIRE PLUS #1219, Bronze Header shall be
by INTERFACE.
9.8.8 Adhesive: Shall be multi-purpose, water based, water resistant, non-
flammable and trowel or brush applied. (Ref. SAP 1000190035).
9.9 CARPET CLEANING
9.9.1 Prepare, shampoo and remove all stain and clean carpet/carpet tiles and
leave in dry condition. (All WORK will be performed by Big Red Machine
and/or by alternative Heavy Industrial Carpet Shampoo or Cleaning Machine
in occupied and unoccupied areas). Hoover and clean all dirt, dust from
carpet by Big Red and/or alternative Heavy Industrial Carpet Machine.
9.9.2 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the removal of equipments or

appliances and furniture affected by the WORK and subsequently re-install
on completion of WORK.
9.10 WALL COVERING
9.10.1 Prior to installation, prepare all surfaces ready to receive new covering.
Ensure that all surfaces shall be sound, dry and clean.
9.10.2 Plaster and masonry surfaces shall not contain more than 5.5 % moisture.
9.10.3 Glossy surfaces shall be either be sanded to dull the surface.
9.10.4 Remove mildew from walls and treat surface to inhibit further mildew growth.
9.10.5 On drywalls fill all nail heads; fill, tape and fill seams or joints then sand
smooth.
9.10.6 Sand down and clean before applying adhesive to prepared surface. Ensure
all bubbles are removed from under the wall covering.
Page 133 of 221

9.10.7 Install wall covering, ensuring that adhesive is mixed thoroughly and applied
at the back of the covering evenly.
9.10.8 Wall covering shall be 1.5mm thick ACROVYN vinyl wall covering; various
texture and color or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
9.11 PLAIN BOARD (Interior Wall and Ceiling)
CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK, which shall include, but not be limited to,
preparing and performing all activities necessary in the installation and fixing plain
wall board.
9.11.1 MATERIAL
9.11.1.1 Plain Board: glass fiber cloth reinforced board; fire resistant and
moisture tolerant; ASK Speedwall or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equal.
9.11.2 INSTALLATION
9.11.2.1 Using a chalk line and level, establish a base course line around
the perimeter of the building; base line shall be a minimum of
150mm above the finish grade level. Starting from the corner, install
board in a vertical pattern from the base line. Board shall be fixed
with non corrosive 6d deformed shank nails or self tapping screws
using necessary pneumatic tools, at 150mm on centers at edges
and 300mm 0n centers at intermediate supports. Continue in the
same manner with additional boards until the whole area is covered.
9.11.2.2 Boards shall be neatly cut and trimmed to allow window and door
openings, 8mm gap should be maintained where boards abut each
other and other framework. Perform necessary caulking as required.
Horizontal nailers shall be installed at intersection where horizontal
joints occur.
9.11.2.3 Eaves and soffits shall be treated in the same manner for
installation.
9.12 PAINTING
9.12.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform WORK which shall include but not be limited to
all applicable procedures and activities necessary during the preparation and
application of interior and/or exterior painting. All painting WORK shall meet
the requirements of all applicable SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standards
(such as SAES H-001, H-003, H-100, H-101, H-102, ETC.).
9.12.2 Paint used in successive field coats shall be produced by the same
manufacturer. Paint used in the first coat over previously painted surfaces
shall cause no wrinkling, lifting or other damage to underlying paint.
Page 134 of 221

9.12.3 If finished surfaces do not match approved samples for color, texture and
coverage, due to CONTRACTOR using incorrect batch number supplied
paint, it shall be removed and/or re-painted at no extra cost to SAUDI
ARAMCO.
9.12.4 The term "PAINT", as used herein, means all coating systems materials
including primers, emulsions, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers and other
approved materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coat.
9.12.5 Materials
9.12.5.1 Paint materials shall be products of Hempel Industrial Coatings,

unless described otherwise or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
9.12.5.2 CONTRACTOR is totally responsible to provide proper storage of

the material in order to prevent damage, deterioration and
pilferage. All paint shall be delivered to WORK Site in their original
unopened containers with labels intact. Paint shall be stored
inside and protected against hot weather. No adulterant,
unauthorized thinner or other material not included in the paint
formulation shall be added to the paint for any purpose.
CONTRACTOR Supplied materials shall be obtained from the
source recommended by SAUDI ARAMCO in this Contract or
other sources with equal specifications and quality and shall be
approved by Company Representative. Surface preparation and
application shall be in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO Paint
and Coating System or in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions.
9.12.6 Wet Abrasive Blasting
9.12.6.1 Wet Abrasive Blasting is a proven, safe and cost-effective and

versatile method for removal of a wide variety of coatings with no
messy chemicals and no dusty sandblasting.
9.12.6.2 Conventional blasting abrasives like grit, soda bicarbonate (Soda

Blasting), garnet, wet or dry, are mixed with water in a pressure
vessel. Water pressure from an onboard internal pump forces the
mixture (80% abrasive, 20% water) from the vessel to the
compressor-generated air-stream, where it is accelerated towards
the blasting nozzle. Through a metering system, the quantity and
pressure of the abrasive mixture is adjustable at any time. The
result is a versatile, economic and environmentally safe wet
abrasive blasting process.
9.12.6.3 CONTRACTOR shall provide blasting equipments, abrasives and

etch required to complete the WORK.
9.12.6.4 Grit Blasting Material: Garnet; 30-60 mesh grit natural mineral;
used to produced an anchor pattern of 1.5-2.5 mils at a nozzle
pressureof 690 KPa (100 psi), hardness more than 7.5 mohs
Page 135 of 221

scale, specific gravity more than 4.0 semi angular grain shape,
free silica nil, chlorides and sulfates less 250 ppm each.
9.12.6.5 CONTRACTOR shall comply with SAUDI ARAMCO requirements

on abrasive blasting contained in G.I. 6.021 and Section II 11 of
the SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety Manual.
9.12.7 CONTRACTOR shall ensure no painting of any moving parts of operating

units, mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators, linkages,
sensing devices, motor shafts or labels, unless otherwise instructed by the
9.12.8 CONTRACTOR shall use all means necessary to protect the paint coatings,
during and after paint coating completion and protect WORK and materials
of other trades during painting activities. Protection material such as drop
cloth, plastic sheet, masking tape shall be supplied by CONTRACTOR.
9.12.9 Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with the

Manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for
the material and surfaces to which applied, inclusive but not be limited to
brush, roller and airless spray. Apply additional coats when undercoats,
stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, until paint film is of
a uniform finish, color and appearance. Finish exterior and/or interior, doors
and tops, and edges to match face side, unless otherwise indicated. Apply
each material at not less than the Manufacturer's recommended spreading
rate, to create a total dry film thickness acceptable to the SAUDI ARAMCO
Project Engineer for the entire coating system of prime and finishing coat
for 3 coat WORK and for 2 coat WORK.
9.12.10 Painting Inspection
9.12.10.1 Surface preparation and each coating application shall be

checked and approved by SAUDI ARAMCO CMD Central
Painting Unit prior to CONTRACTOR proceeding with the next
stage of the WORK.
9.12.10.2 CONTRACTOR shall notify the SAUDI ARAMCO Project

Engineer for inspection requirement at each stage.
9.12.10.3 CONTRACTOR shall submit inspection sheets for each stage of

WORK i.e. preparation, primer, undercoats and final coats all to
be approved by C&BMD Central Painting Unit.
9.12.11 Coating System
9.12.11.1 Texture and Paint New Gypsum Board Wall and Ceiling
A. Surface Preparation
a. Knock back any protruding nail heads. Fill all nail heads
with joint compound. Apply one coat of joint compound
Page 136 of 221

with Broad Flexible scraper or Spatula to the open joint

follow immediately by applying joint tape over the
compound. Pressing firmly but carefully with a broad
knife. Run down the full length of tape squeezing out any
excess of joint compound. Allow to dry. Apply second
coat of joint compound leveling and overlapping the
taped joint. Allow to dry. Apply third coat of joint
compound overlapping previous coating. Allow to dry.
Sand down and smooth all taped joints and nail heads.
Remove dust and fill top of base board all round with
joint compound. Apply Acrylic Sealant to the gap
between the wall board and door/window frames by
using a Caulking gun. Wipe off excess with damp cloth.
Materials
Filler: U.S.G. Ready Mixed joint Compound.

Tape: Paper joint tape Similar to SAP 1000188384.
B. Coating System
a. Apply Hempel 28830 or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal.
b. Apply Hempel 58840 or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal. Flatten surface to achieve the required texture.
c. Apply first Topcoat of Hempel 58710, Flat, P 2354 or

d. Apply second coat of Hempel 58710, Flat, P 2354 or

Note: For Silk Gloss Finish use Hempel 58330 as topcoat,

for gloss finish use Hempel 58650 or SAUDI
9.12.11.2 Interior Walls and Ceilings on Existing Textured Surfaces.
a. Check and remove any loose or flaking texture by using

a stiff bladed scraper. Do not use a flexible filling knife.
Re-tape any joints; fill nail heads and slightly feather
around the edge which is left after removal of texture.
Note: Feather is a term used for filling around the edge

of any patch created by the part removal of a paint or
texture coating on walls and ceilings. Fill cracks and
damaged areas. Large cracks shall be opened to a V
shape to allow the filler to adhere. On areas where
Page 137 of 221

texture was removed, apply texture coating by using a

hopper gun. Check for uniformity and apply more texture
and build-up to match existing.
Materials
Filler: U.S.G. Ready Mixed joint Compound.

Tape: Paper joint tape Similar to SAP 1000188384
B. Coating System
a. When all preparation is complete, apply one coat of

Emulsion Paint to all repaired patches and other filled
areas of wall and ceiling. Allow to dry. Use brush & roller.
Apply one coat of Emulsion Paint to entire area and allow
drying. Check and fill any areas as necessary.
Note: One coat should be sufficient to cover because of

similar color of existing coating. When applying Emulsion
Paint always do the cutting first with a 7.62 cm (3 inch)
brush (above baseboards, around door frames, corners
and ceiling lines, etc) then apply Emulsion paint with
roller to remaining wall and ceiling area. This will
eliminate the patchy brush mark effect which is obtained
by using roller first and cutting later.
Materials:
Hempel # 58710 Bridal White P-2534 Flat Emulsion or

Note: For Silk Gloss Finish use Hempel 58330 as

topcoat, for gloss finish use Hempel 58650 or SAUDI
9.12.11.3 Re-Texturing Exterior Walls over Existing Texture Finish
a. Remove all surface dirt, dust and loose material using

Wet Abrasive Blasting with a Soda Bicarbonate abrasive.
Hose down and allow drying. Do not use flexible filling
knives for scraping. Apply one coat of Primer to any bare
areas where old texture has been removed. Apply texture
to same areas and build up to match surrounding
texture. Allow to dry.
B. Coating System
a. Apply one coat of Primer Sealer to the entire surface

using a brush, roller or spray. Allow to dry. Apply one coat
Page 138 of 221

of texture using either Hopper Gun or the Graco 10:1

president Pump. Move the Gun in a circular motion to
eliminate the chance of texture build-up in any one area
and also to ensure a uniform texture coating throughout.
b. Apply one (1) Topcoat.
Materials:
Primer: Hempel 26630 or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal.
Texture: or Saudi ARAMCO approved equal.

Hempel 58850 (Fine)
Hempel 58860 (Medium)
Hempel 58870 (Course)
Topcoat: Hempel 58710 or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equal.
9.12.11.4 New Exterior CMU/Concrete Walls (Texture)
a. Remove all surface dirt, dust and loose material using

Wet Abrasive Blasting with a Soda Bicarbonate abrasive.
Hose down and allow drying.
B. Coating System

using brush, roller or spray. Allow a minimum of 1 hour
before re-coating. Apply one coat of Block Filler to entire
surface, preferably by roller or spray to eliminate and
level any imperfections in the surface. A broad filler knife
can be used as a Squeeze to force the filler into the
holes in the blocks. Apply a second coat of Primer Sealer
over the Block Filler to ensure good adhesion. Allow a
minimum of 1 hour before re-coating. Apply a coat of
texture using either Hopper Gun or the Graco 10:1
President Pump. Move the Gun in a circular motion to
eliminate the chance of texture build-up in any one area
and also to ensure a uniform textured coating
throughout. When the job is complete, remove all
masking and clean up the area.
b. Apply one (1) Topcoat.
Materials:
Page 139 of 221


equal.
Filler: Hempel 380 SA or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equal.
Texture: or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.

Hempel 58850 (Fine)
Hempel 58860 (Medium)
Hempel 58870 (Course)
equal.
9.12.11.5 New Concrete or Rendered Surfaces
a. Remove all surface dirt, dust and loose material by high

pressure washing. Allow to dry.
B. Coating System

using brush, roller or spray. Allow a minimum of 1 hour
before re-coating. Apply one coat of Block Filler to entire
surface, preferably by roller or spray to eliminate and
level any imperfections in the surface. Apply a second
coat of Primer Sealer over the Block Filler to ensure
good adhesion. Allow a minimum of 1 hour before re-
coating.
b. Apply two (2) Topcoats.
Materials:

equal.
equal.
equal.
9.12.11.6 Previously Coated Steel (All WORK shall be in accordance with

SAES H 101, APCS # 6)
a. Remove old coatings where necessary by Wet Abrasive

Blasting using a grit abrasive. Feather the coating edge
around where paint has been removed.
B. Coating System
Page 140 of 221

a. Prime bare areas where paint was removed.

b. Lightly sand down.
c. Apply undercoat.
d. Lightly sand down.
e. Apply topcoat.
Materials
Primer: Hempel 12050 or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.

Undercoat: Hempel 52140 or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equal.
equal.
Note: This is a 3 coat Alkyd system used as an example.

Regardless of system used, it is essential the steel is
thoroughly cleaned where necessary.
9.12.11.7 Unpainted Steel (All works shall be in accordance with SAES

H 101, APCS -6. or APCS-26T)
a. Remove all rust by Wet Abrasive Blasting using a grit

abrasive and rust inhibitor.
B. Coating System
a. Apply one coat of Primer to cleaned steel. Lightly sand to

remove nibs (small particles of dust or dirt which settle
into the wet paint during application). Apply undercoat.
Lightly sand. Apply topcoat of Gloss or Semi Gloss
whichever is the preferred finish.
Materials (High Durability System)

equal. Undercoat: Hempel 4515 or SAUDI
ARAMCO approved equal. Topcoat: Hempel 55210 or
approved equal.
Note: This is a (3) coat Epoxy/Polyurethane system used

as an example. Regardless of system used, it is
essential the steel is thoroughly cleaned.
Materials (Medium Durability System)

equal.
equal.
Page 141 of 221

Note: This is a (2) coat water borne Acrylic system used

as an example. Regardless of system used, it is
9.12.11.8 New/Weathered Galvanized Steel (All WORK shall be in

accordance with SAES H 101, APCS #26T).
D. Surface Preparation
a. The surface preparation consists of simple degreasing

using HEMPEL NAVI WASH 9933 or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal. Remove salt and other contaminants
by (high pressure) sweet water cleaning. All white rust
must be removed by sand papering or light abrasive
sweeping.
b. Totally remove residues of Hempel 99330 by washing

surfaces with sweet water and allow drying completely
before proceeding.
c. All welded joints shall be grit blasted/disc grinded and

then primed prior to application of the coating system.
B. Coating System
a. Apply one coat of Primer to cleaned steel. Lightly sand

to remove nibs (small particles of dust or dirt which
settle into the wet paint during application). Apply
intermediate undercoat and lightly sand. Apply topcoat
of Gloss or Semi Gloss whichever is the preferred
finish.
Materials (High Durability System)

equal. (50 microns DFT).
Intermediate/Undercoat: Hempel 4515 or SAUDI

ARAMCO approved equal. (150 microns DFT).
Note: This is a (3) coats Epoxy/Polyurethane system

used as an example. Regardless of system used, it is
Materials (Medium Durability System)

Page 142 of 221

Intermediate/Undercoat: Hempels 1810 or Saudi
ARAMCO approved equal. (60 microns DFT).

Note: This is a (2) coat water borne Acrylic system

used as an example. Regardless of system used, it is
9.12.11.9 Painting of Garage Door
a. Remove all existing coatings to the bare wood by using

Paint remover and appropriate scrapers. Wash down
with sweet water using a scrubbing brush to remove
any residue. Allow to thoroughly dry. Sand down using
medium grade sandpaper; remove all dust, etc, by
using a dry paint brush. Remove any nails, screws or
other items.
B. Coating System
a. Apply by brush one coat of Hempel 010- FS, allow to

dry. Fill all cracks and damaged areas with Exterior
Filler. Sand down and remove all dust and filler residue
by using a dry paint brush. Apply by brush one coat of
Hempel 1314. Sand down again as before. Apply 1st
coat of Hempel 46600 finish coat. Lightly sand. Apply
final coat of Hempel 46600 finish coat.
Materials
Primer: Hempel 010 FS or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal.
Filler: Hempel 332 SA or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
Epoxy ester Primer: Hempel 1385 or SAUDI ARAMCO

approved equal.
equal.
Note: First coat of 46600 shall be White 1000 so as to

differ from final coat which will be Bridal White P-2534.
9.12.11.10 Paint New Wood
Page 143 of 221

a. Sandpaper to remove the sharp edges. Scrape clean

and remove all dust using a dry paint brush. Ensure the
new wood is dry before painting.
B. Apply Coating System
a. Apply by brush one coat of wood primer. Fill holes and

cracks. Sandpaper and clean down and remove dust
by using a dry paint brush. Apply one coat of Alkyd
Based Undercoat. Sandpaper to smooth finish. Apply
one coat of Alkyd Based Enamel Gloss or Semi Gloss,
whichever finish is desired.
Note: For better covering and a more solid coating,

apply 2 undercoats.
Materials
Wood Primer: Hempel 22460 or SAUDI ARAMCO

approved equal.
Wood Filler Hempel 38900 or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
Undercoat: Hempel 22460 or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
Topcoat: or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
Flat: Hempel 52060
Semi Gloss: Hempel 52080
Gloss: Hempel 52040
Note: Do not use Gypsum joint Compound as wood

filler.
9.12.11.11 Previously Coated Wood Painting
a. Check for condition of coating. If large areas of loose

flaking paint are apparent and spot cleaning and
priming are not sufficient, and then remove all old
coating.
Remove old coatings with paint remover and

appropriate scrapers. Wash down with sweet water and
use a scrubbing brush to remove any residue. Allow to
thoroughly dry out.
B. Coating System
a. Apply by brush one coat of wood primer. Fill holes and

cracks. Sandpaper and clean down and remove dust
by using a dry paintbrush. Apply one coat of Alkyd
Page 144 of 221

Based Undercoat. Sandpaper to smooth finish. Apply

one coat of Alkyd Based Enamel Gloss or Semi Gloss,
whichever finish is desired.
Materials
Wood Primer: Hempel 22460 or SAUDI ARAMCO

approved equal.
Wood Filler Hempel 38900 or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
Undercoat: Hempel 22460 or SAUDI ARAMCO

approved equal.
Topcoat: or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
Flat: Hempel 52060
Semi Gloss: Hempel 52080
Gloss: Hempel 52040
Note: Do not use Gypsum joint Compound as wood

filler.
9.12.11.12 Painting of Exterior Walls on Existing Textured Finish
a. Remove all surface dirt and loose material with Wet

Abrasive Blasting using Soda Bicarbonate abrasive. Fill
cracks and damaged areas. Any large cracks should
be opened out into a V shape to allow the filler to
adhere. On bare areas where texture coating was
removed apply a primer coat and when dry, apply
texture coating to match existing by using a hopper
gun.
Materials

equal.
equal.
Note: Do not use Gypsum joint compound as external

filler.
B. Coating System
a. Apply one coat of Primer Sealer over the entire surface

to be painted. Primer shall be used direct from the can
without thinning, using a brush, roller or spray. Spread
paint out in an even film. Excessive coating will result
in running and an uneven finish. When primer coat is
Page 145 of 221

dry apply 1st coat of exterior quality acrylic emulsion

paint to the surface using the same equipment- brush,
roller or spray. This coat should be a slightly different
color to that of the finishing coat. This will enable
complete coverage and eliminating any chance of
missed areas.
Page 146 of 221

b. After 1st coat is dry apply 2nd coat of finish color.
Materials

equal.
1st/2nd Coat: Hempel 58710 or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
Note: Coating system used is a Hempel coating

system, this is used as an example, and other
manufacturers have similar coating systems which are
also acceptable.
9.12.11.13 Painting of New Gypsum Board Wall with SIPCO Fractals

Designer Finish
a. Knock back any protruding nail heads. Fill all nail

heads with joint compound. Apply one coat of joint
compound with Broad Flexible scraper or Spatula to
the open joint and screw head, follow immediately by
applying joint tape over the compound. Pressing firmly
but carefully with a broad knife. Run down the full
length of tape squeezing out any excess of joint
compound. Allow to dry. Apply second coat of joint
compound leveling and overlapping the taped joint.
Allow to dry. Apply third coat of joint compound
overlapping previous coating. Allow to dry. Sand down
and smooth all taped joints and nail heads. Remove
dust and fill top of base board all round with joint
compound. Apply Acrylic Sealant to the gap between
the wall board and door frames by using a Caulking
gun. Wipe off excess with damp cloth.
B. Coating System (Sipco or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal).
a. Apply Sipco Speed Prime 1406; apply two (2) coats of

Sipco Fractalis Base Coat; apply one (1) coat of Sipco
Fractalis Designer Multicolor; Apply finish Coat of Sipco

Fractals HP Glaze.
9.12.11.14 Sipco Stone Shield Exterior Wall Finish
Page 147 of 221

a. Ensure that all surfaces should be sound, clean, dry

and free from all loose or flaking materials, dirt, chalk,
efflorescence, oil or grease.

equal).
a. Apply Sipco Tex Prime 1408; apply one (1) coat of

Sipco Stone shield 1448; apply two (2) coats wet
on wet of Sipco Stone shield 1448; apply Sipco
Varnish Satin 1317.
9.12.11.15 Sipco Ultra shield Masonry Finish (Exterior)

efflorescence, oil, grease, wax or polish. Fill all cracks
or imperfection with Sipco Exterior Wall filler 1417 or

equal).
a. Apply Sipco Ultra shield Surface Stabilizer 1472; Apply

three (3) coats of Ultra shield High Performance (HP)
Masonry Finish 1475.
Note: First coat of HP Masonry Finish shall be thinned

20% with Sipco Thinner T 710.
9.12.11.16 Sipco Ultra shield Masonry Finish (Interior)

efflorescence, oil, grease, wax or polish. Fill all cracks
or imperfection with Sipco Exterior Wall filler 1417
Sipco or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
.
equal).
a. Apply Sipco Ultra shield Surface Stabilizer 1472; Apply

two (2) coats of Ultra shield Masonry Finish 1474.
9.12.11.17 Sipco Matt Emulsion Coating System
Page 148 of 221

a. Prepare surfaces as previously described above for

different types of surfaces. Ensure that all surfaces
should be sound, clean, dry and free from all loose or
flaking materials, dirt, chalk, efflorescence, oil, grease,
wax or polish. Fill all cracks or imperfection
with Sipco Exterior Wall filler 1416 or 1417 whichever is
appropriate or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.

equal).
a. Apply Sipco Primer Seal 1403; apply two (2) coats of

Sipco Matt Emulsion 1452.
9.12.11.18 Sipco Silk Emulsion Coating System

wax or polish. Fill all cracks or imperfection with Sipco
Exterior Wall filler 1416 or 1417 whichever is
appropriate or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.

equal).
a. Apply Sipco Primer Seal 1403; apply two (2) coats of

Sipco Silk Emulsion 1470.
9.12.11.19 Non Skid Floor Coating System
a. Check and repair damaged surfaces. Ensure that all

surfaces should be sound, clean, dry and free from all
loose or flaking materials, dirt, chalk, efflorescence, oil,
grease, wax or polish.
B. Coating System
a. Apply one (1) coat of Hempel 0597 or SAUDI

ARAMCO approved equal (do not over apply). Allow to
dry. Any glossy areas shall be sanded prior to
application of Topcoat.
b. Apply one (1) Undercoat of Hempel 4523 or SAUDI

Page 149 of 221

c. Apply Hempel 6750 or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal non skid agent while undercoat is still wet.
d. Apply one (1) Topcoat of Hempel 4523 or SAUDI

9.12.11.20 Doors / Windows / Cabinets
A. Clean and rub down using medium grade sand paper, fill
all nail holes and other imperfections, apply one (1)
Varnish Coat (thinned 20%), rub down using fine grade
sand paper, and apply one (1) Varnish coat.
9.12.11.21 Sunshades
A. Scrape, and wire brush to remove all loose coatings. Fill

all holes and cracks, sand down. Apply two (2) coats
solvent base stain (Hempel's RW stain 103 SA, or Sigma
Rusti Kale, or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal).
9.12.11.22 Window Sunscreens
A. Scrape and wire brush to remove all loose coating. Fill all
holes and cracks, sand down. Apply two (2) coats solvent
base stain (Hempel's RW stain 103 SA, or Sigma Rusti
Kale, or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal).
9.12.11.23 Wooden Gates
A. Sand down and remove all loose and peeling paint, apply
two coats solvent base stain (Hempel's RW stain 103 SA,
or Sigma Rusti Kale, or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal).
9.12.11.24 Concrete Wheel Bumpers
A. Remove all surface dirt, dust and loose material by high

pressure washing. Allow to dry then apply two (2) coats of
Hempel 526FS or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
9.12.11.25 Zinsser Exterior Perma White (any new surfaces)

wax or polish.
Page 150 of 221

B. Coating System (Zinsser or SAUDI ARAMCO approved

equal).
a. Apply Zinsser Bulls Eye 1-2-3; apply Zinsser Peel Stop

and Zinseer Ready Patch Spackling Compound to
eliminate any imperfection; apply two (2) coats of
Zinseer Exterior Perma White.
9.12.11.26 Zinsser Exterior Perma White (any existing surfaces)
a. Remove any peeling and flaking coating ; Clean

surfaces using Zinsser Jomax house cleaner and
mildew cleaner as per manufacturers instructions; rinse
surface with air and sweet water. Fill all cracks or
imperfection with Zinsser Peel Stop and Zinseer Ready
Patch Spackling Compound

equal).
a. Apply Zinsser Bulls Eye 1-2-3; apply two (2) coats of

Zinseer Exterior Perma White.
9.12.11.27 Zinsser Bathroom Paint (kitchen and Toilet areas)
a. Clean surfaces using Zinsser Jomax house cleaner

and mildew cleaner as per manufacturers instructions;
rinse surface with air and sweet water.

equal).
a. Apply two (2) coats of Zinseer Perma White Bathroom

Paint.
9.12.11.28 Varnish
A. Fill all nail heads or cracks; sand down to required smooth

surface; dust down and clean; apply three (3) coats of Matt
Polyurethane Varnish. Slightly sand down between
coatings to achieve the required finish.
9.12.12 Lay Plastic Sheet Covering
9.12.12.1 CONTRACTOR shall furnish material. Prepare and lay plastic

sheeting, for all painting jobs, as instructed by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer. Sheeting may be installed or laid
Page 151 of 221

on floors, carpets, stairways, walls, roofs, etc. All necessary

activities must be carried out to ensure sheeting is left in an
acceptable safe condition.
Page 152 of 221

9.12.13 Clean up Work
9.12.13.1 CONTRACTOR shall furnish all cleaning material and plastic

sheet. Schedule plan and prepare complete clean up of house
or building after completion of activities. Cleaning activities
shall include but not be limited to all wall, floor, tiles, sanitary
fixtures, kitchen and bathroom appliances, paint WORK,
carpets, lounges, bedroom, dining areas, windows, screens,
utility rooms, yards, etc. All must be cleaned and left in top
condition and acceptable to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer and Housing Office Inspectors.
9.12.14 Painting Miscellaneous Works:
9.12.14.1 Remove old coatings to existing metal gates and apply new
coating as per Standard.
9.12.14.2 Scrape and sand bi-fold door and apply new paint using
machine spray or airless spray.
9.12.14.3 Scrape and sand down panel board cover and repaint using
9.12.14.4 Scrape and sand down medicine cabinet and repaint using
9.12.14.5 Fill sand and paint wooden baseboard and paint.
9.12.14.6 Apply Brushcrete to newly repaired / constructed concrete

slab.
9.12.14.7 Scrape off and remove defective paint of pipe WORK, sand
down, clean and apply one (1) coat metal primer and two
finishing coats inclusive of pipe supports, saddles, cleats, and
fittings.
9.12.14.8 Prepare and remove existing painted surfaces with paint

stripper. Clean area and leave in good condition.
9.12.14.9 Clean rub down existing door using medium grade sand paper,
fill all nail holes and other imperfections, apply one (1) varnish
coat (thinned 20%) rub down using fine grade sandpaper,
apply one (1) varnish coat undiluted, both sides and all edges.
9.13 Vitriturf & Profile Paint
9.13.1 Contractor shall provide and install Virtiturf System including

shop drawing/design to be approved by the Saudi Aramco. All
Page 153 of 221

materials like Rubber, Adhesive & Resin or equal should be

approved by Saudi Aramco Standard.
a. Install/replace Virtiturf System including design
to be applied on the leveled floor as per
manufacturers manual.
9.13.2 Contractor shall provide and apply the Profile Paint on existing
privacy wall or any prepared flat wall.
9.13.2.1 Base Coat any of the following may be

used.
i. Non-cementitious coat is a ready mixed,

fiber reinforced, non-cementitous 100%
acrylic polymer-based Base Coat that
has good water resistance and vapor
permeability.
9.13.2.2 Adhesive Base Coat.
i. Adhesive Base Coat is polymer-based
admixture that is blended with Type I or
Type II Portland Cement on a 1:1 ratio
by weight.
ii. Dry Adhesive/ Base Coat is a polymer
Base Coat that is mixed with 1 to 2
gallons of water per bag.
iii. Fiber-reinforced, 100 % acrylic-based
product which when mixed with Portland
cement will provide a high-build
exceptionally easy to trowel adhesive,
base, texture or leveling coat.
9.13.2.3 Finish Coat.
acrylic polymer-based Base Coat that
has good water resistance and vapor
permeability.
ii. Functions as the weathering surface. It
is a factory-mixed Finish in various
colors, finishes and textures.
iii. Fine finishes are primed 100% acrylic-
based coating which are offered in
standard colors as well as custom colors
and are designed to be virtually
maintenance-free.
9.13.2.4 Accessories.
i. Control joints, corner beads, corner
reinforcement and casing beads shall be
Page 154 of 221

zinc or galvanized metal as

recommended by manufacturer,
powder-coated to match finish color.
ii. Metal accessories such as corner beads
and control joints shall be lighter that
No. 26 gauge galvanized steel or 0.027
(.69 mm) zinc alloy.
9.13.2.5 Water shall be cold and potable
9.13.2.6 Recommended Manufacturer(s).
i. DRYVIT System Inc.
ii. SENERGY
iii. HENKEL
iv. Any Saudi ARAMCO approved
manufacturer
9.14 EIFS Wall Cladding Complete With Accessories
NOTE: Contractor shall provide necessary materials not limited on installation and
modification if necessary
9.14.1 Masonry Repair

i. Clean deteriorated surface with sweet water
and detergent, remove dust, unsound and
dilapidated materials, plaster, oil, grease,
corrosion deposits or damage.
ii. Apply Nitobond EP by FOSROC or
approved equal bonding agent to affected
areas.
iii. Apply Renderoc TG by FOSROC or
approved equal repair mortar as per
manufacturers instructions.
9.14.2 Cement Fiber Board
i. Fiber-cement siding complete with ASTM C
1186 Type A Grade II.
ii. Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM E
136 as a noncombustible Material.
iii. Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM E
84 Flame.
iv. Spread Index = 0, smoke develop Index = 5.
9.14.3 Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)
i. Installation of all materials required for field
applied weather-resistant Exterior
Insulation and Finish System (Dryvit)
including but not limited to mechanically
attached expanded polystyrene insulation
Page 155 of 221

board, Glass fiber reinforcing mesh, base

coat and textured protective finish coat.
ii. EIFS polystyrene insulation .2psf per inch
and 50mm thick.
9.14.4 Field Constructed Mock-Up (Field Sample
Panel)
i. The mock-up shall be suitable of size as
required to accurately represent the product
being installed, as well as illustrating finish
coat color, surface finish, and texture.
ii. The mock-up shall be prepared with the
same products, tools, and equipment and
installation techniques for the actual
application.
iii. Maintain mock-up on site during
construction for judging all the completed
WORK.
iv. When mock-up is accepted/ approved by
the Saudi ARAMCO Project Engineer, it
may remain as part of the WORK after the
completion of the project.
9.14.5 Warranty
i. CONTRACTOR warrants by his acceptance
of the contract that all WORK done will be
free from defects in materials and
workmanship such as loss of bond, peeling,
flaking/chipping and cracks.
ii. If during the period of fifteen (15) years
minimum from the date of final acceptance
and approval, defects in materials,
workmanship or performance appears, the
CONTRACTOR shall without cost to the
Company, remedy such defects within a
reasonable time to be specified in notice by
Saudi ARAMCO. In default, Saudi ARAMCO
may have such WORK done at the
CONTRACTOR expense.
9.14.6 Insulation Board
i. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation
boards complying with ASTM C-578, Type I,
and ASTM E 2430, produced by a molder
with current ICC-ES evaluation report and
labeled in accordance with the applicable
report or produced by a molder who
participates in an approved third-party
quality assurance program and labeled in
Page 156 of 221

accordance with the applicable code. The

flame spread index of 25 or less and a
smoke developed index of 450 or less when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL
723. The board thickness shall be 50mm or
as specifically shown in the drawings.
ii. B.Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation
boards complying with ASTM C-578, Type I,
and ASTM E 2430, produced by a molder
with current ICC-ES evaluation report and
labeled in accordance with the applicable
report or produced by a molder who
participates in an approved third-party
quality assurance program and labeled in
accordance with the applicable code. The
flame spread index of 25 or less and a
smoke developed index of 450 or less when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL
723. The board thickness shall be 50mm or
as specifically shown in the drawings.
9.14.7 Adhesive: To adhere insulation board to the
substrate.
i. High adhesion mortar to mineral substrates
& Styrofoam boards, vapor permeable,
flexible & resistant to weather conditions.
ii. Cementitious adhesive/base coat, used to
adhere expanded, insulation boards to
substrate & to embed reinforcing mesh as
part of the Dryvit base coat.
9.14.8 Mechanical Fasteners: Used to fasten the
insulation board to substrate.
i. Screw: Minimum # 8 with corrosion-resistant
coating; self-drilling in appropriate length as
required.
ii. Washer: as per System Manufacturers
Standard.
9.14.9 Reinforcing Mesh or Glass Fabric:
i. The reinforcing material is glass fiber mesh
or balanced open-weave fiberglass mesh,
treated for compatibility with other materials
of the system. The fabric shall not be less
than 4.4 oz. (+10%) per square yard, which
shall be embedded into Base Coat at the
time of installation,
9.14.10 Base Coat any of the following may be
used:
Page 157 of 221


acrylic polymer-based Base Coat that has
good water resistance and vapor
permeability.
9.14.11 Adhesive Base Coat
i. Adhesive Base Coat is polymer-based
admixture that is blended with Type I or
Type II Portland Cement on a 1:1 ratio by
weight.
ii. Dry Adhesive/ Base Coat is a polymer Base
Coat that is mixed with 1 to 2 gallons of
water per bag.
iii. Fiber-reinforced, 100 % acrylic-based
product which when mixed with Portland
cement will provide a high-build
exceptionally easy to trowel adhesive, base,
texture or leveling coat.
9.14.12 Finish Coat:
acrylic polymer-based Base Coat that has
good water resistance and vapor
permeability.
ii. Functions as the weathering surface. It is a
factory-mixed Finish in various colors,
finishes and textures.
iii. Fine finishes are primed 100% acrylic-
based coating which are offered in standard
colors as well as custom colors and are
designed to be virtually maintenance-free.
9.14.13 Accessories:
i. Control joints, corner beads, corner
reinforcement and casing beads shall be
zinc or galvanized metal as recommended
by manufacturer, powder-coated to match
finish color.
ii. Metal accessories such as corner beads
and control joints shall be lighter that No. 26
gauge galvanized steel or 0.027 (.69 mm)
zinc alloy.
iii. Water shall be cold and potable.
9.14.14 DRYVIT Color Scheme/Texture
Page 158 of 221

Color SENERGY BASF

DRYVIT SENERGY BASF
Scheme
131 Gull 1043 Gull 869 London
1
Gray/Quarzputz Grey/Putz Fog/Classic
111 Prairie Clay/sand 1052 Prairie Clay 3108
2
Blast Structure Badger/Sahara
112 Sandlewood 1014 Bramble 342
3
Beige/Quarzputz Beige/Putz Parchment/Classic
110 Van Dyke/Sand 1040 Van 875 Grey
4
Blast Dyke/Structure Cloud/Sahara
Gray-Black/Stone Gray-Black/Auroro
5 Gibratar/Terraneo
Coat Stone
10.0 SPECIALTIES
10.1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS AND URINAL SCREEN
10.1.1 Install toilet compartment complete with required accessories, floor or

ceiling mounted.
10.1.2 Install wall mounted urinal screen.
10.1.3 Description: Solid Phenol Core (S. P. C.) with high pressure
matte finish melamine surface. Manufactured in a flat press by combining
decorative laminates saturated in melamine resin with phenol impregnated
Kraft layers at pressure exceeding 1000 psi and temperature approaching
3000 F or 1500 Celsius to form a homogeneous, massive, strong and
extremely durable sheet.
10.1.4 Size: 13 or 19mm thick of limitless width and length to provide one piece
construction with out seams.
10.1.5 Components: Door, Panels, Pilasters, Fittings (Wall connection brackets of
panels and pilasters to be heavy duty full length aluminum U-channels
(powder coated to match color of compartment), Screw (for fastening shall
be stainless steel with plastic plugs), Hardware (surface mounted slide
latch, coat hook, door stop and keeper, and lock indicator shall be heavy
casting non-ferrous alloy, nylon coated of color matching compartment).
10.1.6 Durability: Scratch resistant, water resistant, impervious to steam, soaps,
detergent, termite attack and other chemicals, will not mildew, no droplet
formation, loads of panels/pilasters shall be distributed evenly to existing
walls.
10.1.7 Fire Retardation: Excellent fire resistance - Class I.
10.1.8 Privacy: No gaps between pilasters and doors; no gaps between end
pilasters and existing wall.
10.1.9 Safety: Special key shall be provided so door can be opened from the
outside (for emergency purposes); no emission of toxic fumes in case of
fire; no sharp edges of hardware.
Page 159 of 221
10.1.10 Warranty: Product shall carry a ten (10) years warranty against defective
materials and workmanship.
10.1.11 All materials shall carry a 10-year warranty from the supplier/manufacturer
and this shall be submitted in writing to SAUDI ARAMCO on completion
and acceptance of the works. CONTRACTOR shall warrant by his
acceptance of the contract that all WORK installed shall be free from
defects in workmanship and erection. If during the period of ten years, or as
otherwise specified ,from the date of final acceptance and approval defects
in workmanship or performance appear, CONTRACTOR shall without cost
to SAUDI ARAMCO, remedy such defects within a reasonable time frame
SAUDI ARAMCO may have such WORK done at the cost of
CONTRACTOR.
10.2 LOUVERED VENTS
10.2.1 Install louvered vents complete with required insect screens at soffit, gable
and crawl space or as identified in the Scope of Work.
10.2.2 Install vents straight, true to line, and plumb.
10.2.3 Louvers including frames shall be extruded aluminum alloy, 6063-T6,
anodized finish or powder coated.
10.3 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
10.3.1 Install ACROVYN or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal rub rail/bumper

guard, hand rail, door frame protection, crash rail, wall and corner guards
straight, true to line, and plumb.
10.3.2 ACROVYN items shall be as follows:-
Rub rail/Bumper Guard: Model FR-270
Handrail/Guardrail: Model HRB-3C
Corner Guards: Model SM-10
Crash Rail: Model CR-40
Or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
10.4 FIRE HOSE CABINETS & REELS
10.4.1 Install fire hose cabinet, recess or surface mounted to walls.

10.4.2 Fire Hose Cabinet: shall be surface mounted, 663mm(26 ) high, 538mm
(21) wide, 225mm (9) deep, full glass door, baked red enamel, steel, 18
gauge thick, flat trim. (Similar to SAP 1000124125).
10.4.3 Fire Hose Cabinet: shall be recess type, 850-900mm (34-36 inches) high,
625-650mm (25-26 inches) wide, 213mm (8) deep, full glass door, baked
red enamel, steel, 18 gauge thick. (Similar to SAP 1000124123)
10.4.4 Install fire hose reel, floor mounted baked red enamel color
Page 160 of 221

10.4.5 Fire Hose Reel; 1 diameter , 38.1 m (1205 ft.) length, 1 male NST THD
coupled nozzle terminal, 1.724 MPA (250PSI) wp test, buna-n tube, 2 braid
hypalon cover, complete and fully assembled in cabinet, consisting of
horizontal reel for stationary mounting hannay Model FF32-23-24RT-SPL,
DWG# RXXFF-079Rev. A Solid drum, heavy gauge pressed steel frame and
spun discs, 1 straight bronze swivel joint, with positive spring actuated PL-
1 pin lock to prevent free wheeling of recoil from pressure surges, straight
internal water flow to tube turn type 304 stainless steel riser, 1 male NST
outlet
10.5 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10.5.1 Install fire extinguisher complete with 25mm thick wooden backboard. Board
shall be painted with red enamel paint.
10.5.1.1 Water: for Class A fires; air pressure type; stainless steel cylinder,
with straight stream nozzle, 7.9 mm (0.3125 IN.) dia. x 610 mm (24
IN.) LG hose; without corrosion inhibitor pills, 2.5 gallons capacity, 2
UL rating; 13.7 (45 ft) range. Manufacturer Reference - Badger Fire
Protection, Incorporated or approved equal. (Similar to SAP
1000124949).
10.5.1.2 Carbon dioxide: for class BC fires; hand carried; lever

operated; complete with aluminum cylinder, 9.5 mm (0.375 in.)
(outlet) mono control valve, 838 mm (33 IN.) LG hose, nozzle, horn,
metal hanging bracket, and an inspection tag to record date and
weight at the time of inspection; tested to comply with ANSI/UL711
and ANSI/UL154; 4.5 KG (10 LB); 10-B:C U.L. rating; 1.8 M (6 ft.)
range. Manufacturer Reference - Badger Fire Protection,
Incorporated or approved equal. (Similar to SAP 1000124919).
10.5.1.3 Dry Chemical: For Class A,B,C fires; 11.3 KG. (25 LB),
20-A, 80-BC UL, portable, 20 ft. range, 15.9 mm (5/8 IN.) diameter.
hose outlet, ANSI/UL-154, UL-711, monoammonium phosphate
foray hand carried, gas pressure cartridge puncture pin operated,
expanding round stream nozzle, 905 mm (35-5/8 IN) LG chemical
hose. Manufacturer Reference - Badger Fire Protection,
Incorporated or approved equal. (Similar to SAP 1000124942).
10.6 PROPRIETARY METAL PARTITIONS

CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which shall include but not be limited to all
applicable procedures and activities necessary during the installation of Hauser man
Panel (Type T61 or Type P82) / Sectional Metal Panels. All WORK shall meet SAUDI
ARAMCO specifications and standards.
10.6.1 Layout ceiling channels according to the proposed panel layout on the
drawing. Fasten channels with clips attached to the ceiling runners.
Page 161 of 221

10.6.2 Layout the base channels by attaching a plumb-bob on the ceiling and
dropping the mark on the floor.
10.6.3 Draw the lines with a chalk line on the floor and install the base channels
along the center line of the chalk line.
10.6.4 Cut to size base channels, corners and edges fasten to the floor by Hilt
nails staggered along the length of the channels.
10.6.5 Install leveling plates inside the base channels. Measure the height of the
channels.
10.6.6 Install the floor channel on top of the leveling plates and fit well on the base
channel.
10.6.7 At the ends, on window mullions, install wall channels by fixing with metal
screws. On concrete wall, use Hilt nail.
10.6.8 With lifting hooks and held by two craftsman, 2carefully lift panels and insert
between the ceiling and floor channels by pushing up and sliding down to
position.
10.6.9 Insert connection keys to join two panels together.
10.6.10 Close the gap between panels by placing the panel strip. Slowly fit in place
by rubber hammer until its plumb and fixed.
10.6.11 Similar procedure is done for installing the metal door. The door frames are
held by connection keys attached to the other panels.
10.6.12 Remove excess panels, strip, channels and other accessories as described
in Section 2.1.10.9 of this Attachment to Schedule B.
10.7 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10.7.1 The WORK to be performed shall include but not be limited to installation or
replacement of toilet and bath accessories.
10.7.2 Wall mounted accessories shall be installed complete with solid wood
blocking inside the wall lining.
10.7.3 Toilet and bath accessories shall be as follows:
Robe Hook: Double, chrome finish; 3x4 in size; wall or door mounting.
24" Towel Bar: Polished stainless steel; 7/8 in. square; for use with post No.
47 and 347. (Similar to SAP 1000081976)
30" Towel Bar: Polished stainless steel; 7/8 in. square; for use with post No.
47 and 347. (Similar to SAP 1000081978)
Page 162 of 221

Medicine Cabinet: Stainless steel trim; 3 adjustable shelves; recessed

mounted; mirror size 16x26 in; opening size 14x24x3 in; over all size 16 x
26 in. (Similar to SAP 1000081984)
Soap Dish: Recessed; white, vitreous china with grab bar, drain. (Similar to
SAP 1000081986)
Liquid Soap Dispenser: Wall mounted; 20 GA stainless steel, Type 304 body;
chrome plated brass or plastic push-in-liquid soap dispenser valve; locked
filler top; re-fill window. (Similar to SAP 10000820025)
Paper Towel Dispenser: wall mounted; steel; white enamel; hand crank
operated with crank on right hand side; roll type. (Similar to SAP
1000212844).
Floor Drain: 3 in. caulk outlet; coated cast iron, spigot, receptor, indirect
waste, flushing collar, nickel-bronze adjustable strainer head, and concealed
screws. (Similar to SAP 1000080803)
Toilet Tissue Dispenser: multi-roll surface mounted; heavy duty; stainless

steel satin finish; molded plastic spindle; concealed locking device; controlled
delivery; with key. (Similar to SAP 1000212848)
Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: recessed; stainless steel; doors with
tumbler lock; stainless steel piano hinged on towel and waste compartment;
removable plastic waste container. (Similar to SAP 1000082313).
Toilet Paper Holder: Shall be one piece, wall mounted with Zamac posts and
roller. (Similar to SAP 1000082142).
Shower Drain: 3 in caulk outlet, coated cast iron, spigot, receptor, flashing
collar, nickel-bronze adjustable strainer head, with 5 in. square strainer.
Tooth Brush Holder: Shall be one piece wall mounted with top support.
10.7.4 Seal all around plumbing fixtures and accessories as required with acrylic
sealant of the same color.
11.0 EQUIPMENT
NOT USED
12.0 FURNISHINGS
NOT USED
13.0 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Page 163 of 221

13.1 ASBESTOS REMOVAL
13.1.1 Remove asbestos wall/roofing and ceiling lining or sheathing.
Asbestos material shall be removed in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO

General Instruction Manual Ref: 150.001.
All asbestos material shall be bagged and labeled, transported to a

designated dumping area as directed by the Environmental Engineering
Division.
Material and Debris Disposal
The removal of any asbestos material, shingle or sheet siding shall be

prepared, packaged and labeled prior to transporting to SAUDI ARAMCO's
designated dumping site. All necessary protective clothing and safety
precautions and applicable standards shall be adhered to at all time both for
removal and dumping. CONTRACTOR shall ensure all types of material for
disposal shall be loaded into awaiting vehicles and removed to the
designated dumpsite as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer
immediately. No stockpiling of waste shall be allowed. At all times the entire
WORK Site shall be clean from debris during the WORK activities and made
completely safe before the completion of the WORK at the end of each day.
Upon completion of the WORK, the entire site shall be cleaned and cleared of
all site debris, scaffolding, barricades and equipment to the complete
satisfaction of the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer. SAUDI ARAMCO will
not provide any temporary containers for site debris. Removal of Site debris
and the supply of protective clothing and equipment shall be the total
responsibility of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall adhere strictly to
Asbestos regulations stipulated in the SAUDI ARAMCO Construction Safety
Manual (Section 4) and SAUDI ARAMCO General Instructions No. 150.001
and any other relevant instructions.
13.2 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
13.2.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform WORK which shall include but not be limited to
all applicable activities involved in Fire Protection Systems.
13.2.2 The WORK to be performed shall be completed in accordance with.
- National Fire Protection Codes

- National Electrical Codes
- Uniform Building Codes
- Uniform Plumbing Codes
- SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standards
- Other applicable standards and codes as specified or as applicable
13.2.3 CONTRACTORS obligation and responsibility to fully comply with the

requirements of all applicable sections of codes, standards and
specifications. All WORK shall be commissioned and tested before hand over
by CONTRACTOR, to the satisfaction of Company Representative. All test
Page 164 of 221

results shall be recorded and forwarded to SAUDI ARAMCO. Where the

requirements of any code or standard as above conflict with SAUDI ARAMCO
Engineering Standards. The requirements of the SAUDI ARAMCO
Engineering Standards take precedence.
13.2.4 WORK to be performed shall include the following:
(A) Removal of Fire Sprinkler System

(B) Removal of Fire alarm and Detection System
(c) Fire Sprinkler Systems
(d) Fire Alarms and Automatic Detection Equipment
(e) Emergency Escape Lighting
(f) Exit Systems, Fire Doors, Door Holding Devices and similar
(g) Fire resisting structures, partitions and barriers, fire dampers, and
similar fire stopping works.
13.2.5 Temporary Fire Protection
CONTRACTOR shall maintain the maximum Temporary Fire Protection and

Fire Safety as required by NFPA and SAUDI ARAMCO, during the course of
the WORKS.
13.2.6 Safety Requirements
It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to:
(A) Follow all SAUDI ARAMCO's safety procedures

(B) Obtain WORK permits.
(C) Isolate in a safe manner any electrical, water, or other supply as
necessary to complete WORK, giving due consideration to "Temporary
Protection"
13.2.7 CONTRACTOR shall provide the fire alarm panel Addressable or

Conventional but not limited to necessary services, equipment and tools for
programming Fire Alarm Addressable System at various locations. This shall
include additional items to the existing system such as smoke, heat detectors
etc... As well as pulling the system back to normal operation after conducting
alternations and /or modifications.
Approved and recommended vendor(s)
a. Edwards Est.
b. Notifier
c. Symplex
d. Kiddearies
Page 165 of 221

13.2.8 Materials
13.2.8.1 Fire Protection
A. Sprinkler Heads: Pendent type ceiling mounted- NPT,

Orifice, Temp. Rating: 155 deg F/68 deg C sprinkler (brass
finish) with 135 deg
F/ 57 deg C cover plate (chrome plated finish), K-Factor 5.6,

Factory Hydro Test at 500 psi, quick response series royal flush
concealed.
B. Retard Chamber: Valve accessory which may be used for

variable pressure wet system where mechanical motor alarms or
pressure switches are used, UL, FM, ULC,MEA approved, 175
PSI working pressure, unfinished, standard trim.
C. Pressure Switch: NPT male, UL and CFSM Listed, FM and

LPC approved, NYMEA accepted, Cover: die-cast with textured
red powder coated finish, Base: plated steel, maximum pressure
1 PSI, indoor or outdoor use, 15.0 Amps at 125/250 VAC, 2.5
Amps at 30 VDC.
D. Waterflow Switch: Up to 450 PSI service pressure, 10 GPM

minimum glow rate for alarm, 18 FPS maximum surge, 15.0
Amps at 125/250 VAC, 2.0 Amps at 30 VDC resistive, suitable
for indoor or outdoor use with factory installed gasket and die-
cast housing, NEMA 4/IP54 rated enclosure, 40F/120F,
4.5C/49C, non-corrosive sleeve factory installed in saddle.
E. Fire Department Connection: With an automatic drip valve to

bed fitted near the Siamese Twin Fire Department Connection
with clapper 4 x 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 Siamese type. Wall plates are
constructed of corrosion resistant complete with brass plugs and
chains and complete with a brass escutcheon plate with the
words AUTO SPRINKLER cast into the plate, UL approved.
F. Exhauster: UL (up to 750 gal. system); ULC; FM (Riser

installation); LPC, maximum working pressure 175 PSI (1206
KPa), inlet and outlet 2 (50 mm) NPT, pressure chamber
exhaust (15 mm) NPT.
G. Pressure Temperature Gauge: Case-drawn brass, polish finish;

Ring-drawn brass, friction, polish finish; flat glass window, brass
black pointer; Dial-brass, white background with black markings;
Movement-brass precision geared; Bourdon tube-phosphor
bronze; Connection-1/4 ANPT LM, brass; Range-0.300 psig;
Accuracy-at maximum indicated pressure is + or- of that
pressure(applied to non-retard portion).
Page 166 of 221

H. Check Valves:
a. 2 diameter and smaller, cast bronze body, screwed bonnet,

UL listed / F.M. approved, swing disc and integral seats,
rating 125 WSP and 200 WOG, with threaded ends which
meet ANSI B2.1.
b. 3 diameter and larger shall be bronze trim, steel body are

steam rated 125 PSI and resilient seated valve are rated 200
PSI WOG, UL listed / F.M. approved, flange type.
13.2.8.2 Fire Alarm and Detection
A. Smoke Detector: plug-in, ionization detector; two (2) wire

system operation and shall contain an alarm indicating LED
which will illuminate to signal actuation; with adjustable
sensitivity; consist of self compensating dual ionization
chambers and highly stable solid state amplifier-switching
circuit. One chamber detects the presence of combustion
products, the second chamber serves as a reference, to
stabilize the detectors sensitivity for changes in
environmental conditions as covered by UL 268 and 268A;
Pyrotronics Model DI-3 Series or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equal.
B. Detector Base: shall be low profile surface mounting base

which can be attached to 100mm octagonal single gang
outlet box or 100mm square wiring box; Pyrotronics Model
DB-3S or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
C. Thermal Fire Detector (Heat): Rate-of-rise and fixed

temperature shall be 135 degree F; normal temperature
fluctuations and ceiling temperature not exceeding 100
degree F; with thermoplastic reversible mounting plate;
attaches to the mounting plate with a push and twist motion;
UL Listed; Pyrotronics Model DT-135F or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
D. Manual Pull Station (double action): durable molded

polycarbonate; matte finish in red with raised white lettering;
fitted with pull down lever and push in tab. It shall be
necessary to operate the push in tab first to provide access
to the pull down lever which, when operated, locks in
position after releasing a spring loaded contact switch to
affect actuation of the alarm circuit. UL listed; Model MS-
501 by Pyrotronics or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
E. Tone Signaling Device
a. Horn - Strobe: surface/ceiling mounted; energy efficient

horn shall be 20mA supplying 100 dB at 10 feet; 15
Page 167 of 221

Candela rating; strobe lens bottom material shall be

Lexan with 17mm (5/8) red FIRE letters; top of strobe
rounded shape clear Lexan; overall lend height
63mm (2.5) with width of 31mm (1.25); UL listed; Model
MC-S15-F by Pyrotronics or SAUDI ARAMCO approved
equal.
b. Horn: surface/ceiling mounted; energy efficient horn shall

be 20mA supplying 100 dB at 10 feet; Model MC-F by
Pyrotronics or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
F. Remote Alarm Lamp: ceiling mounted; off white plastic

mounting plates; electrically connected to initiating devise; UL
Listed; Model RLI - 1 by Pyrotronics or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal.
G. Zone Fir Alarm Control Panel (Conventional): consist of

microprocessor based control with 12 alarm initiating circuits,
which can be expanded conveniently to 36 zones, 32 relays
and 16-2 amp notification appliance circuits supported by two
power supply; 10 amp power supply with a 2 amp battery
charger including 3 relays which will automatically activate in
the event of fire alarm, supervisory condition or trouble
condition one relay for each type of condition. Power supply
shall include four notification appliance circuits, each rated at 2
amps. System status shall be reported on a four line LCD
display and individual zone LEDs; UL Listed; Model PXL by
Pyrotronics with Model PSE-1 enclosure by Pyrotronics or
14.0 CONVEYING SYSTEM
NOT USED
15.0 MECHANICAL
15.1 PLUMBING
All WORK associated with the installation of non-electric utility piping systems shall
be in accordance with the following SAUDI ARAMCO Standards:
- SAES S - 040
- SAES S 060
- SAES S 070
- SAES - A 004
- SAES L 032
- SAES L 060
- SAES N - 001
The WORK to be performed shall include but shall not be limited to all applicable
activities necessary during the disconnecting and removing, overhauling, re-fixing,
Page 168 of 221

and/or new installations of all piping, fixtures, accessories, fittings and material in
connection, with all Plumbing and Sanitary Work activities.
15.1.1 General Provisions
Material Handling and Storage
All materials and fixtures collected or delivered to the WORK Site shall be
immediately inspected to ensure that they are the correct type, size and
quantity and re not damaged. Materials or fixtures affected by wind, rain, sun
or sand shall be covered with adequate tarpaulins and firmly secured or
stored in a flexi van, shelter or shade. The storage and care of all material
and fixtures is the complete responsibility CONTRACTOR. Any items found
to be damaged or missing will be replaced solely at CONTRACTORs own
expense.
Hydrostatic and Water Tests, Inspection and Approval
No WORK shall be buried, covered or otherwise concealed or placed in

operation until it has been tested, inspected and approved by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Inspection Department. Should any of the WORK be either buried,
covered or concealed before such a test and inspection, the WORK shall be
uncovered at CONTRACTORs expense and shall not be re-covered until it
has been tested, inspected and approved. Make all necessary provisions for
thorough bleeding all pipelines of air and dirt. Before testing, fill lines with
water for a period of 24 hours. All Hot and Cold water systems, pipe and
fittings, shall be hydrostatic tested upon completion. It shall be tested and
proved tight under a water pressure of 150 psig (1034 KPa) for a period of
not less than 4 hours unless otherwise required by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Inspection Department. Only potable water shall be used for the tests.
Any leaking pipe, joints and fittings shall be replaced and the hydrostatic test
repeated until the system is proved satisfactory. All repairs are at
CONTRACTOR's own expense. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary
test pumps, gauges, fittings, equipment and personnel to carry out
hydrostatic tests. All gauges shall be calibrated and tagged. All test pumps
shall have a relief valve set at 10% above the required test pressures or a
maximum of 170 KPa (25 psig) above test pressure for pressure piping
systems. The Inspection Department may require the removal of clean outs
to ascertain if the pressure has reached all parts of the system. After the
plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, they shall be
submitted to a final test as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
For pressure water supply lines, use concrete for cradle or blocking where
shown or directed. Back with concrete all bends exceeding five degrees,
crosses with one opening plugged, and all tees. Place blocking against solid
ground, with area of bearing on pipe and on ground in each instance as
required. Place blocking so that pipe and fitting joints will be accessible for
repair.
Page 169 of 221

Preparation of Lines for use
All WORK associated with bringing into service Utility piping systems shall be
in accordance with the SAUDI ARAMCO Sanitary Code Ref: GI 0151.006.
All sweet and raw water distribution lines to residential and commercial
buildings shall be prepared for chlorination after repair or installation.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary equipment to carry out and

complete all chlorination activities. Before placement into service, each
plumbing installation requiring replacement of pipe or fittings shall be
disinfected in accordance with the following:
The effected system shall be filled with a solution containing 100 parts per
million (100 mg/l) of free chlorine and allowed to stand for 2 hours before
flushing. The P.H. of the water for chlorination shall not exceed 7.5.
The system shall then be thoroughly flushed with the same type of water to
be used in the line when in normal use. All test samples shall be taken by
SAUDI ARAMCO
Environmental Health Department. Only upon acceptance of the test samples

by the SAUDI ARAMCO Environmental Health Department, shall the WORK
be acceptable to SAUDI ARAMCO.
Drain, Waste and Vent s (D.W.V.)) Tests
The water test shall be applied to the drain, waste and vent (D.W.V.) piping
system either in its entirety or in sections. If applied to the entire system, all
openings shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system
filled with water to the point of overflowing under a 3 m head of water for not
less than 4 hours or as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
Building sewers and appurtenances, which have not been back filled, shall be
tested and proved watertight fewer than 3 m head of water for not less than 4
hours. Building sewers, which have been back filled, shall be tested and
proved watertight fewer than 3 m head of water for not less than 24 hours.
Gravity sewers shall be tested from manhole to manhole, or manhole sump

inlet, the upstream manhole may be tested at the same time. The gravity
sanitary sewer manholes if tested separately or as part of the gravity sanitary
sewer pipe test; filled to the top with water for 8 hours then topped off to top
of the drain.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish an adequate amount of various sizes of

necessary duct test plugs and equipment to complete all tests. All tests shall
be observed and accepted by a SAUDI ARAMCO Inspection Unit
Representative. All Plumbing, drain, waste and vent (D.W.V.) and Sewer
installations must operate to the satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO before the
WORK shall be accepted. Any leaks or defects shall be made good at
Page 170 of 221

CONTRACTOR's own expense. Further tests shall be conducted on any

WORK after leaks or defects have been repaired.
Preparing and Jointing Plastic Pipes
The following general procedure shall be followed in cutting of plastic pipe. It

is recommended that the vendor's instructions be consulted for specific
instructions.
Pipe can be cut easily with a saw or hacksaw, using fine tooth blades. Pipe
cutter can be used when the cutting wheel is specifically designed for plastic
pipe. Use a Miter base for ensuring square ends.
All burrs shall be removed from the inside diameter (I.D.) or outside diameter
(O.D.) of the pipe before joining, using a debarring tool or a half round course
file or beveling tool.
All pipe ends shall be beveled to minimize scraping solvent cement from
inside diameter (I.D.) of the fittings as pipe is inserted.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that he provides and makes available on WORK

Site sufficient straps and pipe clamps for installations.
Handling of Cement
Keep containers for solvent cements tightly closed except when in use. Avoid
prolonged breathing of solvent vapors and when pipe and fittings are being
joined. In partially enclosed areas use a ventilating device to attenuate vapor
levels. Keep solvent cements, primers and cleaners away from all sources of
ignition, heat, sparks and open flame. Avoid repeated contact with the skin by
wearing proper gloves impervious to the solvents. Application of the solvents
or cements with rags and bare hands is not recommended: Natural fiber
brushes and other suitable applicators can produce satisfactory results.
Positively No Smoking allowed.
Assembling of Socket, Solvent Weld Joints
Where solvent-weld socket joints are specified, refer to the pipe

manufacturer's data sheets for the proper procedure in making connections.
In the absence of specific manufacturer's instructions the following procedure
shall be followed:
Both male and female joints shall be thoroughly cleaned with solvent primer stock no;
05-511 112-00 it is further recommended that the inside of the fitting be wiped with a
clean, dry oil free cloth. Male end to be leveled with a file. All cuts to be 90 o made with
miter box and saw and de-burred after cutting. The cement shall be brushed on both
the fitting interior and the pipe exterior. The cement sets rapidly and connecting shall
take place within one minute. The fitting shall be rotated parallel onto the pipe and
rotated at a 45o clockwise or counter-clockwise to the final position desired. The fitting
is pushed on with a 45o twisting motion to bring it into full engagement with the pipe at
Page 171 of 221

the final desired position the twisting motion is required to distribute the cement layer
and avoid any fault occurring in the cement line between the tubes and fitting.
Alignment of pipe and fittings shall be made straight and true to obtain maximum
contact any joints which upon inspection are not to the satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO
shall be cut out and re-made at CONTRACTORs expense. The installation shall be
scheduled in order that solvent welds whenever possible are made in a clean WORK
area where a minimum of sand and dust will be encountered. Joints shall be made in
the trench only when necessitated by the length of pipe, which can be easily handled.
Waiting periods recommended by the manufacturer shall be observed prior to
pressurizing the line. In the absence of specific instructions a minimum of 10 hours
shall be assumed as the normal waiting time.
15.1.2 Prepare, Install and Test Schedule 80 CPVC Pipe Work and Fittings
All Water Supply Systems shall be installed with correct pipe and fittings and
appropriate solvent cement at all times.
a. CPVC: Schedule 80 Pipe and Fittings; Solvent Cement ASTM F-493.
b. PVC: Schedule 80 Pipe and Fittings; Solvent Cement ASTM D-2564.
c. SAS 14: Class 5; PVC Schedule 80 Metric Pipe and Fittings; Solvent
Cement ASTM D-2564.
15.1.2.1 CPVC Schedule 80 Pipe and Fittings shall be installed on Hot

water distribution Systems and all Sweet water installations the
maximum hot water service temperature shall be 160 o F (71o C)
CPVC pipe and fittings shall be the only plastic pipe permitted for
use with hot water. Fittings used with plastic pipe shall be of the
material and weight to match pipe except CPVC fittings, which
may be used, with PVC pipe.
15.1.2.2 Plastic pipe threads shall be factory cut or molded. Threaded

pressure plastic pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 80 or SAS 14
Class 5 minimum wall thickness. Plastic threaded joints, except
pipe union threads, shall be solvent seal welded as part of the
joining process. Plastic threaded joints in a pressure piping
system shall be at unions at the point of connection to a fixture or
appliance. Plastic female socket / male threaded fittings may be
used with metallic female threaded fittings where alternative
joining methods are impractical.
15.1.2.3 Flat washers shall be installed under nuts used in the installation
of plastic flanges to avoid digging in and cracking of such flanges.
15.1.3 Prepare, Install and Test PVC Schedule 40 Pipe Work and Fittings
15.1.3.1 During the installation of drain, waste and vent (D.W.V.) and
Sewer Pipes, various types of pipes and fittings may be used. All
installation materials and procedures shall meet applicable codes
and standards.
Page 172 of 221
15.1.3.2 Extra care shall be exercised to avoid rough handling of drain,

waste and vent (D.W.V.) pipes and fittings, they should not be
dragged on sharp projections, dropped or have objects dropped
on them. All pipes shall be inspected for cracks or abrasions. No
pipe will be allowed to be installed if there is visible damage or
with buckles or kinks. Any lengths found to have any imperfections
shall be removed and replaced at CONTRACTORs own expense.
15.1.3.3 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating all

installations below grade in trenches or slabs. In addition,
CONTRACTOR on interior installations is responsible for setting
out dimensions to receive soil and drainage outlets in floor slabs
and walls. CONTRACTOR shall remove any defective pipe WORK
fittings in walls, slabs, trenching and/or any other installations and
reset and replace everything at their own expense.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that they provide all necessary
straps and pipe clamps.
15.1.3.4 Any jointing between different drain, waste and vent (D.W.V.) pipe
works or fittings found necessary shall only be carried out by using
the correct materials. Any changes in direction of drainage piping
shall be made with the appropriate sweep fittings.
15.1.3.5 Any changes in direction of any vent pipe installations shall be

made by the appropriate use of approved fittings and no pipe shall
be strained or bent.
15.1.3.6 All horizontal soil, waste and drain lines are to be installed to a
uniform slope of not less than 6 mm per 0.3 m, unless otherwise
indicated on project drawing or as directed by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer. Each length of pipe shall be laid in the
trench and shall be bedded over its full length in dry packed sand
with bell holes made at each joint for inspection during hydrostatic
test. All interior horizontal soil or vent lines installed above grade
shall be supported and securely fastened to the building super
structure by means of straps clamps or hangers not over 1.3 m
apart Vertical soil or vent pipes shall be supported and securely
fastened to the building super structure by means of straps or
clamps not more than 3 m apart. All main vertical waste stacks
shall be extended above the roof line as vents. All vent piping shall
be installed so as not to incur any traps. Vent flashing shall be
installed whenever vent pipe is fitted through roofing materials.
Soil pipe installed in the ground outside of the building area shall
be buried not less than 600 mm below finished grade unless
otherwise indicated on project drawings, and it shall meet the
invert elevations as shown on project drawings.
15.1.3.7 Contractor shall provide a concrete drainage with aluminum or

carbon steel grating including preparation and sloping as per
Saudi Aramco Standard
Page 173 of 221
a. Install steel or aluminum grating to prepared concrete

drainage system plumb, taut and level. Spot weld steel
grating to steel nosing.
b. Steel Grating: Carbon Steel per ASTM C36, hot dipped

galvanized to ASTM A385 or 386, 6mm () square
twisted cross bar; as per requirements of 12-SAMSS-7. (Ref.
SAMS #12-938-329).
c. CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which shall include

but not be limited to preparing and performing all applicable
activities necessary during the construction of concrete
drainage including form work. Place form WORK, vapor
barrier, reinforcing steel and ties as required forming
reinforced concrete slabs on grade. Pour concrete, ready
mix or site mix as required or approved by the SAUDI
ARAMCO Engineer.
15.1.3.8 Installation or replacement of Miscellaneous Plumbing Fixtures,

Accessories and Fittings
a. Install new floor/wall clean out 150mm (6) dia. on prepared

holes.
b. Contractor shall provide and install automatic flush valve o
meter for urinal, battery operated and have override manual
push button.
c. Contractor shall provide and install automatic flush valve o
meter for western water closet, battery operated and have
override manual push button.
d. Contractor shall provide and install automatic flush valve o
meter for eastern water closet, battery operated and have
override manual push button
e. Contractor shall provide and install automatic faucet hot &
cold, battery or power operated.
f. Contractor shall provide and install automatic tissue & paper
dispenser, battery or power operated.
g. Contractor shall provide and install automatic soap dispenser,
battery operated.
h. Contractor shall provide and install tissue & paper holder
i. Contractor shall provide and install manual soap dispenser
j. Contractor shall provide and install automatic hand dryer, 220
volts.
k. Contractor shall provide and install weather proof junction box
stainless or galvanized with powder-coated to match finish
color any size.
15.1.4 Prepare, Install and Test Galvanized Pipe and Fittings
Page 174 of 221

Pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters or hacksaw blade and ends shall be
reamed with a long taper reamer to remove all burrs.
Pipe threads shall be cut with clean sharp dies and shall have the correct
diameter and length. The ends shall be brushed to remove all chips. All
threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1 and associated fittings.
When a pipe joint material is used on a metallic piping system, it shall be

applied only on male threads. Such material shall be SAUDI ARAMCO
approved types, insoluble in water, non-toxic and non-hardening material.
Any steel or galvanized piping shall be assembled with straight lengths of

galvanized/steel pipe and galvanized malleable iron fittings. Offsets shall be
made with pipe fittings only; no steel pipe shall be bent.
Any underground steel pipe shall be coated and wrapped before lying. All
coating and wrap shall meet all necessary codes and standards.
Steel pipe shall not be installed below ground floor slab unless called for in
drawings, and then only if placed in sleeves. All steel pipe placed in trenches
shall be coated taped and wrapped.
15.1.5 Prepare, Install and Test Copper Pipe Work and Fittings
Installation of copper tube and fittings in drainage, vent and water shall be
carried out with great care. All copper tube, fittings and material shall conform
to all applicable standards.
The WORK to be performed includes but is not limited to all applicable

activities involved before and during installation of copper tube and fittings.
Ensure existing or new pipe WORK is clean and free from damage and any
obstructions. The WORK performed in Hospitals, Clinics and other facilities
on Gas and Vacuum Systems shall be in accordance with N.F.P.A. 99 and
specifically items 4.4.1.4 through 4.4.1.4.3. of the Code.
Prepare copper solder joints and all other types of fittings and fix existing or
new pipe WORK and/or fixtures and various appliances using correct tools.
Ensure alignment and position is correct, keep pipe WORK and fittings clean,
and prepare for test. Any faulty or leaking joints shall be removed, repaired
and re-tested at CONTRACTORs expense. Clean up and remove any dirt or
waste material.
Table K and L copper tube shall be the most commonly used for water
distribution systems.
The tubing shall be cut to length and square remove burrs with file or cutting
reamer; all filings to be removed from both inside and outside of the tubing.
Bending shall be done with proper bending machine or bending spring, etc;
chinked or flattened bends shall be rejected.
Page 175 of 221

Solder and sweat joints in copper tubing shall be made by the appropriate
use of approved or copper fittings. For soldering or brazing, the surface of the
tube end, and fitting shall be clean and free from oil, grease and heavy
oxides, apply flux to the inside of the fitting socket, also apply flux to the
outside of tubing which will enter the fitting socket. All brazing and welding
shall conform to the AES-W Series Standards. Silver brazing wire or 95/5 tin
antimony solder shall be used for brazed copper joints and 50-50 tin lead for
solder joints. All solder and fluxes shall be manufactured to approve
standards.
For flaring, the tubing shall be expanded by means of either impact or screw
type flaring tools only. Before flaring the nut is to be slipped onto the tube
with nut thread at side where flare is to be made. Flared joints for soft copper
water tubing shall be made with fittings meeting approved standards. Care
shall be taken to avoid splitting the tube or cracking the nuts.
Copper tubing shall not be installed below the ground floor slab unless
indicated in project drawings and then shall only be installed in sleeves.
Joints from copper tubing to threaded pipe shall be made by the use of brass
adapter fittings.
15.1.6 Remove, Repair, Test and Install Valves
The WORK shall include but is not limited to performing all applicable
activities before and during the disconnection of existing valves and replace
or fix new valves in new installations.
Before any installation of valves, CONTRACTOR shall inspected ensure the

valve is the correct type to be installed, clean and operable. All valves shall
be opened and checked out, and all types of bonnets shall be jointed.
Jointing and installation of various types of valves shall be made in existing

pipe WORK or new installations (valve boxes) onto sanitary fixtures, water
heaters and all other appliances as required). All valves shall be installed
indicating the correct flow direction. All jointing procedures shall conform to all
standards. All correct jointing materials shall be used at all times. Any leaks
due to poor workmanship or jointing materials shall be removed and leaks
repaired at CONTRACTORs expense.
15.1.7 Disconnect and Remove Equipment and Fixtures to Facilitate Repair and
Inspection
The WORK shall includes but is not limited to the performance of all
applicable activities before and during the disconnection of all miscellaneous
plumbing fittings and fixtures and the replacement of miscellaneous items in
new installation
Service and clean all operating mechanisms, install new washers and/or any
other operating plants base up repair and completely test and leave in fully
operating condition.
Page 176 of 221

Replace or install new plumbing fixtures, pipes, fittings, supports and or other
necessary requirements. All necessary test and requirements to be
performed and completed all items must be left in complete operable
condition and installed to all necessary and applicable codes and standards.
Page 177 of 221

15.1.8 Installation or replacement of Miscellaneous Plumbing Fixtures, Accessories

and Fittings
Plumbing Fixtures shall be as follows:-
(A) Western Water Closet: Siphon jet, white color,

elongated bowl, vitreous china, floor mounting, with close coupled
tank(complete
with back flow holder, water control, including volume regulator, flush
valve and trip lever), complete with all trims, fittings and bowl caps.
(Similar to SAP 1000080561.)
(B) Bowl: Water Closet: siphon jet, white color, close-coupled tank; vitreous
china; ANSI A1112.19.2M, elongated front; floor outlet; rim flush; with
mounting bolt-caps. (Similar to SAP 1000080288).
Flush Tank: Vitreous China; ANSI A112.19.2M; C/W cover, trim, fittings,
tank bolts, nuts and gasket. (Similar to SAP 1000080339)
Closet Bolt: Floor flange; brass plated steel; with brass open top nut and
SSTL or brass oval washer. (Similar to SAP 1000080603)
Flange: Water closet, 101.6 mm (4 in) x 101.6 mm (4 in), PVC, hub end
with adjustable metal ring. (Similar to SAP 1000081142)
Float Ball: Shall be plastic with oval shape and self tapping end.
American Standard Export or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
Float Valves (Flush Tank): Plastic with backflow preventer complete

with refill tube, float rod coupling nuts and washers; assembly. American
Standard Export or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal. (Similar to SAP
1000081143).
Trip Levers (Flush Tank): Lever handle; single acting chrome finish.
American Standard Export or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal.
Toilet Setting Ring: Sponge rubber closet bowl cushion, 137mm (5 3/8)
OD; 89mm (3 ID; 19mm (3/4) TH. (Similar to SAP1000081430)
Seat Cover (WWC): Plastic; white; elongated bowl; open front. (Similar
to SAP 1000080443)
(C) Water Closet: One (1) piece, low profile type; floor mounted; floor outlet;
vitreous china; white color; siphon vortex action; elongated bowl;
complete with contoured, telescoping seat and cover; tank with
backflow holder; water control with volume regulator; flush valve and
actuator button level, chrome plated water supply pipe. (Similar to SAP
1000080567)
Page 178 of 221

(D) Urinal: Siphon jet; vitreous china; certified to be USA Standard Grade A;
top spud; back outlet connection threaded 2" inside; wall hangers;
without trim. (Similar to SAP 1000080535 )
Flush meter Valve: Pressure; manual; chrome-plated; exposed; with

oscillating handle on left; with vacuum breaker; with wall and spud
flanges. (Similar to SAP 1000081771)
(E) Eastern Water Closet: Squatting type; wash down; vitreous china;
white; floor mounted; p-traps outlet (Andria Catalogue #165001A or
approved equal. (Similar to SAP 1000080570)
Eastern Water Closet (Flush Valve): Pressure; manual; chrome-plated;

exposed; for squatting type; handle on right; wit 1 inch screw driver
angle stop. (Similar to SAP 1000081757)
(F) Lavatory/Hand wash Basin: white;

vitreous china, front overflow, faucet holes 4 in. center, with concealed
arms or wall hanger, d-shape bowl. Manufacturer Reference - American
Standard or SAUDI ARAMCO approved equal. (Similar to SAP
1000080367)
Lavatory Faucet: center set; washer less; sculptured spout with fixed
aerator; single rotating ball lever handle; with in. NPS adapters; and
brass with pop-up drain assembly. (Similar to SAP 1000081071)
Trap Adapters: Cast brass body with clean-out, slip joint inlet, swivel
joint; 17 GA tube wall outlets; with wall flange. (Similar to SAP
1000081623)
Escutcheon: Saw tooth hole; shallow pattern; brass for in NPS;

chrome finish. (Similar to SAP 1000080832)
Copper Tubing: Deoxidized; type L (for interior service); ASTM B-88

type DMP WW-T-799 Class 1; Alloy C12200; soft. (Similar to SAP
1000081665)
Globe Valve: Angle pattern; brass body, brass trim; all wetted parts to
contain less than 16% zinc; female inlet; ANSI B1.20.1 pipe threads;
flared outlet with flare fittings; ASME/ANSI B16.26; having single or
double packing nut; disc handle; chrome plated; polished. (Similar to
SAP 1000081821)
(G) Service Sink: Wall type; cast iron; enameled; certified to be USA
Standard Grade A; wall hanger; for through-back outlet. (Similar to SAP
1000080512)
Service Sink Faucet: in female NPS union, lever handle, 152mm. ht

hose end spout with hook, renewable seats, vacuum breaker, inlets
adjustable. (Similar to SAP 1000081078)
Page 179 of 221

(H) Kitchen Sink: Single compartment

ledge back; stainless steel type 302; ANSI A112.1.9.3; 4 holes;
undercoated; GA18TH, 25" long x 22" wd x 8" deep nom; right satin
finish. (Similar to SAP 1000080477)
(I) Kitchen Sink: Double compartment;

stainless steel; self-rimming, nickel bearing stainless steel; satin finish;
1 1/2 diameter fully undercoated; 3 drain. (Similar to SAP
1000080496)
Faucet (Sink): Brass chrome plated; 8" high rigid goose neck; Bradley
Corporation or approved equal. (Ref. SAP 1000080953)
Faucet (Sink): Ball lever handle, 360 degrees Swing spout, chrome
finish, 3 hole deck, washer less, with spray aerator and single rotating
handle. (Similar to SAP 1000081118)
Escutcheon Plate : in IPS, chrome finished brass, saw tooth hole,

shallow pattern, for 12.7 mm (1/2 IN) IPS (Iron Pipe Size) escutcheon,
Saw tooth hole, shallow pattern, brass, for In NPS chrome finish.
Pipe Adapter: 1-1/2 in NPS inlet, 1-1/2 in NPS outlet, brass, slip joint
swivel, slip joint swivel, chrome, cast, trap with cleanout, compression,
17 GA tube wall outlets, and with wall flange. (Similar to SAP
1000081650)
Sink Drain: 1-1/2 in tailpiece, chrome finished brass, slip joint, crumb
cup strainer with rubber pull-up stopper, 17 GA brass tailpiece, brass
locknut & coupling nut, for 88.9 mm (3-1/2 in) diameter outlet. (Similar
to SAMS No. 05-440-525)
Basket Strainer: 1-1/2 in tailpiece, chrome finished brass, slip joint,

crumb cup strainer with rubber pull-up stopper, 17 GA brass tailpiece,
brass locknut & coupling nut, for 88.9 mm (3-1/2 in) diameter outlet.
American Standard Export / WABCO Standard or SAUDI ARAMCO
approved equal (Similar to SAP 1000081907).
Globe Valve: Angle pattern; brass or bronze body; brass or bronze trim;
all wetted parts to contain less than 16% zinc or else modified or
inhibited to prevent dezincification; metal seat styrene butadiene rubber
90 durometer +/-5 disc; female inlet; ANSI B1.20.1 pipe threads; flared
outlet with flare fittings; ASME/ANSI B16.26; having single or double
packing nut; disc handle; chrome plated; polished. (Similar to SAP
1000081821)
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, type L; Seamless; hard drawn; plain ends;
chrome plated. (Similar to SAP 1000081665)
Page 180 of 221

(J) Bidet: Floor mounted; white; 2 bolt caps; vacuum breaker; integral
overflow; flushing rim and spray, chrome plated water supply pipe.
Bidet Faucet: Deck mounted fittings, spray, head pop up drain assembly
with vacuum breaker. (Similar to SAP 1000080282)
(K) Shower and Bath Set: Washer less pressure balancing mixing valve;
single crystal rotating ball handle, push button diverter; with adjustable
volume control, shower head, arm flange, chrome plated.(Similar to
SAP 1000081495)
(L) Bath Tub: White color; left hand outlet; steel, acid resisting enameled,
with slip resistance surface; recessed; without trim, with grip rails and
bath drain in polished chrome. (Similar SAP 1000080170)
(M) Bath Tub: White color; right hand outlet; recessed; enamel; slip resistant
surface, with tiling bead without trim. (Similar to SAP 1000080174)
(N) Laundry Sink: Single compartment flat-rim; enameled cast iron; ANSI
A112.19.1Ml free standing frame mounted; C/W black iron frame;
610mm (24) x 508mm (20) x 337mm (13 ) DP; white (inside only).
(Similar SAP 1000080518)
Faucet: IN female NPS union, lever handle, hose end swing spout,
rough chrome finish, wall mounting, and chrome plated base material.
(Similar SAP 1000080971)
Chain: Bead, No 10, 381.0 mm (15) nom LG, chrome or nickel finish
brass, with 2 Type A couplings or 1 Type A & 1 type B coupling, 1 split
ring. (Similar SAP 1000080651)
Stop: Slow compression, IN NPS, brass, straight pattern, stuffing box,

cross handle, chrome finish. (Similar to SA100081823)
Drain: Satin finished brass, slip joint, waste plug with rubber stopper,
22GA brass. (Similar to SAP 1000081936)
Vacuum Breaker: Hose connection, IN female NPSH x IN male

NPSH, 103 to 1034 KPA (15 to 150 PSI), brass, with a breakaway head
set screw. (Similar to SAP 1000081668)
Quality of Fixtures Plumbing fixtures shall be constructed of dense, durable,

non-absorbent materials and shall have smooth, impervious surfaces, free
from unnecessary concealed fouling surfaces. All fixtures shall conform in
quality and design to nationally recognize applicable standards or to other
approved standards acceptable to SAUDI ARAMCO. All porcelain enamel
surfaces on plumbing fixtures shall be acid resistant.
Page 181 of 221

All plumbing and sanitary fixtures shall be installed in locations as indicated

on plumbing and architectural drawings. In case of conflicts between
drawings, SAUDI ARAMCO will determine the required location.
All fixtures shall be set level and in proper alignment, and fixed in a manner to
afford easy access for repairs and maintenance. Wall hung fixtures shall be
rigidly supported by metal supporting members so that no strain is
transmitted to the connections.
The plumbing and sanitary fixtures with all miscellaneous fittings shall be
connected to the piping systems as well as indicated on the project drawings
and as required for proper operation. All fixtures shall be equipped with traps;
and all traps shall be vented unless otherwise indicated on the project
drawings.
Floor outlet or floor mounted fixtures shall be rigidly secured to the drainage
connection and the floor. Where the fixture comes in contact with wall or
floor, all joints shall be completely watertight.
All appurtenances shall be secured by approved non-corrosive anchors,

bolts, screws, concealed or exposed mounting devices, and fasteners.
Exposed fasteners shall be finished to match accessories.
All shower fitting sets, faucets and waste fittings shall be set into fixtures and
walls with care and all correct jointing and material procedures shall be
observed and carried out at all times.
All exposed, plated polished or enameled connections from the fixture; shall
be made with extra special care and shall show no tool marks or scratches
All plumbing and sanitary fixtures shall be properly covered or sealed after
completion of installation or otherwise, suitably protected from damage, de-
facing or entry of foreign matter. These precautions shall be continuous
between the times of subsequent phases of the WORK.
All plumbing and sanitary fixtures shall be fully adjusted, tested and cleaned
to first class working order as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer.
15.1.9 Pipe Insulation
Fabrication and installation of premolded pipe insulation shall be executed in

the best and workmanlike manner by qualified and efficient mechanics in
strict accordance with the drawings, specifications and manufacturers written
instructions. Hot water supply and return shall be provided with color
markings and tagging in accordance with SAUDI ARAMCO Piping System
Color Code.
Insulation Material
Page 182 of 221

(A) Glass fiber pipe insulation with composite fire and smoke hazard rating
maximum 25 for flames spread, and 50 for smoke developed.
Insulation shall have scrim foil vapor, barrier facing. Adhesive,

mastics tapes and cement shall have the same component ratings as
above.
(B) Recovering Jackets 6 ounces per square yard (203 g/sq.m.) canvass
attached and a fire retardant adhesive or 20 gauges aluminum sheet.
(C) Acceptable Manufacturer:
c. Arabian Fiberglass Insulation Co.

d. Saudi Pipe Insulation Manufacturing Factory
15.1.10 Replace/Install dryer duct
(A) Replace/Install dryer duct, corroded at laundry outlet box. Clean the
outlet and install new (if required), PVC/Vinyl/Flexible duct hose.
(Size: 4 -8dia.).
(B) Replace ventilation hood.
15.1.11 Rod out clean drain/sewer line
Sewer cleaning of Sanitary and storm line shall be achieved by using

mechanical sewer cleaning machine or manual Roding equipment which
require saw head cutting tools as desired by the Company Representative.
Clean out from sewer mains all sand, rock, grease, roots, debris and all
else that cause obstruction by use of steel wire brushes and/or fiber
brushes, buckets, scrapers and cutters or other appropriate approved
methods. Clean Sewer mains of 4 up to 24 in diameter. Position, size and
length of sewer main to be cleaned shall be designated by the SAUDI
15.1.12 Water Heater
15.1.12.1 Install water heater inclusive of fiberglass grating below (any

capacity).
15.1.12.2 Electric Water Heater: Glass lined tank, thermostat and high
temperature cut-off, anode, immersion heating element, baked
enamel sheet metal jacket, 3/4 NPT inlet and top outlet, foam
insulation per NAECAS 90, 2.5KW, Vertical, 208/230VAC, IPH,
60Hz, 150 PSI working pressure.
15.1.12.3 Replace / Install flexible pipes for Water Heaters complete with
necessary fittings.
15.1.12.4 Install/replace water heater heat sink.
Page 183 of 221

15.1.13 Drinking Fountain
15.1.13.1 Install drinking fountain.
15.1.13.2 Drinking Fountain: Free standing; bubbler type; hot and cold
water; hermetic compressor; Type 304 stainless steel panels
and top; NPT connections; R12 refrigerant; with gooseneck
glass filler for hot water. 30 L/HR (8 GPH) coldwater + 100 C (500
F), inlet water +270C (800F) and +320C (900F) ambient 45
cups/hr hot water; 3/8 in. NPT inlet water and drain; 0.19 KW
(0.25 HP) compressor; 120V, 1PH, 60Hz; 432mm (17in.) wide x
356mm (14 in.) dp x 1016 mm (40 in.) ht.
15.1.14 Eye Wash
15.1.14.1 Install shower and eye wash assembly.
15.1.14.2 Shower and Eye Wash Assembly: Free standing type; complete
with yellow ABS plastic shower head; chain and strap; aerated
eye wash with stainless steel bowl, hand operated only; floor
flange; stanchion and all interconnecting piping and fittings with
1-1/4 supply tee furnished with 1-1/4 concentric reducer; all
piping galvanized steel; with safety signs; chrome plated brass
ball valves; shower and eye wash operated separately; with
pressure control devices to ensure constant water flow; eye
wash activated by pushing plate; shower activated by pulling
chain; stay open ball valves; weight approximately 23kg (50
Lbs.); supply pressure at least 207 KPA (30 PSI); shower flow
rate 113.6 LPM (30 GPM); eye wash flow rate 11.4 LPM (3
GPM); per ANSI Z 358.1-1981. (Similar to SAP 1000128470)
15.1.15 Prepare, Install and Test Carbon Steel Pipes and fittings
15.1.15.1 Installation of carbon steel pipe and fitting shall be carried out
with great care. All pipes, firings and materials shall conform to
all applicable standards.
15.1.15.2 Pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters or hacksaw blade and ends
shall be reamed with a long taper reamer to remove all burrs.
15.1.15.3 Carbon steel pipework shall be seamless or welded in

accordance to ASTM A106.
15.1.16 Miscellaneous
15.1.16.1 Replace/install flexible hot or cold water connecting pipes and

test; any size and type.
15.1.16.2 Install separation valve for garden hose bibs connected to

existing RW supply complete with necessary fittings.
Page 184 of 221

15.1.16.3 Replace laundry faucet.
15.1.16.4 Replace relief valve of sweet and raw water heater.
Page 185 of 221

15.2 H.V.A.C.
15.2.1 Removal
Remove A/C ducting including but not limited to Hangers, Supports, Grilles,
Diffusers, Dampers and other accessories. CONTRACTOR to transport all
rubbish to a designated dumping area as directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Company Representative.
Remove AC units.
15.2.2 Installation of Pall Air Conditioning Distribution System
CONTRACTOR shall prepare detailed shop drawings from the design

and/or information received from Dhahran Utilities Department. Ductwork
shall be fabricated from Phenol rigid Foam sheets including all cutting
bending and gluing of joints. Apply Silicon Sealant to all internal joints of
performed sections and duct tape along all external joints. CONTRACTOR
shall fix all volume dampers, splitters dampers turning vanes, air extractors,
fire dampers, duct smoke detectors, ceiling diffusers and return
grilles/registers as shown in the drawings.
CONTRACTOR shall make machine connection between AHU and Pall

ductwork using chair profile, invisible flange, bayonet clamp, stiffener angle
and other accessories as deem necessary.
CONTRACTOR shall inspect completed ductwork in the presence of the

Company Representative against the DUD design layout for quality
assurance.
15.2.3 Fabricate and Install G.I./Metal Conditioning Distribution System
15.2.3.1 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the Fabrication and

Installation of the entire ductwork to provide a complete Air
Distribution System including but not limited to associated volume
dampers, splitters dampers turning vanes, air extractors, supply,
return grilles/registers, hanger supports, insulation, flexible
connections and fixings.
15.2.3.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide a qualified/skilled mechanic with the

experiences in fabrication and installation of low pressure metal
ductwork. WORK shall be executed in a neat workmanlike manner
from high quality materials.
15.2.3.3 The ductwork to be furnished and installed shall comply with, but
not limited to the following codes and standards and Table 1
below:
SAES K-001 SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standards

SAMS SAUDI ARAMCO Material System
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
Page 186 of 221

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors

National Association
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-

conditioning Engineers
TABLE No. 1 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS FOR RECTANGULAR SHEET METAL

DUCTS FOR STATIC AIR PRESSURES UP TO 2 INCHES WC
For Pressures in Excess of 2-inch Water Column, Duct Wall Thickness Shall be Two Gages
Heavier Than Set Forth in This Table.
Duct specifications shown here are applicable when ducts larger than 18 inches are cross
broken. Where cross breaking is not used, duct wall thickness shall be two gages heavier
on ducts 19 inches through 60 inches wide unless longitudinal standing seams are used.
MINIMUM METAL GASES

Steel- Alumi Copp Duct
U.S num er Dimensio
Stand B. & Cold n
PERMISSIBLE GIRTH
ard S. Rolled (In
JOINTS AND
Inche Inche Inches)
LONGITUDINAL SEAMS
s s
(Gage (Gage
) )
Up
0.019 0.020 Drive Slip, Plain S Slip, or 1
16 OZ. through
(26) (24) Pocket Lock
12
13
Drive Slip, Plain S Slip, or 1
through
Pocket Lock
18
Hemmed S Slip, 1 Bar Slip,
or 1 Pocket Lock on 5 centers
or 1 Pocket Lock on 10
centers with 1 x 1 x 1/8
19
0.025 angles on center line
0.024 24 oz. through
(22) between
30
or 1 Pocket Lock on 10
centers with Cross break
1 Standing Seam on 5
centers
1 Bar Slip, Reinforced Bar
Slip, or Pocket Lock, on 5
31 centers
through 1 Bar Slip, Reinforced Bar
42 Slip, or Pocket Lock on 10
0.030 0.032 32 oz. centers with 1 x 1 x 1/8
(22) (20) angles on center line
between
Page 187 of 221
1 Standing Seam on 5
centers
Inside Longitudinal Standing
Seams with 1 x 1 x 1/8
angles on 5 center on
exterior
Slip, or Pocket Lock, on 4
centers
43 1 1/2 Bar Slip, Reinforced Bar
through Slip, or Pocket Lock on 8
54 centers with 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 x
1/8 angles on center line
between
Slip, or 1 Pocket Lock on 4
centers with Cross break
1 1/2 Standing Seam on 3
centers
Seams with 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 x
1/8 angles on 4 center on
exterior
0.036 0.040 36 oz. 55
(20) (18) through
60
Reinforced Bar Slip, Angle
Slip, Alternate Bar Slip or
Angle Reinforced Pocket
Lock on 4 centers using
11/2 x 1 1/2 x 1/8
reinforcing angles on center
line between
Reinforced Bar Slip, Angle
Slip, Alternate Bar Slip or
Angle Reinforced Pocket
61 Lock on 8 centers using
0.036 0.040
36 oz. through 11/2 x 1 1/2 x 1/8
(20) (18)
84 reinforcing angles and with
11/2 x 1 1/2 x 1/8 angles
on center line between
1 1/2 Angles Reinforced
Standing Seam on 2
centers using 1 1/2 x 1 1/2
x 1/8 reinforcing angles
exterior
0.050 48 oz 85 Companion Angles, Angle Slip,
(16) through or Angle Reinforced Pocket
Page 188 of 221
Lock using 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 x

3/16 companion or
reinforcing angles on
4centers with 1 1/2 x 1
1/2 x 3/16 angles on
center line between
Companion Angles, Angle Slip,
or Angle Reinforced Pocket
Lock using 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 x
0.047
3/16 companion or
(18)
reinforcing angles on
96
8centers with 1 1/2 x 1
1/2 x 3/16 angles on 2
center in between
0.0635
Standing Seam on 2
(16)
centers using 1 1/2 x 1 1/2
x 3/16 reinforcing angles
exterior
Lock using 2 x 2 x 1/4
companion or reinforcing
angles on 4centers with 2
x 2 x 1/4 angles on center
line between
Lock using 2 x 2 x 1/4
0.047 companion or reinforcing
0.050
(18) 48 oz. Over 96 angles on 8centers with 2
(16)
x 2 x 1/4 angles on 2
center in between
0.0635 Standing Seam on 2
(16) centers using 2 x 2 x 1/4
reinforcing angles
Seams with 2 x 2 x 1/4
angles on 2 center on
exterior
15.2.3.4 CONTRACTOR shall inform the Company Representative

of duct erection schedule so that they may observe and
inspect all ductwork during installation. Ductwork shall not
be concealed in any manner prior to inspection by the
Company Representative.
Page 189 of 221

15.2.3.5 Galvanized steel sheet material shall be with lock forming

quality (LFQ) with minimum galvanized coating of 34.4 g
total for both sides of one square foot of a sheet. ASTM
A527, coating G90.
15.2.3.6 CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all WORK be free from

defects in material and /or workmanship and shall repair or
replace at no additional cost to SAUDI ARAMCO any
defective WORK and material.
15.2.3.7 All joints and seams in ductwork and casing shall be

sealed per SMACNA standards to achieve a leakage rate
for the entire system of less than 2% at rated system
operated air flow and pressure. All transverse joints
between duct sections, duct tap-ins, branch duct
connections and access door installation shall be sealed
by using United Sheet Metal Duct Sealant or approved
equal.
15.2.3.8 All ductwork material delivered to the WORK Site and not
installed immediately is to be stored in a safe, dry location
and protected against damage or loss.
15.2.3.9 Duct hangers and support system shall be sized and

installed in accordance with SMACNA.
15.2.3.10 Access doors are to be installed in ducts at each volume

damper, fire dampers air flow measuring station and any
duct-mounted instrumentation. Doors shall be furnished in
accordance with SMACNA.
15.2.3.11 All screwed fasteners used in galvanized ductwork unless

otherwise noted shall be constructed of Cadmium plated or
galvanized steel. All riveted connections must be made
with 0.48 cm diameter steel pop rivets or flat head, tinned
iron rivets.
15.2.4 Install HVAC Unit/Equipment
15.2.4.1 Install package type A/C Unit comprising Fan Coil Unit (FCU)
/ Air Handling Unit (AHU) with matching Air Cooled
Condensing Unit (ACCU) including but not limited to
refrigerant piping, accessories, fixing, supports, concrete pad
and all related activities including all testing and
commissioning.
15.2.4.2 Install windows type A/C Units into prepared openings

including but not limited to supports and all related activities.
15.2.4.3 Install Mini-Split A/C Unit comprising ceiling /floor mounted

indoor FCU with matching outdoor ACCU including but not
Page 190 of 221

limited to thermostat control and air flow control, (high, low,

soft) discharge, and all related activities, testing and
commissioning. Outdoor Unit shall be designed for high
ambient conditions (1200 F) high efficiency and operate very
quietly. Control panel shall have cooling and heating
position. Condensate from evaporator coil shall drain to rear
of the unit to outside with P-trap.
15.2.5 Install Refrigerant Lines
15.2.5.1 Repair/Install refrigerant piping system connecting the

FCU/AHU and ACCU using soft drawn copper tubing
including but not limited to liquid moisture indicator, filter
drier insulation and supports.
15.2.5.2 Pressure test, vacuum test and charge the system with R-22
refrigerant and check all refrigerant piping test for leaks.
CONTRACTOR to schedule test and inform DUD and /or
Company Representative to witness test before application
of pipe insulation.
15.2.6 Install Air Grilles, Diffusers, Registers and Linear Diffusers (Any size
and shape)
15.2.6.1 Install grilles, diffusers, registers, linear diffusers and

dampers in accordance with manufacturers instruction and
recommendations.
15.2.6.2 Supply Diffusers shall be baked off white enamel aluminum,

ceiling mounted; 4-way flow pattern, opposed blade damper
control, perforated; maximum flow rate of 3CFM/square foot,
with required adapter to suit duct size. (Similar to SAP
1000189447).
15.2.6.3 Return Air Grille: air return; baked off white enamel; fixed
pattern; ceiling mounted. (Similar to SAP 1000193108).
15.2.6.4 Manual operator of each air outlet shall be positioned so that

it clearly and accurately indicates the position of the damper
blade.
15.2.6.5 The registers, grilles and diffusers that cannot be installed

immediately after delivery shall be stored in a safe dry
location to protect from damage or loss.
15.2.6.6 CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions when

installing grilles, diffusers and registers in order not to
damage ceiling or walls. Any such damage will be
repaired /or replaced by CONTRACTOR at no cost to SAUDI
ARAMCO.
Page 191 of 221

15.2.7 Install Flexible Metal Ducting (Low Pressure System)
15.2.7.1 Provide and install flexible ductwork system as shown on the

drawing free of kinks and sags.
15.2.7.2 Duct shall consist of a Multi-ply, Vinyl coated inner fiberglass

liner securely bonded to a vinyl coated spring steel wire helix
and reinforced by metal Mylar/Neoprene outer jacket.
15.2.7.3 Flexible metal duct shall comply with but not limited to the
following codes and standards.
NFPA STD 90A and 90B Standard for the

installation of air
condition & ventilating
system
SAES K-100 Heating ventilating and

air conditioning
SMACNA Low Velocity Duct
ASHRAE Guide & Data Book
15.2.7.4 Connection of flexible ductwork to the metallic duct system shall

be accomplished with factory fabricated fittings, like sleeves,
couplings, butterfly dampers and sealed using positive locking
steel bands and two complete wrapping of duct tape.
15.2.8 Fabricate and Install Final Connection between Air Handling Unit and
Ductwork
15.2.8.1 Metal Duct connection to Air Handling Equipment shall be angle

reinforced, flange connections secured by bolts. Joints are to be
gasket type with high-density neoprene and sealed airtight.
15.2.8.2 Reinforced angle shall be sized according to the largest duct

dimension at the connection point and shall be used on all sides of
the joint.
15.2.9 Install Exhaust Fans
15.2.9.1 Install and/or replace exhaust fans, roof, ceiling or wall mounted
into openings pre-prepared by carpenter/mason.
Exhaust fans shall be installed complete with all necessary fittings,

fixings, support brackets, cap cord and flexible cable/flexible
conduit.
Page 192 of 221

15.2.9.2 Exhaust fan sizes and type shall vary according to individual
project requirements. Test for correct operation on completion.
Installation shall be in compliance with the National Electrical
Codes in particular Article 422 and 430.
15.2.9.3 Exhaust fan shall conform to the following Codes and Standards
but not limited to.
AMCA Test Code for Air Moving Devices

UL Underwriters laboratories standard for safety for electric
fans
SAES SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standard
Unless noted otherwise on the schedule, exhaust shall have back

draft dampers of aluminum multi-blade construction. Dampers
shall be precision balanced full opening with felt edges and have
nylon bearing. All exhaust fans must bear the AMCA Certified
rating seal.
15.2.9.4 Replace exhaust fan filters and exhaust grilles.
15.2.10 Install Foil Backed Fiberglass BATT-Type Duct Insulation
15.2.10.1 Furnish and install duct insulation as shown in the drawing

including but not limited to sealer, adhesive and strapping
material attached to the duct.
15.2.10.2 Duct insulation material shall conform to the follow Codes or

Standard:-
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and

Air Conditioning Engineers
SAES SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standard
ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials
UL Underwriter Laboratories
15.2.10.3 Insulating material shall be free from defects in workmanship

and material under normal use and service.
15.2.10.4 Insulation Adhesive, Sealant and Vapor barrier coatings shall

be non combustible as defined in section 415 of Uniform
Building Code (UBC) shall have a flame-spread rating of not
more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than
50.
15.2.10.5 All insulation and finishes shall be securely wrapped and

installed as per manufacturers recommendation; around duct
Page 193 of 221

with all circumferential joints butted and with facing overlapped

at least 50 mm. longitudinal joints shall overlap at least 50 mm.
15.2.10.6 Apply adhesive to the ductwork in 100 mm strips on 200 mm

centers and allow drying time as necessary.
15.2.10.7 Secure all joints with 14 mm flare-door staple applied 150 mm

on center
15.2.10.8 All joints as well as all penetrations in the facing of the

insulation shall be taped with 76 mm wide foil reinforced Kraft
tape.
15.2.10.9 Notify the Company Representative of the insulation schedule

so that he can inspect all duct insulation before it is concealed
from view.
15.2.11 Install Exterior Type Duct Insulation
15.2.11.1 Furnish and install duct insulation to all external ductworks

including supply and return, as specified herein and as shown
on the drawings.
15.2.11.2 Duct insulation material shall conform to the following codes or

standards:
SAES K-100 SAUDI ARAMCO Mechanical (HVAC) Code
SAES K-001 HVAC
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration &

Air Conditioning Engineering
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors

National Association
15.2.11.3 Duct insulation material specification is flexible fiberglass 50

mm thick with exterior foil facing vapor barrier, 16.2 kg/cum
density, thermal conductivity of 215.36 cal/hr/s.q.m./degree.
Alternative type duct insulation may be used with the approval
of SAUDI ARAMCO / Dhahran Utilities Department (DUD)
Representative.
15.2.11.4 Install heavy duty canvas recovering jacket or GAUGE # 26

galvanize recovering Jacket with approved external paint
finished.
15.2.12 Testing, Balancing and Commissioning
15.2.12.1 Using the proper and standard equipment operated by

experienced and qualified personnel, CONTRACTOR shall
Page 194 of 221

perform the air balancing, testing and commissioning in

accordance with applicable codes and standards under the
Supervision of DUD.
15.2.12.2 Testing, balancing and commissioning of the HVAC System

shall comply with:
SAES K-100 Heating, Ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC)

SMACNA Manual for the balancing and adjusting of air
distribution system
15.2.12.3 After the ductwork has been tested and proved tight,
thoroughly clean all components, Dirt, Scale, Oil, and other
foreign substances which may have accumulated during the
installation process.
15.2.12.4 The HVAC Equipment, Ductwork and Piping forming the

respective systems shall be fully visible for inspection.
CONTRACTOR shall notify Company Representative & DUD
that he is ready for airflow test and initial start-up.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure proper air quantities and
patterns, thermostat operation and air filters are in place.
15.2.12.5 After balancing, testing and initial start-up, CONTRACTOR

shall install duct insulation covering and pipe thermal covering
in the presence of DUD and the SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Representative.
15.2.12.6 In the final inspection CONTRACTOR shall operate all

systems continuously trouble-free and stable for a minimum of
fourteen (14) consecutive days. Each day shall be a minimum
of an 8-hours day.
15.2.12.7 Any leakage in ductwork, piping or other defects observed

during this test shall be corrected by CONTRACTOR at no
cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
15.2.12.8 Upon completion of the WORK, CONTRACTOR shall submit

the following:
- A written tabulated test results stating that the air

distribution system have been tested, adjusted and
balanced to within 10% of the values shown in the drawing
- Actual CFM readings on his Mechanical As-Built
drawings
- Air and water balance test results for chilled water system
- Type written operating instructions, Automatic control
system diagrams & control sequence description framed
under glass and mounted in Mechanical Room.
15.2.13 Vacuum Cleaning of A/C Ductworks
Page 195 of 221

Source Removal Cleaning and decontaminating Process for Non-Porous

Materials:
15.2.13.1 CONTRACTOR shall remove and clean all supply and return
air ceiling diffusers, air grills and dampers.
15.2.13.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide all materials, equipments, tools,

scaffoldings and labor to perform the inspection and duct
cleaning services on the jobsite.
15.2.13.3 Prior to starting the duct cleaning works, all areas where
WORK will be performed shall be covered with polyethylene
sheets to prevent falling of dust on floor, furniture, etc.
15.2.13.4 CONTRACTOR shall mechanically clean all supply, return

and exhaust air ducts. The cleaning of ducts shall be
accomplished by rotary brushes, compressed air, vacuum
pump, air hoses and other mechanical duct cleaning
attachments.
15.2.13.5 CONTRACTOR shall make inspection ports in the ductwork.

The opening shall be 16 x 16 or of size as approved by the
SAUDI ARAMCO Engineer.
15.2.13.6 The cleaning of ceiling spaces shall be accomplished by

using vacuum cleaner and other appropriate methods
known.
15.2.13.7 CONTRACTOR shall clean the ductworks in sections of

effective cleaning.
15.2.13.8 All the air volume dampers shall be identified and marked
prior to starting the WORK. This is required to avoid
disturbance to air balance. Volume dampers shall be
returned to their original position upon completion of the A/C
ductworks.
15.2.13.9 CONTRACTOR shall seal all duct openings made during

cleaning to prevent ingress of duct, following completion of
the WORK.
15.2.13.10 All air outlets removed shall be installed on the same

location after completion of ductwork cleaning.
15.2.13.11 Upon completion of the cleaning, an authorized SAUDI

ARAMCO representative will witness, inspect and approve
the WORK performed by the contractor.
15.2.13.12 SAUDI ARAMCO will provide 110 / 220 volts 1 phase

electric power supply and source of clean water.
Page 196 of 221

15.2.13.13 Upon completion of duct cleaning process, the interior

surface of ductworks shall be treated with an approved
biocide to prevent / control biological contamination.
15.2.13.14 CONTRACTOR shall strictly comply with SAUDI ARAMCO

Safety Standards for protective equipment, ladders,
scaffoldings, and tools.
15.2.13.15 CONTRACTOR shall provide a competent person to operate

and supervise an air compressor where it shall be located in
place so as to have adequate air ventilation.
15.2.13.16 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the necessary dust

respirators are provided to their workers / operators.
15.2.13.17 All consumable materials required to complete the entire

WORK shall be provided.
15.2.13.18 CONTRACTOR shall remove dirt, debris, and dust from

WORK Site immediately.
15.2.13.19 CONTRACTOR WORK schedule shall change subject to

demands of SAUDI ARAMCO and their need to coordinate
their WORK with other WORK activities.
15.2.14 Dampers
15.2.14.1 Install volume dampers, fire dampers or combination of fire and

smoke dampers.
15.2.14.2 Fire Damper: Curtain type with blades in air stream,

galvanized mild steel construction, fire resistance rating 2 hrs.,
fusible link (replaceable) 71 C (160F), top blade riveted to
frame, stainless steel closure spring, locking ramps.
15.2.14.3 Fire and Smoke Damper Combination: roll formed hot

channel galvanized steel-16 gauge frame, roll triple V
galvanized steel-16 gauge blades, self oiling bronze bearings,
concealed plated steel linkage, UL Listed 165F standard
fusible link, mild steel galvanized-ASTM A 525 finish, spring
return two position 24 VAC.
15.2.14.4 Volume Damper: Galvanized, manually operated, single-

blade, with solid fixed bolt bearings rust resisting finish, with
screws.
15.2.15 Tools
The following tools, equipments, safety devices and the like will be
supplied by the CONTRACTOR.
Page 197 of 221

A. Negative air Machine

B. Air washing Equipment
C. Max Vacuum
D. Compressed Spray System
E. Duct Auger
F. Duct Sweeper
15.2.16 Miscellaneous
15.2.16.1 Fabricate and install ducting for kitchen and bathroom exhaust
fan thru roof using PAL duct materials complete with
necessary fittings and accessories.
15.2.16.2 Remove and replace fiberglass connection between AHU and

ductworks with new PAL Duct materials.
16.0 ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR shall perform WORK which shall include but not be limited to all
applicable activities involved for the successful completion of electrical WORK.
All WORK shall be done in accordance with the National Electrical Codes, National Fire
Protection Codes and SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standards. It shall be the
CONTRACTOR's obligation to comply fully with the requirements of all applicable sections
of codes, standards and specifications.
WORK to be performed shall include but not be limited to installation of all necessary
underground primary and secondary distribution systems, transformers, load centers,
panel boards, raceways, cable trays, conduits, cables, grounding, fixtures, fittings, fixings
and all other associated appurtenances that constitute a complete electrical installation.
Commission and test on completion, all test to be carried out in the presence of the SAUDI
ARAMCO Project Engineer and Inspection Department. No direct buried cables or
conduits to be back filled and no internal conduits, cables, boxes, enclosures or fittings to
be covered over until the installation has been inspected by the SAUDI ARAMCO
Inspection Department, and is acceptable to the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.
16.1 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE
Work to be performed shall include but not be limited to the removal of all associated
electrical devices, service equipment, conduits, cables, cable trays, raceways,
fixtures, fittings, fixings and all other electrical appurtenances not specifically
mentioned herein, to enable re-construction to perform by other trades. All other
electrical equipment, fixtures and fittings remaining in site during re-construction/
renovation to be inspected, cleaned, serviced and tested prior to re-installation.
16.2 PREPARE AND INSTALL CONDUITS
The installation of Electrical Conduits and Fittings shall be in accordance with SAES-
P-104 WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS.
Page 198 of 221

16.2.1 Direct buried conduit shall be (a) threaded, rigid steel per ANSI C80.1, except
it shall be hot-dip galvanized and PVC coated per NEMA RN 1 (minimum
thickness of PVC: 40 mils), or (b) Type DB PVC conduit per NEMA TC 8.
16.2.2 Conduit above ground in outdoor, industrial facilities shall be threaded; rigid
steel per ANSI C80.1, except it shall be hot-dip galvanized.
16.2.3 Conduit above ground in severe corrosive environments shall be factory

PVC coated (minimum thickness of PVC: 40 mils) per NEMA RN 1.
16.2.4 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) is acceptable only in non-hazardous indoor

locations. EMT shall comply with the requirements of ANSI C80.3.
16.2.5 Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is prohibited.
16.2.6 The minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch, except on instrument panels,
inside buildings, on prefabricated skids, and in non-industrial areas, where
the minimum size conduit shall be 1/2 inch.
16.2.7 Conduit and threaded conduit fittings shall have tapered (NPT) threads in
accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.
16.2.8 Field cut conduit threads shall be coated with a zinc rich protective coating.
16.3 PREPARE AND INSTALL CONDUIT FITTINGS
16.3.1 Conduit fittings above ground in outdoor, industrial facilities shall be cast or
forged steel, cast iron or malleable iron, either hot-dip galvanized (preferably),
or zinc electroplated as supplied by the manufacturer. No aluminum fittings
shall be used. Only malleable iron sealing fittings shall be used. Gray cast
iron split type (EYSR) retrofit sealing fittings may be used if required for repair
purposes.
16.3.2 Conduit fittings above ground in severe corrosive environments shall be as

specified above but in addition, shall be protected by one of the following
methods:
A. Factory-coating with PVC (minimum thickness of PVC: 40 mils) per

NEMA RN 1. Internal surfaces of PVC sleeves (boots) and other mating
PVC surfaces shall be coated with PVC patching compound (SAMS 15-
307-500). Uncoated plugs and other bare metal shall be coated with PVC
patching compound, or with SAES-H-101 APCS-22 (offshore), or APCS-
26 (onshore).
B. Field-coating prior to installation in accordance with SAES-H-101 APCS-

22 (offshore), or APCS-26 (onshore). Light (sweep) sandblasting is
required prior to coating so that the zinc is not removed. After installation,
any bare metal must be touched up using either of the above coatings,
without sandblasting.
Page 199 of 221

C. By heat-shrinkable tubes or wrap-around, where the geometric

configuration permits it.
16.3.3 Conduit fittings for direct buried PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be
factory PVC coated.
16.3.4 Threads of plugs, junction boxes and other fittings shall be lightly lubricated
with a rust preventive grease such as Crouse Hinds thread lubricant (Similar
to SAP 1000405418) or High Purity Goop (Similar to SAP 1000174895)
before assembly.
16.4 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS
All conduits bent in the field shall have a radius of not less than six (6) times the
inside diameter of the conduit. Conduits shall be offset where necessary to enter
boxes, fittings, enclosures and panel boards or where required to achieve correct
appearance. There shall not be more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360o
total) between pull points, e.g. conduit bodies and boxes. Conduits shall be fixed
using approved fixing methods for the location of the WORK. No conduit over 3 m
long shall be installed without a support/clip. The maximum distance from any joint
box, enclosure or fitting without a support/clip is 1 m. Conduit shall be installed as a
complete system as provided in Article 300, NEC and shall be securely fastened in
place. Install PVC coated rigid steel conduit complete with all necessary fittings,
fixtures, supports, clamps, brackets, boxes. Conduits shall be installed surface
mounted on walls or ceilings or in pre-prepared underground trench. All WORK shall
be in accordance with Article 318 of the National Electrical Codes.
During the course of construction, all exposed conduit ends shall be kept sealed by
the use of capped bushings. Conduit surfaces which have been marked by wrenches
or other devices shall be painted with aluminum paint to protect the surface
EMT/Rigid conduit shall not be installed directly in the ground unless coated or
wrapped by a corrosion protective wrapping.
16.5 INSTALL CONDUCTORS & WEATHER PROOF JUNCTION BOX
All Wire and Cable shall be installed in accordance with SAES P-104 WIRING
METHODS AND MATERIALS. All Wire and Cables shall have copper conductors.
Underground direct buried cables shall generally be of the following type: MC, MV,
XPLE/EPR, PVC / PVC for use in Dry or Wet locations. Building Cables installed in
conduit shall be type THHN, THWN or NYA. Residential units may use type NM
Sheathed & NMC cables. They shall be stapled every 112 mm and must be stapled
within every 300 mm of a box or enclosure. Pull Data and speaker cable in conduits
already in place. Care must be exercised in pulling wires into conduit to prevent
damage, not to kink the wire, put undue stress on the wire or otherwise abrade the
wire. No grease will be permitted in pulling wires into conduit or talc and only SAUDI
ARAMCO approved pulling compound will only be permitted for this purpose.
All Telecommunication premises distribution systems shall be wired with approved

category 3 telephone/data cables run in metallic conduit. Telephone & data outlet
boxes shall be mounted 300 mm above the finished floor level, or floor mounted in
Page 200 of 221
office type buildings where required. All WORK shall be done in accordance with the
provisions defined in Article 800 of the N.E.C., EIA/TIA, SAES T- 916 and BICSI
Manual.
Install new coaxial cable for TV in metallic Conduit or CCTV and speakers cable.
16.5.1 Contractor shall provide exterior weather proof junction box

stainless steel with approved or equal gasket and rubber
including knock-outs minimum of diameter.
16.5.2 Contractor shall provide exterior weather proof junction box
galvanized powder-coated to match finish color, approved or
equal gasket and rubber including knock-outs minimum of
diameter.
16.6 WEATHER HEADS
Service drops shall be disconnected, conduit and cable removed and retained for
future use when called for by SAUDI ARAMCO. Service drops shall be re-installed
connected to panel board / main circuit breaker as required by SAUDI ARAMCO in
conjunction with other trades. Service drop/weather head conduit shall vary in size
according to load requirements. Service drops/weather heads shall be installed in
compliance with Article 225 and 230 of the National Electric Codes. Service drop
cables shall be supported by messenger support wire connected to the service drop
conduit below the service weather head. All service drops shall be installed using
Rigid Steel conduit.
16.7 INSTALL MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL BOARDS, PANEL BOARDS AND LOAD
CENTERS
The Main Distribution Panel Boards / Power / Lighting Panel shall be fitted with a
Main Circuit Breaker and Branch Circuit Breakers. Panels shall be surface, flush or
floor mounted as determined by individual project requirements, and shall be
installed in compliance with Article 384 of the National Electrical Code.
16.7.1 All panel boards shall have a rating not less than the minimum feeder
capacity required for the load computed in accordance with NEC article 220.
16.7.2 Number of over current devices on one panel board shall not be more than
42 (other than those provided for in the mains). Panel board shall be clearly
marked by the manufacturer with the voltage, current rating and number of
phases for which they are designed, rated and approved.
16.7.3 The total load on any over current device located in the panel board shall not
exceed 80 percent of its rating where in normal operation the load will
continue for 3 hours or more. Loads on each phase should be balanced and
computed in accordance with NEC article 220.
16.7.4 Feeder and Branch Circuit wiring shall observe the proper selection of
conductor of the correct size to provide the necessary capacity and minimum
Page 201 of 221

voltage drop. Likewise, check the marking which indicates the type of
conductor used for a certain condition.
16.7.5 Electrical Panel board or Distribution Panel & Circuit Breaker
a. Contractor shall provide main distribution panel board shall be

installed in compliance with Article 384 of NEC.
b. Contractor shall provide panel board or distribution panel
board with main breaker whatever size as per required on the
design including branches breakers and neutral bus bar with
the of voltage 110 volts to 480 volts, minimum of 6 up to 42
branches must be approved by UL or CE.
c. Must be NEMA 1 to 4X exterior and interior, weather proof
type, wall mounted or recessed mounted must have lock and
nameplate.
d. Service Conditions
General Specifications
1. Panel boards installed indoors shall be suitable for continuous
operation under the following service conditions:
1.1 Ambient air temperature:

1.1.1.1 A maximum of 40C
1.1.1.2 A minimum of 0C
1.1.1.3 Average temperature, measured over a period of 1
month, is a maximum of 35C
1.2 Relative humidity (average value):
1.2.1.1 For a period of 24 hours, does not exceed 95%.
1.2.1.2 For a period of 1 month, does not exceed 90.
2 Panel boards installed outdoors shall be suitable for continuous operation
under the following service conditions
2.1 Ambient air temperature
2.1.1.1 A maximum of 40C
2.1.1.2 A minimum of 0C
2.1.1.3 Average temperature, measured over a period of 1
month, is a maximum of 35C
2.2 Altitude is less than 1000 meters, unless a higher altitude is
specified within Data Schedule 1:
2.3 Average value of the relative humidity:
2.3.1.1 For a period of 24 hours, does not exceed 95%.
2.3.1.2 For a period of 1 month, does not exceed 90%.
2.4 Relative humidity may be temporarily 100%:
2.5 Exposure to the following:
2.5.1.1 Air-borne dust concentration of 1 mg/m with 95% of
all particles less than 20 micrometers in diameter.
Dust includes compounds of calcium, sodium,
magnesium, silicon and aluminum.
2.5.1.2 Pollutants such as H2S - 20 ppm, SO2 - 10 ppm, CO -
75 ppm, NOX - 5 ppm, hydrocarbons - 100 ppm, NaCl
- 300 ppm and MgCl - 50 ppm.
3 Rating
Page 202 of 221

3.1 Rated Duty: Continuous

3.2 Rated Current (minimum): 100A
Excemption to 3.2: 63 A is the minimum current rating for the
flameproof panel boards
3.3 Short Circuit interrupting rating (minimum): 10 kA rms
4 Enclosures shall bear labels from a third party testing laboratory (i.e., UL,
CSA, BASEEFA, KEMA, etc.) indicating that they are designed,
constructed and tested to the applicable standards referenced within this
specification.
5 Enclosures of panel boards installed outdoors shall have the following

characteristics.
5.1 When severe corrosive environment is specified within Data
Schedule 1, the enclosure design shall be either.
5.1.1 Type 4X per NEMA 250
Exception to 9.2.1: Galvanized and/or painted or
coated carbon steel sheet metal material shall not be
used
5.1.2 Type 3 or 4 per NEMA 250 and manufactured of

copper free cast aluminum or plastic.
5.1.3 IP6X per IEC 60529 and manufactured of stainless
steel, copper free cast aluminum or plastic
5.2 If a severe corrosive environment, is not specified, it is
acceptable that the panel board enclosure meet the requirements
of either.
5.2.1 Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 3/7, 4/7 or 4X/7 per NEMA 250.
5.2.2 Type 3 per NEMA 250 and manufactured of copper
free cast aluminum, plastic or galvanized carbon sheet
metal.
5.2.3 IPYX per IEC 60529. Where Y shall be the numeral 5
or 6 and X shall be a numeral between 4 and 8
inclusive.
5.3 Enclosures rated Type 3, 4 or 4X per NEMA 250 shall be equipped
with Type 300 Series stainless steel hardware.
6 Panel boards specified as being installed outdoors and having and

internal volume exceeding 2,000 cm shall be provided with Type 300
Series stainless steel breather and drain fittings.
Exception to 9.3: Thin wall (sheet metal or plastic) enclosures may
be drained by drilling a 5 mm hole in the bottom of the enclosure.
7 Grounding (Earthing)
7.1 A ground bus shall be provided within the panel board
8 Nameplates
8.1 White Nameplates with black lettering shall be provided to identify
the panel board with the tag number indicated within Data
Schedule 1
9 Preventive Maintenance for Electrical Panel Board or Distribution Panel.
9.1 Contractor shall comply with Aramco Standard Preventive
maintenance for Panel Board with the branches of 6 up to 42, 220
Page 203 of 221

volts Contractor shall not limited to check and label all the
branches and make type written updated directory
e. Circuit Breaker
1 If the breaker size is not specified within the purchasing documents,

breakers shall have a minimum trip rating of 20 A.
2 Breakers operating at greater than 240 Volts shall be equipped with
padlockable lock-off devices.
3 Tandem, twin, or half-size breakers shall not be used.
4 When main circuit disconnectors are used, they shall be sized to allow the
main bus to be operated at its full current rating.
5 Panel boards shall be equipped with a minimum of 10% spare breakers
and a minimum of 10% spare pole spaces. If not indicated in the
engineering documents, the sizes of the spare breakers shall be
representative of the connected breakers within the panel boards.
Exception to II - 5:
The explosion proof panel boards shall be completely filled with breakers.
6 Ground fault protective functions shall not be installed on any incoming or
outgoing circuits.
Exception:
Branch circuit Ground fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs) with nominal 5 ma
trip levels or Equipment Protection Devices (EPDs) with nominal 30 mA
trip level or residual current devices (RCDs) with 5 to 30 ma trip levels are
allowed.
16.8 SAFETY SWITCH
Install or replace safety switch fused or non-fused surface mounted in rainproof and
dust proof enclosure. Enclosures shall be NEMA I for internal locations general duty,
NEMA 3R Rainproof, NEMA 4 Stainless steel rainproof and dust proof. Safety
switches shall be 400 to 600V rated 2/3 Pole up to a maximum Ampere rating of 400
amps, solid neutral.
16.9 LIGHTING CONTACTORS, MAGNETIC CONTACTORS, AND COMBINATION

MAGNETIC STARTER
Install or replace Lighting contactors, magnetic contactors or combination magnetic

starter inclusive of connecting all associated conduits cables. Contactor shall be
specifically rated for Inductive and resistive loads. Contactor shall generally be rated
120 to 600 V max, 2 to 12 Poles, 20 to 30 amperes continuous rating. Install or
replace Contactors varying from NEMA size 0 - NEMA size 3. Ampere rating shall
vary from 18 to 400 amps, Single/Triple Pole. Contactors shall be installed to control
water-heating, air conditioning and motor loads.
16.10 CIRCUIT BREAKERS (Molded Case)
Install or replace circuit breakers up to 600 V operating voltage. Existing

Symmetrical interrupting rating of main breaker to be checked before replacement
of any branch circuit breakers. Replacement branch circuit breakers must be
Page 204 of 221

compatible with main breaker system interrupting rating. Circuit breakers shall be
either, plug in, screwed on, bolt on or self contained in a suitable enclosure. Circuit
breaker capacity shall vary from 5 amperes Single/Double/Triple Pole to a
maximum 2500 amperes Triple Pole. Install or replace ground fault circuit breakers
up to 600 V operating voltage, Single/Double/Triple Pole. Capacity range from 20
to 2500 amperes. Circuit breakers may be installed in main distribution panels
containing main disconnect device and/or branch circuit devices. Connection of
feeder cables and distribution cables is deemed to be inclusive for the circuit
breakers and disconnect devices.
16.11 INSTALL SWITCHES (General Purpose or Dimmer), RECEPTACLES (General

Purpose or GFI), DATA/TELEPHONE/INTERCOM AND TELEVISION OUTLET.
Outlet boxes unless otherwise specified for convenience outlets shall be centered
300 mm above the finished floor level and all wall switch outlets 1.5 m. above
finished floor level. Set all boxes so that fixtures are true, plumb and at right
angles to wall or ceiling. Install either flush or surface mounted.
Unless otherwise stated or directed, all outlet boxes shall be surface or flush
mounted, installed in exposed or accessible areas and shall be located at a point in
the wiring system suitable for connection to utilization equipment.
Pull boxes shall be installed where required and shall conform to percentage
capacity fill in accordance with Article 370-6/7 of the National Electrical Codes.
Likewise shall be so installed that the wiring contained in them can be rendered
accessible without removing any part of the building or any structure that is to be
used to establish finish surface (see NEC Article 380-19).
Switches and Receptacle installed outdoors in a location protected from the

weather or in other damp locations shall have an enclosure for the switches &
receptacle that is weatherproof cover or plate.
All lighting installations shall comply with SAES P 123.
16.12.1 Lighting fixtures of either incandescent or fluorescent shall be securely

mounted to outlet boxes or to its respective attachment.
Recessed portions of lighting fixtures enclosures, other than at the points

of supports, shall be spaced at least 12.7 mm from combustible materials.
16.12.2 Pendant and surface-mounted light fixtures shall be supported in

compliance with N.E.C. (Article 410). Pendant fixtures shall be
suspended by and supplied through threaded rigid metal conduit.
16.12.3 Where fixtures are mounted in frames in the ceiling. The frames are
required to be securely attached to the building structure by approved
fasteners (NEC 410-16). The fixtures thus basically supported from
building structure.
Page 205 of 221

16.12.4 The outlet boxes for fixtures are mounted on the original ceiling above
the hung ceiling with approved connected raceway. Fixtures are then fed
through flexible raceway to knock-outs in the end plates of light fixture or
another suitable entrance.
16.12.5 Wet and Damp Location. Fixtures installed in water or damp locations
shall be so installed that water cannot enter or accumulate in wiring
compartment. All fixtures installed in wet location shall be marked,
Suitable for Wet locations. All fixtures installed in damp location shall be
marked, Suitable for Damp locations.
16.12.6 Lighting Track shall be permanently installed and permanently connected

to a branch circuit. Only lighting track fittings shall be installed on lighting
track. Lighting track fittings shall not be equipped with general-purpose
receptacles. Lighting track shall not be installed where likely to be
subjected to physical damage, in wet or damp locations, subject to
corrosive vapors or in hazardous locations.
16.12.7 Photoelectric Switch
a. Contractor shall provide Control Photoelectric; 105/285

Vac, 60 HZ, 1000 W, 1800 VA Supply,Pole Mtng,For street
lighting,UL 773,SPST NC Snap Action Contact, Twist-Lock
CTR, Built in time delay, Turn ON at 1 FC, 0.3 W Power
consumption, W/Built-in Surge Protection, -40 tp 50 Deg C
Temp range, 81.3 MM (3.200 IN) DIA X 57.2 MM (2-1/4 IN)
HT, high impact resistance molded housing, weatherproof,
Series A, Conforms to EEI-NEMA STD, Fit mounting
bracket And Locking-type eceptable and pole top adapter
16.12.8 Analog Timer
a) Contractor shall provide TIMER; 4-110 MIN,OFF/ON

delay opeation, 208/240 Vac, 60 HZ,2 Min
INCRMNTS,Defrost control type, 40 A contact, 1NO-1NC,
(2) SPST action` analog, surface mounting, NEMA 1
enclosure, captive screw terminal, UL, CSA, time
initiated remote switch terminated, 1.49 KW (2 HP) 690
VA pilot duty 120/240 Vac per pole, steel case grey
wrinkle finish, 1-6 cycle per day min 4 HRS between
successive cycle
16.12.9 Switch Limit

a. Contractor shall provide SPST Action,Plug-in, 1NO-1NC,
10 DEG Pre Travel, 4 Deg differential travel, TR -29 to 85
Deg C,600 Vac Max, 10 A Cont, 60 A Male, 6 A Break AT
115 Vac, for heavy duty, die-cast zinc case,0.51 J (4.5
IN/LB) operating force, level arm actuator, Nema, 2, 4, 13
enclosure, CL 1 GR C, D, With Lever Arm, Spriing Return,
Turret Head, CLASS 9007, TYPE B.
Page 206 of 221

16.12.10 Lighting Contactor
a. Contractor shall provide Lighting type,3 Pole,600 Vac, 60

HZ Line,30 A,2NO-2NC,Surface Mtg, open enclosure,
120-240 Vac, 60 hz Coil, UL, CSA, electrically held
contact, specially rated to mercury-arc, Tungsten &
fluorescent lamp load.
b. Contractor shall provide Lighting type,3 Pole,600 Vac, 60
c. Contractor shall provide Lighting type,3 Pole,600 Vac, 60
16.12.11 Underwater Swimming Pool Lights:
Contractor shall provide underwater lights, should be IP 67 or 68 CE or UL

approved 220 volts main and 12 volts secondary ballasted with Saudi Aramco
approved gasket-rubber wall mounted with 12 volts lamp including protecting
fuse.
16.12.12 Garden Lights:
Spot Light:
E27 or G12 base lamps, aluminum or fiberglass housing minimum tempered
glass has approved silicon-rubber gasket and stainless steel screw & nuts 220
volts.
Recommended Model: NLC 704 or Equal
16.12.13 Floodlight 150:
Contractor shall provide FIXTURE HID LIGHTING; 220 VAC,150 W W,1

LAMP,WALL MTG, Metal Halide or HPS Type, high power factor ballast, bronze
eletrocoat finish, for wet location, die cast aluminum casing, weather proof, UL or
CE, polycarbonate door used as prismatic UV stabilized lens, anodal finish
specular aluminum reflector, with lamps, vandal proof, mogul screw base.
Page 207 of 221


eletrocoat finish, for wet location, die cast aluminum casing, weather proof, UL,
polycarbonate door used as prismatic UV stabilized lens, anodal finish specular
aluminum reflector, with lamps, vandal proof, mogul screw base.

eletrocoat finish, for wet location, die cast aluminum casing, weather proof, UL,
polycarbonate door used as prismatic UV stabilized lens, anodal finish specular
aluminum reflector, with lamps, vandal proof, mogul screw base.
16.12.16 Down Pin Lights:
Contractor shall provide pin light with housing and trim is made of die cast
aluminum powder coated with epoxy powder paint chromium plated color finish
as standard UV resistance after phosphochromate treatment. Lamp housing
should be movable and recessed mounted, dimmable.
220 volts including halogen lamp, ballasted.
16.12.17 DownLights Recessed Mounted:
Contractor shall provide downlight fixtures, 1 or 2 lamps CFL with E27 base
socket with aluminum reflector and has opal diffuser or equal 220 volts including
lamp.
Recommended Model: NLC 270, NLC 271, NLC 273A & NLC 273B or
Equal
16.12.18 Decorative Lighting Pole:
Contractor shall provide Install/replace Decorative Fiberglass or Aluminum

Lighting Post, 2-3 Meters High, Lamp 75 to 150 watts (HPS OR Metal Halide)
mogul base, 2-3 meter high, photocell switch, termination block, 1 or 2 arms,
including reinforced concrete foundation.
Page 208 of 221

Recommended Model: NLCP
16.12.19 LED lighting fixtures:
Contractor shall provide LED lighting fixtures with accordance to SAES-123, wall
mounted ceiling also for recessed type of LED lighting fixtures, from 2700K to
5600K CCT minimum of CRi of 80 with the voltage of 110 to 277 volts dimmable
of non-dimmable interior or exterior should not be underwater.
Recommended Model: NLCP
16.12.20 Oven lamp indicator:
Contractor shall provide LED lamp indicator including all necessary accessories
to be connected to the oven and place it before or need the main door.
Contractor shall also include the installation of conduits and pulling wire, cutting
of gypsum board if necessary and return to original form.
16.12.21 LED Flood Light Fixtures:
Body and gear box: Die Cast Aluminum housing with anodized aluminum
reflector wall & roof mounted, with photocell switch CCT 3000K 5000K, 100
-300 watts 110-277 volts 50/60 hz IP 65 protection as per Saudi Aramco Lighting
Standard for LED, for reference SAES - 123.
16.12.22 LED HighBay Lighting Fixtures:
Body and gear box: Die Cast Aluminum housing with anodized aluminum
reflector pendant type, with photocell switch, CCT 3000K 5000K, 110-277 volts
50/60 hz IP 65 protection as per Saudi Aramco Lighting Standard for LED, for
reference SAES - 123.
16.12.23 Chandelier:
Dining:
E27 lamp base 8 lamps, maximum of 100 watts per bulb 220 volts glass diffuser
and satin nickel / satin chrome finish tone including LED Bulbs 8 watts.
Page 209 of 221

Breakfast:
E27 lamp base 3 lamps, maximum of 100 watts per bulb 220 volts glass diffuser
and satin nickel / satin chrome finish tone including LED Bulbs 8 watts.
16.12.24 220 volts outlet UK (British) type:
Contractor shall provide 13 Ampere - 250 Volt duplex outlet (UK1-13R), BS1363A
type G sockets, single pole On / Off switches control outlets, shuttered contact, 2
Pole - 3 Wire Grounding (2P+E) white.
Note: Duplex wall boxes= # 72355, # 72355-F, # 72365.
16.12.25 WindSock:
Contractor shall provide and install windsock Type, Size 28 In Dia X 7 TO 8 FT

LG, For Airport, high Visibility framing orange, Weatherproof, fluorescent
plasticized cloth whatever necessary fittings needed.
16.12.26 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures with Emergency Ballast:
Contractor shall provide and install 2x32 watts fluorescent lighting fixtures
whatever necessary fittings needed with emergency ballast.
Contractor shall provide and install 4x40 watts fluorescent lighting fixtures
whatever necessary fittings needed with emergency ballast.
Note: See more details on Schedule B Attachement IV
16.12.27 Emergency Ballast on existing fixtures:
Contractor shall provide and install emergency ballast, battery capacity 1 2

hours including necessary fittings needed for fluorescent and CFL.
16.12.28 Emergency Light:
Contractor shall provide and install LIGHT emergency/safety; emergency type,

wall mounting, 50 W,120 Vac,"emergency", incandescent lamp,6 V rechargeable
battery, sealed beam light, steel housing, UL, covered automatic, 40 A - Hour
lead acid 6 volts, with multirate, silicon, solid state integrated charging power, low
battery connection disconnect, LED pilot light, test switch, 3 ft. power plug & 18
ga steel cabinet, battery shipped charged & dry, 60 HZ, 1 PH input, two bulbs,
adjustable, holes on back, two adjustable floodlight heads, two 25 watts PAR36
sealed beam, BULB NO 4510, adjustable, 90 watts minimum.
Page 210 of 221

Available also for battery operated.
16.12.29 Exit Lights:
Fully illuminated 6 letters with stroke is achieved with high output, long
lasting red or green (LED) and exclusive matched diffuser eliminates hot spots
providing optimal light output. Charging circuit is solid state type with constant
current charged and transfer design. Circuit is brown out protected and provided
a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency run time and rechargeable time of 12
hours. Push to test switch and an LED AC indicator provides simple means for
manual test. Maintenance free sealed Nickel Cadmium Battery. (-7 deg C to 35
def c. single face or double face
16.12.30 Hazardous Environment (Explosion Proof) Lighting Fixtures
Application: Hazardous Location

Specification:
o Class I, Divisiong 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
o Zone 1 to 4
o Nema 3, 4 & 4X
o UL Approved (UL 1598A Marine Outside Type & UL 844 Hazardous Location)
o Enclosed and Gasketed
o Glass or Poly Carbonate globe
o Suitable for indoor or outdoor
o Compact fluorescent or LED bulbs available
o Suitable for commercial and industrial uses only
o Twist lock Lamp Holder (CFL)
o NPT Hubs
16.12.31 Hazardous Environment (Explosion Proof) Outlets and Switches
Application: Hazardous Location
Specification:
o Class I, Divisiong 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
o Zone 1 to 4
o Nema 3, 4 & 4X
o UL Approved (UL 1598A Marine Outside Type & UL 844 Hazardous Location)
o Enclosed and Gasketed
o Glass or Poly Carbonate globe
o Suitable for indoor or outdoor
o Compact fluorescent or LED bulbs available
o Suitable for commercial and industrial uses only
o Twist lock Lamp Holder (CFL)
o NPT Hubs
Page 211 of 221

16.12.32 Air Curtain:
Minimum motor hp 1/6 with automatic on/off has variable speed including limit
switch 220 volts, capable to mount on wall surface and ceiling recessed.
Available length should be 0.9 meter to 2 meters maximum.
With filter Aluminum filter
With flying insect protection
Environmental Protection
16.12.33 LED Bulbs:
Contractor shall provide LED bulbs 2 watts up to 20 watts with CCT 2700K -
5000K, CTI 80.
CE and UL approved as per SAES P-123.
Has aluminum heat sink
Minimum of 50000 hours
E27 Base, 90-220 volts
16.12.34 Safety Switch or Disconnect Switch:
Safety Switch; non-fusible type, 240 Vac, 30 A up to 100 amps, 3 Wire, 3PST
Action, 174.6 MM (6-7/8 IN) WD X 84.1 mm (3.310 IN) d X 250.8 mm (9-7/8 in) h
enclosure, surface mounting, NEMA 3R enclosure steel 16 ga., satin gray
enamel, hot deep galvanized enclosure, NEMA KS1, UL-98, general duty, quick
break, visual on / off indicator, visible blades contacts, right hand operation.
16.12.35 Floor Mounted Outlets:
Contractor shall provide and install floor mounted outlets including junction box
and covers as per Aramco Standard 220 volts and telephone outlets.
16.13 ELECTRIC MOTORS
Disconnect electric motors of various H.P. ratings for service, repair (by others) or
direct replacement. Re-connect and test when service, repair or replacement is
required. Install new electric motors inclusive of flexible conduit/cable connection,
guide rails, bolting down to base and starter connections. Conduits rigid, and
holding down bolt already in place, various H.P. ratings from fractional H.P. to 5
H.P.
16.13.1 Motor Pump:
Page 212 of 221

Contractor shall provide and install/replace any type of pumps

submersible, booster, circulating & centrifugal, 220 volts, 60 Hz, 1 or 3
Phase, Continuous minimum inlet diameter and outlet 2 diameter.
16.14 TRANSFORMERS & CONCRETE DUCT BANK
All Transformers shall comply with the SAUDI ARAMCO Engineering Standard
SAES- P 121 and Dry-type transformers shall be installed in accordance with the
NEC and AMSI C57.94.
Install Dry type transformers pad or wall mounted inclusive of conduit and cable
termination, conduits and cables already in place. Where pad mounted transformer
are called for, concrete pad will be installed ready to receive transformer. Where
wall mounted transformer are called for, frame WORK will be installed ready to
receive transformer. Connect grounding as required. All WORK shall be tested and
test results approved prior to any cable connections being performed.
16.14.1 Concrete shall provide dry type transformer 15-75 kva ventilated self
cooled, 480 volts pri delta and 110/208 volts secondary wye connection
dry type insulation 150 deg weather shield 150 ded C ave winding rise
above max 180 deg with name plate and complete accessories
a. Concrete shall be in accordance with SAES Q

001 and either structural or nonstructural as
follows.
b. Contractor shall provide reinforced concrete duct
bank with the minimum 4 diameter PVC pipe.
c. Contractor shall provide and repair the asphalt or
concrete paving after duct bank is done.
16.15 INSTALL WIRE WAY DUCT
Install wire way ducting/gutter complete with all necessary fixing screws, bolts,
fittings and other associated parts. Wire way ducts/gutters shall be of varying sizes.
Wire ducts/gutters shall be installed in accordance with Article 362 of the National
Electrical Codes and SAES P - 104. Any surface scaring, damage, caused to
surface finish during installation shall be touched up with paint to match the
manufacturers finish.
16.16 INSTALL WIRE MOLD RACEWAY
Install wire mold type surface mounted raceway system inclusive of all boxes,
bends, tees, clips, clamps and associated fixings. Wire mold raceway is only to
Page 213 of 221

be used for small extensions to existing system, where it is not feasible to use
conduit or other methods. All WORK shall be in accordance with Article 352 of
N.E.C. codes and SAES P 104.
16.17 INSTALL CHANNEL STRUT RACEWAY
Install in accordance with SAES P 104 Electrical/Mechanical support Raceway

Channel System for Fluorescent H.I.D. lighting distribution and small power
distribution inclusive of all fittings, accessories and fixtures. Channel erector
system components (Unistrut or similar) used to support conduits, cable trays,
enclosures, lighting fixtures and other electrical equipment shall be made of steel
or iron, either hot-dip galvanized (preferably), or zinc electroplated as supplied by
the manufacturer.
Channel erector system components (Unistrut or similar) used to support conduits,

cable trays, enclosures, lighting fixtures and other electrical equipment in severe
corrosive environments shall be: protected in accordance with manufactured from
(A) stainless steel; or (B) fiberglass.
16.18 INSTALL CHANNEL STRUT SUSPENDED ON ROD HANGERS
Install in accordance with SAESP104 channel strut suspended on rod hangers

at various heights from finished floor level. Install channel strut assembled to form
frame WORK for Panel boards, Switch gear and other miscellaneous electrical
equipment, frame WORK to be mounted on walls or ceilings as required, inclusive
of all fixings, fittings, and other accessories as required by specific installations.
Channel erector system components (Unistrut or similar) used to support conduits,
cable trays, enclosures, lighting fixtures and other electrical equipment shall be
made of steel or iron, either hot-dip galvanized (preferably), or zinc electroplated as
supplied by the manufacturer. Channel erector system components (Unistrut or
similar) used to support conduits, cable trays, enclosures, lighting fixtures and
other electrical equipment in severe corrosive environments shall be: protected in
accordance with manufactured from (A) stainless steel; or (B) fiberglass.
16.19 CABLE TRAY SUPPORT SYSTEM ALUMINUM LADDER TYPE
Install cable tray support system in accordance with SAES-P-104 WIRING

METHODS AND MATERIALS. Cable tray support system shall be inclusive of
fittings, accessories and fixings such as Flange Clamps, Suspension Bars, Strap
Hangers, Continuous Threaded Hanger, Splice Plates, Horizontal Tee, Vertical Tee,
Horizontal Cross, and Vertical Cross, to form a complete Cable Tray Distribution
System.
Aluminum cable tray construction and mechanical loading shall be in accordance

with NEMA VE 1. Aluminum cable trays shall be of the ladder type. Aluminum cable
tray installations in outdoor locations shall utilize ventilated, louvered, cable tray
covers, secured with stainless steel banding, one band per 1 m of cover length,
with a minimum of three bands per cover.
Cable trays shall be installed as a complete system. Cable tray systems shall not
have mechanically discontinuous segments of cable tray runs. Cables may be
Page 214 of 221

extended from cable trays to equipment if (a) they are armored or metal clad and
are properly supported, or (b) they are installed in rigid or flexible conduit.
16.20 WATER HEATERS
Disconnect water heaters of various capacities for removal by plumber; re-connect

when plumbing repairs have been completed. Provide electrical supply for new
water heaters of various capacities inclusive of connecting all conduits and cables
fixtures, fittings, thermostats and heating elements. Inspect and test
power supply to water heater thermostats and elements. Replace or install

thermostat including all fittings and fixtures if necessary. Installation shall be in
compliance with Article 422 of the National Electrical Codes.
16.21 LAYING UNDERGROUND POWER CABLES
The installation of all underground power cables shall be in accordance with SAES
P 104.
16.21.1 The minimum depth of burial requirements for underground installations

shall be as specified in Table B-2 below. See also Standard Drawing AD-
036874.
16.21.2 In rocky areas where digging must be minimized, in areas where Table B-
2 depths would result in cables being below the water table, or to avoid
underground obstructions such as other cables, conduits or piping, cables
may be installed in one of the following configurations:
Table B-2
Minimum Cover Requirements
(Depth of Burial)
Millimeters from Grade Level to

The Top Surface of Cable, Conduit or Duct Bank
Direct Direct Buried Duct
Bank and
System Buried PVC
Direct Buried Rigid
Voltage Cables Conduit Steel

600 V and below 600 460 (1) 460 (2)
Over 600 V to 35 kV 920 600 460 (2)
Over 35 kV
1070 760 460 (2)
Notes: (1) 600 mm under roads, parking lots and other areas subject to vehicular
traffic
(2) 600 mm under roads
Exception:
Minimum burial depth for ground grid conductors
Page 215 of 221

shall be in accordance with SAES-P-111; however minimum burial depth for

ground grid conductors under roads, parking lots and other areas subject to
vehicular traffic shall be 600 mm.
a. PVC coated rigid steel conduit with a total cover not less than 300 mm,
which shall include a 50 mm thick (minimum) concrete pad over the
conduit.
b. PVC coated rigid steel conduit with a total cover not less than 150 mm,
which shall include a 100 mm thick (minimum) concrete pad over the
conduit; or
c. A duct bank with 150 mm of total cover, measured from the top of the upper
conduit, which shall include a minimum of 100 mm of concrete over the
upper conduit.
Concrete tiles cannot be used in lieu of the concrete pad in (a) or (b) above.
The top layer of the concrete pad or the duct bank shall be mixed with red
dye. (Minimum thickness: 5 mm).
16.21.3 Pre-cast 50 mm thick red concrete tiles, red plastic tiles, or PVC coated
steel fence fabric shall be placed 300 mm above direct buried cable or
direct buried conduit, in accordance with Standard Drawing AD-036874.
This does not apply to ground grid conductors, connections to ground
grids or grounding electrodes, or when paragraph 10.2 configurations are
used.
16.21.4 Duct bank design shall consist of either hot-dip galvanized rigid steel
conduit encased in non-reinforced concrete or PVC conduit encased in
reinforced concrete. There shall be a minimum of 75 mm of
concrete from the outside of the duct bank to any conduit or reinforcing
steel. Bell ends or protective bushings shall be provided on each duct
where it terminates. The top layer (5 mm minimum thickness) of the
concrete shall be mixed with red dye.
16.21.5 PVC conduits shall not be extended above grade in industrial facilities.
Where above grade extensions of buried PVC conduits are required, a
transition shall be made underground, using treaded PVC to rigid metal
conduit adapters.
Exceptions:
A. PVC stub-ups extending up to a maximum of 150 mm above ground

and not attached to equipment are permitted.
B. Conductors connecting transformer neutral terminals to grounding

resistors inside substations shall be installed above ground in PVC
conduit, which shall be physically protected
C. Equipment grounding conductors running separately from power

conductors (e.g. connections to ground grids) may be installed
Page 216 of 221

above ground in PVC conduit; if installed in rigid steel conduit; both

ends of the conduit shall be bonded to the conductor.
16.21.6 Metallic conduit entering switchgear, control cabinets and similar

enclosures from below grade shall be cut and threaded 50 mm above
finished grade level and a threaded, insulated grounding bushing shall
be installed. PVC conduit entering switchgear, control cabinets and
similar enclosures shall be cut flush with finished grade level and shall
have its inner edge filed to a smooth radius.
16.21.7 Cables and conduits entering buildings shall comply with paragraphs
5.2 and 5.4 of SAES-B-008.
16.21.8 Cables that cross under paved roads, concrete slabs, railroads, or other
areas that would require extensive or impractical excavations to
replace, shall be run in duct banks or in PVC sleeves per Table B-2.
16.21.9 Cables crossing pipeline corridors shall be installed in accordance with

SAES-B- 064.
16.21.10 The minimum crossing or parallel clearance between direct buried

cables or conduits and underground piping, including hydrocarbon
pipelines that fall outside the scope of SAES-B-064, shall be 300 mm.
For conduits, the crossing clearance may be reduced to 80 mm, if
underground obstructions make it difficult to meet the 300 mm
requirement. For direct buried cables, the same reduction is permitted
if the cable is installed in a PVC sleeve at the crossing.
16.21.11 Direct buried cables and conduits shall be installed in a single layer,
except where rearrangement is necessary at transitions to multi-layer
concrete encased duct banks or for entering buildings.
16.21.12 Marker shall be installed at all direct buried cable route, change of
direction, at every 30 meters of straight direct buried cable runs and at
every duct bank.
16.21.13 Cable route marker shall be installed as per SAUDI ARAMCO Standard.
16.21.14 Flat cable route markers shall be used and installed flushed in paved
and finished area, and markers shall be installed projecting one (1)
meter above grade in other areas.
16.21.15 Buried cable marker tape shall be installed above on red concrete tiles
or in place at approximately 50 percent of the cable depth but not closer
than 300 mm to cable.
16.22 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING AND GROUNDING SYSTEMS
All Electrical System Grounding or Equipment Grounding shall be in accordance

with SAES - P 111 GROUNDING.
Page 217 of 221

16.22.1 Conductors used in grounding systems shall be soft drawn copper.

Conductors larger than 35 sq mm (#2 AWG) shall be stranded. Bare
conductors, in direct contact with the soil with lower than 70 ohm-meters
resistivety, shall be tinned. Insulated or covered grounding conductors
shall have a green jacket or a green jacket with yellow stripes.
Commentary Note: In coastal areas where soils are known to be

corrosive to tinned copper due to compounds produced by sulfide
reducing bacteria, insulated ground conductors are recommended and if
cathodic protection is present, galvanized steel ground rods are
recommended. If insulated or covered grounding conductors are used,
ground rods must be used to achieve specified ground resistance.
16.22.2 In areas of severe corrosion (as defined in SAES-P-104), exposed ground

system conductors shall be insulated or covered.
16.22.3 Ground rods or pipe electrodes shall be copper or copper jacketed steel
("Copper weld" or equivalent). Copper jacketed steel rods shall meet the
requirements of UL 467.
Exception:
In areas where the rod will have cathodic protection, hot dip galvanized
steel rods or pipe electrodes may be used. Minimum length of ground
rods is 2.4 m. Minimum diameter of copper or copper clad ground rods is
16 mm; minimum diameter of galvanized steel rods is 19 mm. Minimum
length of each section of a sectional rod is 2.4 m. Plate electrodes shall
not be used.
16.22.4 Buried conductors used for grids and/or interconnection of ground rods
shall be minimum 70 sq mm (2/0 AWG).
16.22.5 Grounding connections to grounding grids or grounding electrodes shall

be minimum 25 sq mm (#4 AWG).
16.22.6 Connections to grounding grids or between conductors and/or ground

rods in grounding grids shall be made by thermite welding, brazing, or
approved compression grounding connectors (Burndy "Hyground" system
or equivalent). At ground test stations where it is necessary to disconnect
ground conductors for tests, approved mechanical connectors may be
used.
16.22.7 Grounding conductors extending through concrete or asphalt shall be run

in PVC conduit (preferred) or PVC coated rigid steel conduit.
16.22.8 Grounding conductors which do not accompany associated power

conductors in the same conduit shall not be installed in metallic conduit
except where PVC conduit is not suitable and it is necessary to protect
the conductor against mechanical damage. Grounding conductors
installed in metallic conduit or sleeves and which do not accompany
associated power conductors shall be bonded to both ends of the conduit.
Page 218 of 221

16.22.9 Underground ground conductors crossing a pipeline or piping shall be

insulated or covered for a minimum of 6 meters on each side of the
crossing. Underground ground conductors shall be insulated or covered
when running parallel within 3 meters of a buried pipeline or piping.
16.22.10 Three-phase electrical systems shall be grounded at the neutral point of

the wyes-connected windings of transformers or generators. The type of
system grounding shall be selected per Table.
16.22.11 System grounding connections shall be made directly to the grounding

electrode and be separate from equipment grounding connections.
System Grounding
Nominal Type
Voltage Distribution Type Grounding
Requirements
240/120 Three-Wire Solid Ground center of 24 winding
208/120 Four-Wire Solid
480 Three-Wire Solid See Note 1
480/277 Four-Wire Solid
4160 Three-Wire Low Resistance 400 A, 10 second
Resistor
13,800 Three-Wire Low Resistance 400 A, 10 Second
Resistor (See Note 2)
13,800 Three-Wire Low-Resistance 1000 A,10 Second

Resistor (See Note 2)
34,500 Three-Wire Solid
69,000 Three-Wire Solid
Notes:
1. High resistance grounding for 480 V systems is permitted with special approval.
2. Selection of rating for 13,800 V system grounding resistor shall be done by or with the
concurrence of Coordinator, Relay & Operations Engineering Division, Power
Distribution Department.
3. See SAES-P-100 for approval requirements for extension of ungrounded systems.
Ungrounded supply from captive transformers for electric submersible pumps is

recommended.
16.22.12 Except as otherwise noted below, conduit, cable tray, or cable armor,
shall not be relied on as the equipment grounding conductor and a bare
or insulated copper conductor shall be installed in the same conduit,
cable tray, cable, or cord or shall otherwise accompany the power
conductors. In hazardous locations equipment grounding conductors
Page 219 of 221

run in conduit or cable tray shall be insulated or enclosed within the

jacket of a multi-conductor cable.
16.22.13 Aluminum cable trays containing only circuits operated at, or below, 50
V to ground may be used as equipment grounding conductors provided
that NEC requirements for such use are met. On other aluminum cable
trays common equipment grounding conductor external to the cables in
the tray may be used under the following conditions. This common
conductor shall be sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-95 for the
largest power conductor in the tray, with a minimum size of 16 mm2 (#6
AWG). Connections shall be made between this common grounding
conductor and other grounding conductors for intersecting or branch
trays, and to extend the equipment grounding conductor beyond the
tray. This common conductor (or the largest individual grounding
conductor, if more than one are installed) shall be bonded to each
section of the cable tray system with a connector approved for a copper
to aluminum connection.
16.22.14 A cable concentric neutral, if properly sized and not used as a current
carrying grounded circuit conductor (3 phase 3 wire system; no neutral
loads are served), may be used as the equipment grounding conductor.
16.22.15 Metallic conduit shall be grounded at both end points. Conduit

grounding may be accomplished (1) externally with approved grounding
clamps and conductors or (2) through a grounded enclosure having
integral threaded bushings or using a conduit hub (such as a Myers
hub) which is approved for grounding purposes or (3) through an
approved grounding bushing. Grounding with lock nuts is not
acceptable.
16.22.16 Metallic cable trays shall be bonded at both end points and a minimum
of every 25 meters to the local ground grid or ground electrode or to
structural steel which is bonded to the local ground grid or ground
electrode.
16.22.17 Ground busses in switch gear, switchboards, and motor control centers
shall have two connections to the main ground electrode.
16.22.18 Raised computer floors shall be grounded by bonding a minimum of two

pedestals at opposite corners to the nearest grounding electrode.
16.23 INSPECTION AND COMMISSIONING
CONTRACTOR shall be aware of SAUDI ARAMCO's inspection requirement and

ensure that the electrical inspection has been conducted or waived prior to
beginning the pre-commissioning activities. Thus commissioning and testing on
completion shall be carried out in the presence of SAUDI ARAMCO Project
Engineer and SAUDI ARAMCO Inspection Department authorized personnel.
16.24 MISCELLANEOUS
Page 220 of 221

16.24.1 Remove and replace burnt or cracked switches and plate covers.
16.24.2 Remove exposed and non standard telephone wire and TV

cables.
16.24.3 Clean and service exhaust fan.
16.24.4 Install fiberglass insulation to existing and new incandescent light

fixtures any type.
16.24.5 Remove satellite dish / Aerial TV antenna complete and dispose

to designated dumping area.
16.24.6 Remove ceiling fan, inclusive of all fixing and accessories.
16.24.7 Disconnect, inspect, clean, replace or reconnect electrical push

button switches and outlets.
16.24.8 Service, clean and test existing panelboard. Tighten all terminals.
Update circuit directory.
16.24.9 Inspect and carry out routine safety check and test cooking
ranges, refrigerator, dish washing machines, trash compactor, garbage
disposal unit and/or other specified equipment. Check all water and
electrical connections and for any missing items. Prepare and clean all
items, and leave in an operable/acceptable condition. Any faults or leaks
must be reported to the SAUDI ARAMCO Engineer.
B. SCOPE OF WORK OF TIME UNIT RATES
1.0 CONTRACTOR Manpower, Vehicles and Equipment for Release P. O. WORK
1.1 CONTRACTOR shall make available on Time Unit Rate the manpower,
vehicles and equipment listed in pricing Attachment I to Schedule C to
perform the WORK which cannot otherwise be accomplished by
Scheduled Service or by Work Unit Rate under Attachment I to
Schedule C activities.
1.2 In the event SAUDI ARAMCO requires CONTRACTOR to provide

personnel, vehicles and equipments under Time Unit Rates, SAUDI
ARAMCO shall provide all material required to accomplish the WORK.
However, CONTRACTOR shall provide manpower, transportation, tools
and equipment necessary for its personnel to perform the WORK.
END OF ATTACHMENT IV TO SCHEDULE B
Page 221 of 221

Schedule B - Attachment 04

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Schedule B - Attachment 04

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

REQUISITION NO.

WORK SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS FOR RELEASE PURCHASE ORDERS

A. SCOPE OF WORK OF WORK UNIT RATES

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.0 SITE WORK

4.1 DECORATIVE BLOCK WALLS

5.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL

6.0 WOOD AND PLASTICS

6.1 COUNTER/WORK TOP

7.0 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

7.1 WALL/CEILING/FLOOR/ROOF INSULATIONS

7.7 EPDM ROOFING SYSTEM

8.0 DOOR AND WINDOWS

8.1 WOOD AND METAL DOOR FRAMES

9.1 PLASTER FINISHES ON CONCRETE/CMU, TIMBER/METAL STUD WALLS

10.1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS AND URINAL SCREEN

10.4 FIRE HOSE CABINETS AND REELS

10.5 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

13.0 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13.1 ASBESTOS REMOVAL

14.0 CONVEYING SYSTEM

16.1 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE

16.19 CABLE TRAY SUPPORT SYSTEM ALUMINUM LADDER TYPE

B. SCOPE OF WORK OF TIME UNIT RATES

1.0 CONTRACTOR MANPOWER, VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENTS FOR

WORK SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS OF RELEASE PURCHASE ORDER

A. SCOPE OF WORK OF WORK UNIT RATES

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1.2 All CONTRACTOR-supplied consumable/expendable materials whether

1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS

CONTRACTOR shall provide a qualified surveyor to provide all surveying WORK

1.4 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMPLETION

Engineer, the CONTRACTOR shall perform the specified test at no additional

1.4.2 SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer shall witness equipment testing,

1.4.3 CONTRACTOR shall provide supervision and labor to assist SAUDI

1.5 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES

1.6 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

1.7 TEMPORARY FENCING, STORAGE AND TOILET.

1.7.1 As and when required by SAUDI ARAMCO, CONTRACTOR shall provide

a. Proponent Name and Organization

b. CONTRACTOR Name and Contact Telephone Number (day and night)

c. SAUDI ARAMCO Engineer In-Charge, Name and Telephone Number

a. Location shall be approved by the SAUDI ARAMCO Project Engineer.

b. CONTRACTOR shall provide fire extinguishers and water barrels that

1.7.4 CONTRACTOR shall provide portable (chemical) toilets as deemed

1.8 TEMPORARY PROPERTY PROTECTION.

1.8.2 Should CONTRACTOR damage any SAUDI ARAMCO property while

1.9.2 Erection and dismantling of scaffolding must conform to the requirements

1.9.3 STEEL FIXED LADDER WITH CAGE:

1.9.3.1 Contractor shall provide, fabricate and erect standard

1.9.3.4 All ladder bolts shall be 5/8-inch (16-mm) ASTM A307

1.10 PREPARATION OF AS BUILT PLANS AND DRAWINGS

1.10.5.1 An accurate compiled List of Materials with appropriate stock

1.10.5.2 An accurate compiled List of Materials with appropriate stock

1.10.5.3 An accurate compiled List of Materials with appropriate stock

1.11 SITE CLEANING

2.0 SITE WORK

2.1.1.1 Construct necessary shoring as required to protect all existing

2.1.1.2 Provide protective measures to all items, materials, finishes,

2.1.1.3 Construct temporary dust and noise control or partition to separate

2.1.1.4 Maintain or provide necessary protection to all existing utilities

2.1.2 Concrete/Foundation Demolition

2.1.2.1 Demolish concrete foundation.